37l2020

37l2020
IBM Netfinity Servers
S37L-2020-00
IBM Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY
Hardware Maintenance Manual
February 1999
We Want Your Comments!
(Please see page 370)
IBM Netfinity Servers
S37L-2020-00
IBM Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY
Hardware Maintenance Manual
February 1999
We Want Your Comments!
(Please see page 370)
IBM
Note
Before using this information and the product it
supports, be sure to read the general information
under “Notices” on page 374.
First Edition (February 1999)
The following paragraph does not apply to the United
Kingdom or any country where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL
BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions,
therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or
typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to
the information herein; these changes will be incorporated
in new editions of the publication. IBM may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the
program(s) described in this publication at any time.
This publication was developed for products and services
offered in the United States of America. IBM may not offer
the products, services, or features discussed in this
document in other countries, and the information is subject
to change without notice. Consult your local IBM
representative for information on the products, services,
and features available in your area.
Requests for technical information about IBM products
should be made to your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
 Copyright International Business Machines
Corporation 1997, 1999. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government users–Documentation related to
Restricted rights–Use, duplication, or disclosure is subject
to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
ii
Netfinity Server HMM
About this supplement
This supplement contains diagnostic information,
Symptom-to-FRU Indexes, service information, error
codes, error messages, and configuration information for
the Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662.
Important
This manual is intended for trained servicers who are
familiar with IBM PC Server products.
Important safety information
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this
book before performing any of the instructions.
Leia todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo antes de
executar qualquer operação.
Prenez connaissance de toutes les consignes de type
Attention et
Danger avant de procéder aux opérations décrites par les
instructions.
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise, bevor Sie eine
Anweisung ausführen.
iii
Accertarsi di leggere tutti gli avvisi di attenzione e di
pericolo prima di effettuare qualsiasi operazione.
Lea atentamente todas las declaraciones de precaución y
peligro ante
de llevar a cabo cualquier operación.
Online support
Use the World Wide Web (WWW) or the IBM PC
Company BBS to download Diagnostic, BIOS Flash, and
Device Driver files.
File download address is:
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/files.html
The IBM PC Company BBS can be reached at (919)
517-0001.
IBM online addresses:
The HMM manuals online address is:
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/cdt/hmm.html
The IBM PC Company Support Page is:
http://www.us.ibm.com/support/index.html
The IBM PC Company Home Page is:
http://www.pc.ibm.com
iv
Netfinity Server HMM
Contents
About this supplement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important safety information
. . . . . . . . . .
Online support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662 .
General checkout . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic tools . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the server . . . . . .
Additional service information
. .
ServeRAID system board controller
Locations/Removals . . . . . . .
Symptom-to-FRU index . . . . .
Undetermined problems . . . . .
Parts listing (Type 8662)
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
Related service information
. .
Safety information . . . . . . . .
Laser compliance statement . . .
Send us your comments!
. . . .
Problem determination tips
. . .
Phone numbers, U.S. and Canada
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks
. . . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iii
iii
iv
1
8
11
17
19
44
66
160
285
325
327
337
338
367
370
371
372
374
374
v
vi
Netfinity Server HMM
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
General checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-on self-test (POST) . . . . . . . . .
POST beep codes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error messages - descriptions
. . . . . . .
POST error messages
. . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic error messages
. . . . . . .
Software-generated error messages . . .
System error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running diagnostic programs . . . . . . . .
Viewing the test log
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the server . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration/Setup Utility program . . . . .
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu . . . .
System summary . . . . . . . . . . . .
System information . . . . . . . . . . .
Product data
. . . . . . . . . . . .
System card data . . . . . . . . . .
PCI routing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices and I/O ports . . . . . . . . . .
Date and time
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
System security
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the power-on password menu
.
Using the Administrator Password menu
Start options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced setup
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Core chip set control
. . . . . . . .
Cache control . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI bus control . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory settings . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced ISA settings . . . . . . . .
Virtual wire mode selection . . . . . .
Plug and Play
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error logs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST error log
. . . . . . . . . . .
System error log
. . . . . . . . . .
Save settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore settings
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Load default settings
. . . . . . . . . .
Exit setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring options
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring ISA and PCI adapters
. . . . .
Resolving configuration conflicts
. . . . . .
Resolving hardware configuration conflicts
Resolving software configuration conflicts
Configuring the ethernet controller
. . . . .
Ethernet cable specifications . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
11
11
11
12
12
13
13
13
13
13
14
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
23
23
23
23
24
25
25
26
28
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
36
1
Ethernet connection problems
. . . . . . . . .
Failover for redundant Ethernet . . . . . . . . .
Special considerations when combining failover
and hot-plug functions . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring for failover
. . . . . . . . . . .
OS/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows NT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IntraNetWare
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional service information
. . . . . . . . . . .
Bypassing an unknown power-on password . . .
Ethernet subsystem error messages
. . . . . .
RPL-related error messages . . . . . . . . .
Light path diagnostics
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
System requirements for the Advanced System
Management Service with Netfinity Manager
Accessing the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor without Netfinity
Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System power menu selections . . . . . .
Boot menu selections
. . . . . . . . . .
Using remote video mode to monitor and
access POST
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the ServeRAID Advanced Configuration
Functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the BootCd feature
. . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID system board controller
. . . . . . . .
Understanding RAID technology
. . . . . . . .
Interleave depth and stripe-unit size . . . . .
Supported RAID levels
. . . . . . . . . . .
RAID level-0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAID level-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced RAID level-1
. . . . . . . . .
RAID level-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID Configuration Program
. . . . . . .
Starting the configuration program . . . . . .
Configuration mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learning about custom configuration . . . . .
Using custom configuration
. . . . . . . . .
Information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logical drive state descriptions
. . . . . . .
Physical drive state descriptions . . . . . . .
Changing the ServeRAID configuration settings
Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu bar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program . . . . .
Viewing the controller status . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Configuration Functions . . . . . .
Setting the bootable CD-ROM feature
. . . .
ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Program
2
Netfinity Server HMM
39
40
40
41
41
41
42
44
45
45
45
48
52
53
53
56
57
58
60
61
63
63
64
66
67
67
67
68
69
69
70
70
72
73
75
76
78
82
83
84
85
86
94
94
95
96
97
98
Starting the ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program . . . . . . . . . .
Options pull-down menu
. . . . . . . .
Network settings
. . . . . . . . . . . .
General options . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling or disabling the alarm . . . .
Resetting the alarm
. . . . . . . . .
Polling options
. . . . . . . . . . .
Alert options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID administration functions . . . . .
Array administration
. . . . . . . . . .
Creating disk arrays . . . . . . . . .
Deleting disk arrays . . . . . . . . .
Logical drive administration . . . . . . .
Creating logical drives . . . . . . . .
Initializing logical drives
. . . . . . .
Synchronizing logical drives
. . . . .
Unblocking logical drives . . . . . . .
Logical drive migration administration
. .
Change RAID levels . . . . . . . . .
Adding a physical drive
. . . . . . .
Physical device administration . . . . . .
Setting physical device states
. . . .
Rebuilding a device . . . . . . . . .
Adapter administration
. . . . . . . . .
Copying the drive configuration to the
adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying the adapter configuration to the
drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing the adapter . . . . . . . .
Scanning for new drives . . . . . . .
ServeRAID monitoring functions
. . . . . .
Monitoring adapter status information
. .
Monitoring the device event logs . . . . .
Monitoring the logical drive information . .
Monitoring the physical device information
ServeRAID IPSSEND program (starting)
. .
ServeRAID IPSSEND program (using)
. . .
ServeRAID server roll-out commands
. .
ServeRAID error-recovery commands
. .
ServeRAID problem-isolation and debug
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAID configuration commands
. . . . .
ServeRAID IPSMON program (starting) . . .
ServeRAID IPSMON program (using) . . . .
ServeRAID device drivers and utility programs
(installation)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM ServeRAID utility programs . . . . .
Obtaining ServeRAID updates
. . . .
Administration and Monitoring Program . . .
ServeRAID programs for Windows NT and
Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID background-server components .
ServeRAID programs for OS/2 and NetWare
. . 98
. 100
. 100
. 101
. 101
. 101
. 102
. 102
. 103
. 103
. 103
. 105
. 106
. 106
. 107
. 108
. 108
. 109
. 109
. 110
. 112
. 112
. 112
. 113
.
113
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
114
114
115
115
115
117
117
118
119
119
120
122
.
.
.
.
124
127
128
128
.
.
.
.
130
130
130
130
.
.
.
131
131
132
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
3
ServerRAID programs for OpenServer and
UnixWare
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the ServeRAID WIN32-based program
Installing ServeRAID device drivers . . . . . .
Installing ServerRAID device drivers for
Windows NT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the files while installing Windows
NT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the files after installing Windows
NT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing ServeRAID device drivers for
NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the files while installing NetWare
3.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the files after installing NetWare
3.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the files while installing NetWare
4.1X
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the files after installing NetWare
4.1X
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing ServerRAID device drivers for OS/2
Installing the files while installing OS/2
.
Installing the files after installing OS/2
.
Starting the Administration and Monitoring
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing ServerRAID device drivers for
OpenServer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the files for OpenServer
. . .
Adding BTLD at boot time . . . . . . .
Adding BTLD after the initial installation .
Using an IDE CD-ROM drive to install
OpenServer files . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the files for OpenServer 5.0.0
. .
Installing the files for OpenServer 5.0.2 and
5.0.4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing ServeRAID device drivers for
UnixWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing UnixWare on a ServeRAID drive
Installing UnixWare on a non-ServeRAID
drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the files while installing UnixWare
Installing the files after installing UnixWare
Installing an HBA diskette file using Pkgadd
Installing an HBA diskette file using
SCOAdmin
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the ServeRAID background-server
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServerRAID background-server components . .
Command-line parameters
. . . . . . . .
Logging messages . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background-server component security
. .
Background-server component name resolution
IPSSEND and IPSMON programs
. . . . . .
4
Netfinity Server HMM
132
133
134
134
135
135
136
136
137
138
138
140
140
141
143
143
144
144
145
145
145
146
146
147
149
150
151
151
151
151
152
152
153
153
154
154
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for OS/2,
Windows NT, or NetWare . . . . . . . .
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for
OpenServer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for UnixWare
Installing IPSSEND for DOS . . . . . . . .
Rebuilding a defunct drive
. . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for the rebuild operation
. . . .
General information about the rebuild operation
Automatically rebuilding the defunct drive
.
Locations/Removals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs for hot-plug PCI slots . . . . . . . .
Adapter considerations
. . . . . . . . . .
Plug and Play technology . . . . . . . . .
Plug and Play adapters
. . . . . . . .
Legacy adapters
. . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration/Setup Utility program . . .
Enabling hot-plug PCI support . . . . . . .
Hot-plug PCI adapter installation . . . . . .
Non-hot-plug adapter installation . . . . . .
Verifying compatibility between network
adapters and device drivers . . . . . . .
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing jumper positions . . . . . . . . . .
Two-pin jumper blocks
. . . . . . . . . .
Three-pin jumper blocks
. . . . . . . . .
Completing the installation . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the top cover
. . . . . . . . . .
Installing the trim bezels and server door . .
Reconfiguring the server
. . . . . . . . .
Controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a CD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DASD backplane removal
. . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics panel LEDs
. . . . . . . . . . .
External options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting external SCSI devices . . . . .
Cabling requirements
. . . . . . . . .
Setting SCSI IDs for external devices . .
Installation procedure
. . . . . . . . .
Input/output ports and connectors . . . . .
Serial ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management port C . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard and auxiliary-device ports
. .
SCSI port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet port
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal serial bus ports
. . . . . . .
RS-485 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front bezel removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot-swap power supply installation
. . . . . .
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
155
156
157
157
157
158
158
158
160
161
162
163
164
164
164
164
165
165
169
171
173
176
176
177
178
178
179
180
181
184
184
184
186
187
188
188
188
188
188
188
189
190
190
191
191
192
193
193
194
195
196
5
Hot-swap power supply removal
. . . . . . .
Hot-swap fan assembly replacement
. . . . .
Information LED panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information LED panel cover removal . . . . .
Information LED panel assembly removal . . .
Input/output connectors and expansion slots . .
Interior LED and speaker assembly . . . . . .
Internal drives installation
. . . . . . . . . .
Internal drive bays
. . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI drives
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Termination (internal SCSI devices)
. .
Preinstallation steps (all bays) . . . . . . .
Installing a 5.25-inch removable-media drive
Installing a drive in a hot-swap bay
. . . .
Replacing a drive in a hot-swap bay . . . .
Installing devices in the NetBAY3 . . . . . . .
General considerations . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the rear panel
. . . . . . . . .
Installing devices on side rails . . . . . . .
Removing cage nuts
. . . . . . . . . . .
Installing cage nuts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing cantilevered devices . . . . . . .
Installing devices on the NetBAY3 base plate
Memory board component locations . . . . . .
Memory board jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory board removal . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microprocessor installation . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing to install options . . . . . . . . . .
Power backplane removal
. . . . . . . . . .
Power supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply LEDs
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply filler panel . . . . . . . . . . .
NetBAY3 bezel installation . . . . . . . . . .
Processor board component locations . . . . .
Processor board jumpers . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor board removal . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor support tray removal . . . . . . . .
Processor support tray installation
. . . . . .
Rack installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and removing the server . . . . .
Preparing the rack . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the server in the rack . . . . .
Removing the server from a rack . . . .
SCSI backplane component locations . . . . .
SCSI backplane option jumpers . . . . . . . .
Server cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server door and trim bezels removal
. . . . .
Shuttle removal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side cover(s) removal
. . . . . . . . . . . .
System board component locations . . . . . .
System board jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . .
System board removal . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Netfinity Server HMM
200
202
205
207
208
209
212
213
213
214
215
216
216
217
220
221
225
225
225
226
227
227
228
229
230
231
232
234
238
246
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
257
259
261
262
262
263
267
270
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
282
Top cover removal . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symptom-to-FRU index . . . . . . . . . . .
Beep symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No beep symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . .
Information panel system error LED . . . .
Diagnostic error codes . . . . . . . . . .
Error symptoms
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply LED errors . . . . . . . . .
POST error codes . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI error codes
. . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID controller error codes/messages
ServeRAID POST error codes
. . . . . .
ServeRAID POST error procedures . . . .
ServeRAID Startup Messages
. . . . . .
Undetermined problems . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts listing (Type 8662)
. . . . . . . . . .
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
284
285
286
288
290
293
300
301
304
311
312
314
314
318
325
327
329
333
335
7
General checkout
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable
read-only memory (ROM) on the system board. These
programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of the server: the system board, Ethernet
controller, video controller, RAM, keyboard, mouse
(pointing device), diskette drive, serial port, and parallel
port. You can also use them to test some external
devices. See “Diagnostic programs” on page 11.
Also, if you cannot determine whether a problem is caused
by the hardware or by the software, you can run the
diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is
working properly.
When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem
might cause several error messages. When this occurs,
work to correct the cause of the first error message. After
the cause of the first error message is corrected, the other
error messages might not occur the next time you run the
test.
A failed system might be part of a shared DASD cluster
(two or more systems sharing the same external storage
device(s)). Prior to running diagnostics, verify that the
failing system is not part of a shared DASD cluster.
A system might be part of a cluster if:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
The customer identifies the system as part of a
cluster.
One or more external storage units are attached to
the system and at least one of the attached storage
units is additionally attached to another system or
unidentifiable source.
One or more systems are located near the failing
system.
If the failing system is suspect to be part of a shared
DASD cluster, all diagnostic tests can be run except
diagnostic tests which tests the storage unit (DASD
residing in the storage unit) or the storage adapter
attached to the storage unit.
8
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. For systems that are part of a shared DASD
cluster, run one test at a time in looped mode.
Do not run all tests in looped mode, as this could
enable the DASD diagnostic tests.
2. If multiple error codes are displayed, diagnose
the first error code displayed.
3. If the computer hangs with a POST error, go to
the “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285.
4. If the computer hangs and no error is displayed,
go to “Undetermined problems” on page 325.
5. Power Supply problems, see “Symptom-to-FRU
index” on page 285.
6. Safety information, see “Safety information” on
page 338.
7. For intermittent problems, check the error log;
see, “Error logs” on page 31.
001
IS THE SYSTEM PART OF A CLUSTER?
Yes No
002
Go to Step 004.
003
Schedule maintenance with the customer. Shut down all
systems related to the cluster. Run storage test.
004
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Power-off the computer and all external devices.
Check all cables and power cords.
Set all display controls to the middle position.
Power-on all external devices.
Power-on the computer.
Record any POST error messages displayed on the
screen. If an error is displayed, look up the first error in
the “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285.
Check the information LED panel System Error LED; if
on, see “Information panel system error LED” on
page 290.
Check the System Error Log. If an error was recorded
by the system, see “Symptom-to-FRU index” on
page 285.
Start the Diagnostic Programs. See “Running diagnostic
programs” on page 14.
Check for the following responses:
1. One beep.
(Step 004 continues)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
9
(CONTINUED)
004 (continued)
2. Readable instructions or the Main Menu.
DID YOU RECEIVE BOTH OF THE CORRECT
RESPONSES?
Yes No
005
Find the failure symptom in “Symptom-to-FRU index”
on page 285. Or, use remote video mode to
monitor and access POST or to look at the System
Error Log. See “Using remote video mode to monitor
and access POST” on page 58.
006
– Run the Diagnostic Programs. If necessary, refer to
“Running diagnostic programs” on page 14.
If you receive an error, go to “Symptom-to-FRU index”
on page 285.
If the diagnostics completed successfully and you still
suspect a problem, see “Undetermined problems” on
page 325.
10
Netfinity Server HMM
Diagnostic tools
The following tools are available to help identify and
resolve hardware-related problems:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Diagnostic Programs
Power-on self-test (POST)
POST beep codes
Error messages
Troubleshooting charts
Option diskettes
For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285.
Diagnostic programs
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable
read-only memory (ROM) on the system board. These
programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of the server, such as the the system board,
Ethernet controller, video controller, RAM, keyboard,
mouse (pointing device), diskette drive, serial port, and
parallel port. You can also use them to test some external
devices.
Also, if you cannot determine whether a problem is caused
by the hardware or by the software, you can run the
diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is
working properly.
Note
A single problem might cause several error messages.
When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the first
error message. After the cause of the first error
message is corrected, the other error messages might
not occur the next time you run the test.
To run the Diagnostic Programs, see “Running diagnostic
programs” on page 14.
For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285.
Power-on self-test (POST)
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests
to check the operation of server components and some of
the options installed in the server. This series of tests is
called the power-on self-test or POST.
POST does the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Checks the operation of some basic system board
operations
Checks the memory
Compares the current server configuration with the
stored server configuration information
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
11
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Configures PCI adapters
Starts the video operation
Verifies that drives (such as the diskette, CD-ROM,
and hard disk drives) are connected properly
If you have a power-on password or administrator
password set, you must type the password and press
Enter, when prompted, before POST will continue.
While the memory is being tested, the amount of available
memory appears on the screen. These numbers advance
as the server progresses through POST and the final
number that appears on the screen represents the total
amount of memory available. If POST finishes without
detecting any problems, a single beep sounds, the first
screen of the operating system or application program
appears, and the System POST Complete (OK) light is
illuminated on the information LED panel.
If POST detects a problem, more than one beep sounds
and an error message appears on the screen.
Note
A single problem might cause several error messages.
When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the first
error message. After the cause of the first error
message is corrected, the other error messages
usually will not occur the next time you run the test.
For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285.
POST beep codes
POST generates beep codes to indicate successful
completion or the detection of a problem.
Ÿ
Ÿ
One beep indicates the successful completion of
POST.
More than one beep indicates that POST detected a
problem. For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285.
Error messages - descriptions
Error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not
intended to be used to identify a failing part.
Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems
indicated by error messages should be performed by
trained service personnel.
Hardware error messages that occur can be text, numeric,
or both. Messages generated by the software generally
are text messages, but they also can be numeric.
12
Netfinity Server HMM
POST error messages:
POST error messages occur during startup when POST
finds a problem with the hardware or detects a change in
the hardware configuration. For a list of error codes and
messages, see “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285.
Diagnostic error messages:
Diagnostic error messages occur when a test finds a
problem with the server hardware. These error messages
are alphanumeric and they are saved temporarily in the
Test Log and logged in the System Error Log when
diagnostics are run. For a list of error codes and
messages, see “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285.
Software-generated error messages:
These messages occur if a problem or conflict is found by
an application program, the operating system, or both.
Messages are generally text messages, but they also can
be numeric. For information about these error messages,
refer to the documentation that comes with the software.
System error log
The System Error Log contains all error and warning
messages issued during POST and all system status
messages from the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor. See “System error log” on
page 31 for information about how to view the System
Error Log.
Option diskettes
An optional device or adapter might come with an Option
Diskette. Option Diskettes usually contain option-specific
diagnostic test programs or configuration files.
If the optional device or adapter comes with an Option
Diskette, follow the instructions that come with the option.
Different instructions apply depending on whether the
Option Diskette is startable or not.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
13
Running diagnostic programs
Note
The allowed keyboard and mouse configurations for
running diagnostics are as follows:
1. PS/2 keyboard, PS/2 mouse
2. PS/2 keyboard, no mouse -- With no mouse, you
will not be able to navigate between test
categories directly using the [Next Cat] and [Prev
Cat] buttons. All other mouse-selectable buttons
are also available via function keys.
3. USB keyboard, no mouse -- With no mouse, you
will not be able to navigate between test
categories directly using the [Next Cat] and [Prev
Cat] buttons. All other mouse-selectable buttons
are also available via function keys.
4. USB keyboard, USB mouse -- The USB mouse
will not be used by diagnostics; so, with no
mouse, you will not be able to navigate between
test categories directly using the [Next Cat] and
[Prev Cat] buttons. All other mouse-selectable
buttons are also available via function keys.
You can test the USB keyboard using the regular
keyboard test but you will not be able to test the USB
mouse. Also, you can only run the USB Hub test if
there are no USB devices attached.
While you are running the diagnostic programs, F1
displays Help information. Pressing F1 from within a help
screen provides a help index from which you can select
different categories. Pressing Esc exits Help and returns
to where you left off.
Also, be sure to check the Test Log for further diagnostic
error information.
14
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. To run the diagnostic programs, you must start
the server with the highest level password.
That is, if you enter the power-on password and
an administrator password is set, you cannot run
the programs. You can only view the error
messages in the Test Log.
2.
3.
4.
5.
You must enter the administrator password to run
the diagnostic programs.
If the server stops during testing and you cannot
continue, restart the server and try running the
diagnostic programs again.
You might have to install a wrap connector on
the active parallel, serial, or Ethernet port to
obtain accurate test results for these ports. If
you do not have a wrap connector, contact your
IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
You might need a scratch diskette (that is, a
diskette which has no contents that you want to
save) to obtain accurate test results when testing
the diskette drive.
The keyboard and mouse (pointing device) tests
assume that a keyboard and mouse are attached
to the server.
Tips on the diagnostic programs:
1. For system board tests, first remove all installed
adapters.
2. Hard drive surface analysis can be found on the
Utility menu.
3. Check the System Error Log for entries when memory
errors occur.
4. Universal serial bus testing notes:
Ÿ The USB interface test will fail with a normal
keyboard and a USB device attached.
Ÿ The USB interface test will abort with a USB
keyboard and USB mouse in use.
Ÿ The system will disable USB during POST with a
standard keyboard attached.
5. When viewing a test, if it has dashes (-) through its
box, it is unable to run because the relevant device is
either not installed or is failing.
To load the diagnostic programs:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
If the server is turned on already, shut down the
operating system and restart the server.
2. When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears,
press F2.
If a power-on password or administrator password is
set, the server prompts you for it. Type in the
appropriate password; then, press Enter.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
15
3. The Diagnostics Programs screen appears.
To run the diagnostic programs:
1. Select either Extended or Basic from the top of the
screen.
2. Select the test you want to run from the list that
appears; then, follow the instructions on the screen.
When the tests have completed, you can view the
Test Log by selecting Utility from the top of the
screen or by pressing F3.
Also, you can view server configuration information
(such as system configuration, memory contents,
interrupt request (IRQ) use, direct memory access
(DMA) use, device drivers, and so on) by selecting
Hardware Info from the top of the screen.
If the hardware checks out OK but the problem persists
during normal server operations, a software error might be
the cause. If you suspect a software problem, refer to the
information that comes with the software package. Press
F3 to view the error information in the Test Log.
For a list of error codes and messages, see
“Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285
Viewing the test log
If you are already running the diagnostic programs,
continue with step 4 in this procedure.
Notes
The Test Log will not contain any information until
after the diagnostic program has run.
The Test Log is maintained in memory while the
server is powered on. Turning off the power clears
the Test Log.
Be aware of the function keys and other instructions at
the bottom of each screen as you view the Test Log.
To view the Test Log:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
If the server is turned on already, shut down the
operating system and restart the server.
2. When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears,
press F2.
If a power-on password or administrator password is
set, the server prompts you for it. Type in the
appropriate password; then, press Enter.
3. The Diagnostic programs screen appears.
4. Select Utility from the top of the screen.
5. Select View Test Log from the list that appears; then,
follow instructions on the screen.
16
Netfinity Server HMM
Features
The following table summarizes the features of the
Netfinity 5500 M20.
Microprocessor
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Intel Pentium III Xeon microprocessor with
MMX technology
32 KB of level-1 cache
512 KB of level-2 cache (min.)
Expandable to four microprocessors
Memory
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Eight dual inline memory-module (DIMM) sockets
Standard: 256 MB (min.), expandable to 4 GB
100 MHz registered, error correcting code (ECC),
synchronous dynamic random access memory
(SDRAM)
Diskette Drive
Ÿ
Standard: One 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB
Hard Disk Drives
Ÿ
Up to six hot-swappable hard disk drives supported
CD-ROM Drive
Ÿ
Standard: 32X IDE
Keyboard and Auxiliary Device
(standard only on tower models)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Keyboard
Mouse
Expansion Bays
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Six slim (1-inch) or three half-high (1.6-inch) hot-swap
drive bays
Three 5.25-inch removable-media bays (one used by
CD-ROM drive)
The IBM Netfinity NetBAY3 (tower models only)
enables installation of options that provide extra
expansion bays
Expansion Slots
Up to six adapters can be installed.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Four 32-bit hot-plug PCI slots
One standard (non-hot-plug) 32-bit PCI slot (for short
card only)
One 16-bit ISA slot
Upgradable Microcode
Ÿ
BIOS, diagnostics, Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor, and ServeRAID upgrades
(when available) can update EEPROMs on the
system board
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
17
Security Features
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Door and top cover lock (tower models only)
NetBAY3 bezel lock
Power-on and administrator passwords
Selectable drive-startup
Keyboard password
Systems management security
– User log-in password
– Read-only or read/write access
– Dial back
Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) Alerts
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Power supplies
Fans
Memory
Hard disk drives
Microprocessors
Voltage regulator modules (VRMs)
Integrated Functions
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Two serial ports
Two universal serial bus (USB) ports
One parallel port
Mouse port
Keyboard port
Video port
IBM ServeRAID controller (two channels) on system
board
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet port (controller on
system board)
Redundant Ethernet capability, through the use of an
optional network interface card (NIC)
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
on system board
Dedicated Advanced System Management I/O port
Video controller (with 1 MB video memory) compatible
with:
– Super video graphics array (SVGA)
– Video graphics adapter (VGA)
RS-485 port
External SCSI port
Power Supply
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
500 W (115–230 V ac)
Automatic voltage range selection
Built-in overload and surge protection
Automatic restart after a loss of power
For redundant power, an optional 500 W power
supply is available
Redundant Cooling
Ÿ
18
Four hot-swap fans
Netfinity Server HMM
Configuring the server
The following configuration information supports Netfinity
5500 M20 - Type 8662.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
“Configuration overview” on page 20
“Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 21
“Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 22
“Configuring options” on page 32
“Configuring ISA and PCI adapters” on page 33
“Resolving configuration conflicts” on page 33
“Configuring the ethernet controller” on page 35
“Ethernet cable specifications” on page 36
“Ethernet connection problems” on page 39
“Failover for redundant Ethernet” on page 40
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
19
Configuration overview
You play a key role in how the server allocates resources
to organize and interconnect hardware devices and
software programs. This allocation process is referred to
as configuration. The steps required to configure the
server depend on the number and types of devices and
programs that you install.
The server supports several types of adapters and SCSI
devices. Because of this flexibility, you can choose from
among many adapters and devices that comply with any of
the following standards:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI)
Industry Standard Architecture (ISA)
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI)
In general, the greater the number and variety of hardware
devices and software programs that you install in the
server, the more you will have to interact with the server
and the devices to correctly configure the system.
The server comes with the following hardware
configuration utility programs:
Ÿ
Configuration/Setup Utility
Ÿ
With the built-in Configuration/Setup Utility program,
you can configure system board functions, such as
serial and parallel port assignments; change interrupt
request (IRQ) settings; and change the startup
sequence for drives that you install. You also can
use this utility program to set passwords for starting
up the server and accessing the Configuration/Setup
Utility program.
ServeRAID
You can use ServeRAID programs to define and
maintain the disk arrays. You can also use these
programs to configure SCSI devices (such as
hot-swap drives) that are attached to the ServeRAID
controller on the system board. Refer to “ServeRAID
system board controller” on page 66 for complete
instructions.
Before installing a new device or program, read the
documentation that comes with it. Reading the instructions
helps you to determine the steps required for installation
and configuration. The following actions are typically, but
not always, required to configure the server.
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and
record the current configuration settings.
2. Set jumpers or switches on the server system board.
See “Changing jumper positions” on page 176 and
“System board jumpers” on page 280.
3. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the device installation instructions.
20
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Install the device in the server.
See “Locations/Removals” on page 160.
If you install an ISA adapter that is not a Plug and
Play device, select the Plug and Play choice on the
main menu of the Configuration/Setup Utility program
to assign the ISA legacy resources. See “Plug and
Play” on page 31 for more information.
5. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions that come with the
software.
6. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Resolving configuration conflicts” on page 33.
Configuration/Setup Utility program
For most configurations, the server will operate using the
default system settings. You need to change the settings
only to resolve configuration conflicts or to enable or
change device functions (for example, defining diskette
types, and so on).
When you want or need to change the default settings, the
Configuration/Setup Utility program provides a convenient
way to display and change the settings.
After you run and exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility
program, configuration information is stored in nonvolatile
random-access memory (NVRAM). While the server is off,
the configuration information remains available for the next
system startup.
Always run the Configuration/Setup Utility program if you
add, remove, or relocate any hardware option, or if you
receive an error message instructing you to do so. Review
this information and the information that comes with the
option before making changes.
Finally, should you ever need to restore the default
configuration, the default configuration can be loaded by
starting the system and then pressing the reset button four
times, waiting 15 seconds between each press. Once the
configuration has reset to the default, it must be saved in
Setup to be stored in CMOS.
To start the Configuration/Setup Utility program:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
2. When the message Press F1 for
Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
21
Note
If you enter the power-on password and an
administrator (supervisor-level) password is also set, a
limited version of the menu appears. To see the full
menu, you must restart the server and enter the
administrator password when you are prompted to
enter a password. See “System security” on page 25
for additional information.
The Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu
appears. For information about the menu, see
“Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.”
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
From the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, you can
select settings that you want to change. The
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu is similar to the
following screen:
IBM Netfinity Setup - © IBM Corporation 1998
Configuration/Setup Utility
• System Summary
• System Information
• Devices and I/O Ports
• Date and Time
• System Security
• Start Options
• Advanced Setup
• Plug and Play
• Error Logs
Save Settings
Restore Settings
Load Default Settings
Exit Setup
<F1> Help
<Esc> Exit
< ↑ > < ↓ > Move
<Enter> Select
Pressing F1 displays Help information for a selected menu
item.
Note
The choices on some menus might differ slightly,
depending on the BIOS version that comes with the
server.
To change configuration settings:
1. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to
highlight the menu item for the configuration setting
that you want to change; then, press Enter.
2. Use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
choose the appropriate setting for the selected menu
item; then, press Enter.
3. Repeat step 1 through step 2 for each setting that
you want to change. Press Esc to return to the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
22
Netfinity Server HMM
4. After making changes, you can select:
Ÿ Save Settings to save the selected changes.
Ÿ Restore Settings to delete the changes and
restore the previous settings.
Ÿ Load Default Settings to cancel the changes
and restore the factory settings.
5. To exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu, select Exit Setup. If you made any changes
and did not save them with the Save Settings choice,
the system prompts you to save or discard the
changes when you attempt to exit from the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
System summary:
Select this choice to display configuration information,
including the type and speed of the microprocessor and
amount of memory.
Changes that you make to configuration settings appear on
this summary screen. You cannot edit the fields.
The System Summary choice appears on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu and on the limited
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
System information:
Select this choice to display information about the Netfinity
5500 M20, and to view the IRQ settings for the RAID and
Ethernet controllers on the system board, and other PCI
adapters that you purchase and install.
Changes that you make on other menus might appear on
this summary screen. You cannot edit any fields.
The System Information choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
Product data: Select this choice to view system
information, such as the machine type and model, the
system serial number, the system board identifier, and the
revision level or issue date of the flash electronically
erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM) for the Netfinity
Advanced System Management Processor, diagnostics,
and BIOS.
System card data: Select this choice to view
information for the system board and processor board.
PCI routing: Select this choice to view the IRQ settings
for PCI adapters and for the Ethernet, SCSI, and other
controllers on the system board. See “PCI bus control” on
page 30 for information about changing the PCI IRQ
settings.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
23
Devices and I/O ports:
Software recognizes ports through their port assignments.
Each port must have a unique port assignment. The
Configuration/Setup Utility program normally handles this,
but you might have special hardware or software that
requires you to change these assignments.
Note
Serial port A can be shared by the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor and operating system.
Serial port B is used by the operating system only.
Management port C is controlled exclusively by the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor,
cannot be used by the operating system, and cannot
be configured using the Configuration/Setup Utility
program.
Select the Devices and I/O Ports choice to view or
change the assignments for devices and input/output ports.
You can add serial ports by installing a serial adapter in an
expansion slot. See the documentation that comes with
the serial adapter for information about port assignments.
You can configure the parallel port as bidirectional; that is,
so that data can be both read from and written to a device.
In bidirectional mode, the server supports Extended
Capabilities Port (ECP) and Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP).
To display or change the assignments for devices,
serial ports, or the parallel port:
1. Select Devices and I/O Ports.
2. Select a device or port; use the Left Arrow (←) or
Right Arrow (→) key to advance through the settings
available.
The Devices and I/O Ports choice appears only on
the full Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
Notes
1. When you configure the parallel port as
bidirectional, use an IEEE 1284-compliant cable.
The maximum length of the cable must not
exceed 3 meters (9.8 feet).
2. The universal serial bus (USB) is configured
automatically. For further details about Plug and
Play devices, see “Plug and Play” on page 31.
3. If you install a USB keyboard that has a mouse
port, the USB keyboard emulates a mouse and
you will not be able to disable the mouse setting
in the Configuration/Setup Utility.
24
Netfinity Server HMM
Date and time:
Select this choice to set the system date and time.
The system time is in a 24-hour format:
hour:minute:second.
The system date is in standard format for your country or
region. For example, in the United States, the format is
MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year).
Select Date and Time; then, use the Left Arrow (←) or
Right Arrow (→) key to advance through each data field.
Type the new information; the system saves the
information as you type it.
The Date and Time choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
System security:
To control access to the information in the server
databases, you can implement two levels of password
protection. Implementing these security measures helps
you to ensure the integrity of the data and programs that
are stored in the server.
After you set a power-on password, you can enable the
unattended-start mode. This locks the keyboard and
mouse, but allows the system to start the operating
system. The keyboard and mouse remain locked until you
enter the correct password.
The System Security choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup menu.
To set, change, or delete a password:
1. Select System Security.
2. Select the password that you want to change.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
After you set a power-on or administrator password, you
must enter the password when you turn on the server.
(The passwords do not appear on the screen as you type
them.)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
25
Type of Password
Results
No password set
Ÿ
Ÿ
No password required to start system.
You can access all choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Power-on password
only
Ÿ
You must enter the password to complete
the system startup.
You can access all the choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Ÿ
Administrator
password only
Ÿ
Ÿ
Administrator and
power-on password
Ÿ
You must enter the password to complete
the system startup.
Administrator password provides access to
all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
You can enter either password to complete
the system startup.
– Administrator password provides
access to all choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
You can set, change, or delete both
the administrator and power-on
passwords, and allow a power-on
password to be changed by the user.
– Power-on password provides access to
a limited set of choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
This might include changing or deleting
the power-on password.
Note
If you forget the power-on password, and
the administrator password has been set,
use the administrator password at the
power-on password prompt; then, start the
Configuration/Setup Utility program and
change the power-on password.
Using the power-on password menu: When a
power-on password is set, you must enter a password
each time that you start the system.
To set a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password menu appears.
2. Type the password in the Enter Power-on Password
data field.
You can use any combination of up to seven
characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for the power-on
password. Keep a record of the password in a
secure place.
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Power-on Password
Again data field and type the password again.
Note
A message appears if the two passwords do not
match. If this happens, press Esc to cancel the
request and return to the System Security menu.
4. Select Change Power-on Password to save the new
password; then, press Enter.
26
Netfinity Server HMM
When a power-on password is set, POST does not
complete until you enter the password. If you forget the
power-on password, you can regain access to the server
through one of the following methods:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If an administrator password has been set, enter the
administrator password at the power-on prompt. (See
“Using the Administrator Password menu” on page 28
for details.) Start the Configuration/Setup Utility
program and change the power-on password as
previously described in this section (see steps 1
through 4).
If an Administrator Password has not been set, you
can change the position of the Power-On Password
Override jumper, as described in “Bypassing an
unknown power-on password” on page 45.
You can remove the battery as described in “Battery
replacement” on page 173 and then reinstall the
battery.
To delete a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password menu appears.
2. Select Delete Power-on Password; then, press
Enter.
3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to
delete the power-on password. Press Esc to cancel
the request and return to the System Security menu.
To allow the system to start in unattended mode when
a power-on password is set:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password screen appears.
2. Select Allow for unattended boot with password.
Press the Left Arrow (←) key or Right Arrow (→) key
to toggle the entry to On.
Note
The Allow for unattended boot with password data
field must be set to On for the system to support
locally or remotely scheduled system shutdowns or
restarts in unattended-start mode.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
27
Using the Administrator Password menu: The
administrator password (sometimes called a
supervisor-level password) controls access to some
features of the server, including the Configuration/Setup
Utility program.
Attention
If an administrator password is set and then forgotten,
it cannot be overridden or removed. You must replace
the system board.
To set an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Administrator Password menu appears.
2. Type the password in the Enter Administrator
Password data field.
A password can contain any combination of up to
seven alphanumeric characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9).
Keep a record of the password in a secure place.
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Administrator
Password Again data field and type the password
again.
Note
A message appears if the two passwords do not
match. If this happens, press Esc to cancel the
request and return to the System Security menu.
4. Select Change Administrator Password to save the
new password; then, press Enter. The password
becomes effective immediately.
To delete an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Administrator Password menu appears.
2. Select Delete Administrator Password; then, press
Enter.
3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to
delete the administrator password. Press Esc to
return to the System Security menu.
To enable a user to change the power-on password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System
Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Administrator Password screen appears.
2. Select Power-on password changeable by user.
Press the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
toggle the entry to Yes.
28
Netfinity Server HMM
When this choice is enabled, System Security appears on
the limited Configuration/Setup Utility menu. The System
Security menu contains the Power-on Password choice.
Start options:
Start options take effect when you start the server.
You can select keyboard operating characteristics, such as
the keyboard speed. You also can specify whether the
keyboard number lock starts on or off. You also can
enable the server to run in disketteless and monitorless
operation.
The server uses a startup sequence to determine the
device from which the operating system loads. For
example, you can define a startup sequence that checks
for a startable diskette in the diskette drive, then checks
the hard disk drive in bay 1, and then checks a network
adapter.
You can enable a virus-detection test that checks for
changes in the master boot record at startup. You also
can choose to run POST in the enhanced mode or the
quick mode.
Select Start Options; then, use the Left Arrow (←) or
Right Arrow (→) key to advance through each data field.
The Start Options choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
Advanced setup:
Select Advanced Setup to change values for advanced
hardware features, such as cache control, ROM
shadowing, and PCI bus control.
A warning message displays above the choices on this
menu, to alert you that the system might malfunction if
these options are configured incorrectly. Follow the
instructions on the screen carefully.
Use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to scroll
through each data field after you select one of the setup
options.
The Advanced Setup choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.
Core chip set control: Select this choice to change
settings for the bridge chips in the server.
Cache control: Select this choice to enable or disable
the microprocessor caches. In addition, you can define the
microprocessor cache mode as write-back (WB) or
write-through (WT).
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
29
Selecting write-back mode will provide the maximum
system performance.
Note
If the system does not start (boot) successfully after
three attempts, the default configuration is loaded,
disabling the cache.
PCI bus control: Select PCI Bus Control to get the
following choices:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
PCI-PCI Bridge Pre-fetching: Set PCI-PCI bridge
pre-fetching to Enabled for maximum performance.
If you experience problems running peer-to-peer
adapters, disable this function.
PCI Primary Bus 0 MLT: This setting is for the
primary bus 0 master latency timer (MLT). It can be
used to help tune performance of the server.
PCI Primary Bus 1 MLT: This setting is for the
primary bus 1 master latency timer (MLT). It can be
used to help tune performance of the server.
PCI Interrupt Routing: This choice can be used to
manually override the interrupts for PCI devices. Any
changes that you make in PCI Interrupt Routing will
not be reflected in the IRQ settings displayed in the
PCI Routing selection of the System Information
menu until you restart the server.
Memory settings: Select this choice to manually
disable or enable a row of memory.
If a memory error is detected during POST or memory
configuration, the server can automatically disable the
failing row of memory and continue operating with reduced
memory capacity. If this occurs, you must manually
enable the row of memory after the problem is corrected.
Choose Memory Settings from the Advanced Setup
menu; then use the the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓)
key to highlight the row that you want to enable. Use the
Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to select Enable. If
you boot the system with the bad row empty, this choice
resets the row.
Advanced ISA settings: Select this choice to select
the I/O recovery timer settings.
Virtual wire mode selection: Select this choice to
change the virtual wire mode in which the server will start.
The default is virtual wire IOAPIC mode. Only select
virtual wire mode PIC mode to run non-SMP operating
systems, such as Novell NetWare 3.xx.
30
Netfinity Server HMM
Plug and Play:
Before you can install Plug and Play adapters, you must
configure ISA legacy adapters (if applicable) and assign
the resources that are used by these adapters. When you
install an ISA legacy adapter, you must allocate the system
resources that the adapter will use. Select Plug and Play
to view and identify these resources, which include:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Memory
I/O ports
Direct memory access (DMA)
Interrupt
Note
These menus do not display the resources that are
required for the system or by Plug and Play devices.
Select Plug and Play; then, use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down
Arrow (↓) key to highlight the assignment that you want to
change. Use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
select from the list of available choices.
Enter the appropriate values in the Interrupt Resources
data fields. These values range from 0 through 15.
The Plug and Play choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Note
For further details about Plug and Play devices, see
“Plug and Play technology” on page 164.
Error logs:
Select Error Logs to choose to view either the POST error
log or the System Error Log.
POST error log: Select POST Error Log to view the
three most recent errors detected and logged during
POST. You can clear the Post error log from this screen
by selecting Clear error logs.
System error log: Select System Error Log to view
the System Error Log. The System Error Log contains all
of the error and warning messages generated during
POST and all system status messages from the Netfinity
Advanced System Management Processor. The most
recent error is displayed first. Use the Up Arrow (↑) and
Down Arrow (↓) keys to move through the System Error
Log. You can clear the System Error Log by selecting
Clear error logs.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
31
Save settings:
After you make configuration changes, review them to be
sure that they contain the correct information. If the
information is correct, select Save Settings to save the
selected changes.
Restore settings:
After you make configuration changes, review them to be
sure that they contain the correct information. If the
information is incorrect, or if you do not want to save these
changes, select Restore Settings to delete the changes
and restore the previous settings.
Load default settings:
If you make configuration changes and then decide that
you want to use default values instead, select Load
Default Settings to cancel the changes and restore the
factory settings.
Exit setup:
Select to exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
If you have made any changes, you will be asked if you
want to make the changes or exit without making the
changes.
Configuring options
Before installing a new device or program, read the
documentation that comes with it. Reading the instructions
helps you to determine the steps that are required for
installation and configuration. The following list provides a
preview of the actions that might be required to configure
the server.
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and
record the current configuration settings.
See “Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 21.
2. Set jumpers or switches on the server system board.
See “Changing jumper positions” on page 176 and
“System board jumpers” on page 280.
3. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the instructions that came with the adapter.
4. Install the adapter in the server.
See “Adapters” on page 161.
5. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions that came with the
software.
6. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Resolving configuration conflicts” on page 33.
32
Netfinity Server HMM
Configuring ISA and PCI adapters
You cannot assign an ISA adapter to the same interrupt
that you have assigned to a PCI adapter. This is because
the Netfinity 5500 M20 does not support interrupt sharing
among PCI and ISA adapters.
If a situation occurs where you need an additional
interrupt, you can use an interrupt from another function
that you might not need, such as COM2 (Interrupt 3).
To configure ISA adapters, select Plug and Play and
follow the instructions on the screen. See “Plug and Play”
on page 31 and “Plug and Play technology” on page 164
for additional information.
PCI devices automatically communicate with the server
configuration information. This usually results in automatic
configuration of a PCI device. If a conflict does occur, see
“Resolving configuration conflicts.”
Multiple-function PCI adapters use more than one interrupt.
When you install one of these adapters, review the IRQ
assignments in the Configuration/Setup Utility programs
(see “PCI routing” on page 23). Verify that the IRQ
assignments are correct.
The Netfinity 5500 M20 uses a rotational interrupt
technique to configure PCI adapters. This technique
enables you to install a variety of PCI adapters that
currently do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
Resolving configuration conflicts
The resources used by the server consist of IRQs, DMA,
I/O ports addresses, and memory. This information is
useful when a resource configuration conflict occurs.
Conflicts in the configuration occur if:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
A device is installed that requires the same resource
as another device. (For example, a conflict occurs
when two adapters try to write to the same address
space.)
A device resource is changed (for example, changing
jumper settings).
A device function is changed (for example, assigning
COM1 to two serial ports).
A software program is installed that requires the same
resource as a hardware device.
The steps required to resolve a configuration error are
determined by the number and variety of hardware devices
and software programs that you install. If a hardware
configuration error is detected, a configuration error
message appears after the server completes POST and
before the operating system is loaded. You can bypass
the error by pressing Esc while the error message is
displayed.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
33
The Configuration/Setup Utility program configures the
system hardware and PCI IRQs. The program does not
consider the requirements of the operating system or the
application programs. See “Resolving software
configuration conflicts” on page 34 for additional
information.
Resolving hardware configuration
conflicts:
Use the following information to help resolve hardware
configuration conflicts:
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view
and change resources used by the system board
functions and the installed options. Record the
current settings before making any changes. (See
“Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 21 for
instructions.)
2. Determine which adapter or device is causing the
conflict.
3. Change adapter jumpers or switches. Some devices
use jumpers and switches to define the system
resources that the devices need. If the settings are
incorrect or set to use a resource that cannot be
shared, a conflict occurs and the device will remain
deactivated by the configuration program.
4. Remove the device or adapter. Some configurations
are not supported. If you must remove an adapter,
see “Adapters” on page 161.
Resolving software configuration conflicts:
The memory-address space and IRQs used by some
hardware options might conflict with addresses defined for
use through application programs or the expanded memory
specification (EMS). (EMS is used only with DOS.)
If a conflict exists, one or more of the following conditions
might exist:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
The system cannot load the operating system.
The system does not work.
An application program does not operate, or it returns
an error.
Screen messages indicate a conflict exists.
To resolve conflicts, you can change the software or
hardware configuration.
Note
Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view
the addresses used by the system board functions.
(See “Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 21
for instructions.)
34
Netfinity Server HMM
The best way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to
change the addresses used by the application program or
the device driver. You can use the Configuration/Setup
Utility program to change addresses.
If a device driver is causing a memory-address conflict,
refer to the operating system documentation or the
documentation that comes with the device drivers.
Configuring the ethernet controller
The Netfinity 5500 M20 server comes with an Ethernet
controller on the system board. The Ethernet controller
provides 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX support through the
RJ-45 connector on the back of the server. When you
connect the server to the network, the Ethernet controller
automatically detects the data-transfer rate (10 Mbps or
100 Mbps) on the network and then sets the controller to
operate at the appropriate rate. That is, the Ethernet
controller will adjust to the network data rate, whether the
data rate is standard Ethernet (10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet
(100BASE-TX), half duplex (HDX), or full duplex (FDX).
This process is also known as auto-negotiation. This
auto-negotiation occurs without requiring software
intervention. The controller supports half-duplex (HDX)
and full-duplex (FDX) modes at both speeds.
However, auto-negotiation works only if the hub or switch
at the other end of the network also supports
auto-negotiation. If the hub or switch does not support
auto-negotiation, the speed (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps) will still
be detected correctly, but half-duplex mode will always be
selected. A full-duplex switch that does not support
auto-negotiation will not attach to the Netfinity 5500 M20
server in full-duplex mode. In this case, if you want the
network to operate in full-duplex mode, you must manually
override the settings to obtain a full-duplex connection.
Refer to the Ethernet documentation for additional
information.
Attention
Ÿ
Ÿ
The 10BASE-T Ethernet and the 100BASE-TX
Fast Ethernet cabling in the network must be
Category 5 or higher to meet various standards,
including electromagnetic compatibility.
You must install a device driver to enable the
operating system to address the Ethernet
controller. Use ServerGuide to install this device
driver. Refer to the ServerGuide package for
instructions on installing device drivers.
Fast Ethernet operates at a data rate of 100 Mbps; that is,
ten times faster than standard Ethernet. However, except
for the different operating speeds, Fast Ethernet and
standard Ethernet are structurally identical. Applications
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
35
and protocols that are currently installed on a standard
Ethernet system can be seamlessly migrated to a Fast
Ethernet system. (In a very small number of cases, minor
tuning might be required to adjust the application to the
faster response time of a Fast Ethernet system.) Because
of the equivalence of the two types of Ethernet, mixed
Ethernet and Fast Ethernet systems also can be designed
and implemented.
The bandwidth required at each workstation connected to
a server is generally far less than the bandwidth required
at the server. This is because the server might have to
handle the bandwidth of multiple workstations at the same
time. A cost-effective solution to the bandwidth
requirements of this type of system is a mixed Ethernet
and Fast Ethernet network. This mixed network consists
of standard Ethernet connections at the workstations and
Fast Ethernet connections at the servers.
The Ethernet controller is a PCI device, and is therefore a
Plug and Play device. You do not have to set any jumpers
or configure the controller for the operating system before
you use the Ethernet controller.
The Ethernet controller supports the auto-detection mode
only. When you install the device drivers and configure
the Ethernet controller for use with the operating system,
do not select the 10BASE-T mode. To ensure proper
operation of the controller, always select the default
parameters provided.
Notes
The Ethernet controller supports the operating
systems that the server supports. To find out which
operating systems the server supports, go to the
following World Wide Web address:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/server/
If you need additional Ethernet connections, you can install
an Ethernet adapter, such as an IBM 10/100 Ethernet
adapter. Review the network adapter documentation for
any additional configuration requirements.
Note
If you are installing an IBM 10/100 Ethernet adapter,
be sure to run the Ethernet diagnostics and record the
server's Ethernet configuration information before you
install the adapter.
Ethernet cable specifications
The Ethernet controller on the system board provides
10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX support through the RJ-45
connector on the back of your server. When you connect
the server to the network, the Ethernet controller
36
Netfinity Server HMM
automatically detects the data-transfer rate (10 Mbps or
100 Mbps) on the network and then sets the controller to
operate at the appropriate rate.
The Ethernet controller supports the auto-detection mode
only. When you install the device drivers and configure
the Ethernet controller for use with the operating system,
do not select the 10BASE-T mode. To ensure proper
operation of the controller, always select the default
parameters provided.
The following information describes the specifications for
the unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable that can be used
to connect the server to an IEEE Standard 802.3 network.
To connect the server 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX port to a
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX port on a repeater, use a UTP
cable with RJ-45 connectors at both ends. An EIA/TIA-568
Category 5 cable must be used for 10BASE-T and
100BASE-TX.
Attention
The 10BASE-T Ethernet and the 100BASE-TX Fast
Ethernet cabling in the network must be Category 5 or
higher to meet various standards, including
electromagnetic compatibility.
The cables used in 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX link
segments do not require grounding. However, all devices
connected to the cables must be grounded.
Connect the appropriate type of UTP cable to the repeater.
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the port on the repeater is a crossover port (also
called an MDI-X port), use a UTP cable that is wired
as a straight-through cable.
If the port on the repeater is not a crossover port
(also known as an MDI port), use a UTP cable that is
wired as a crossover cable.
Do not use telephone extension cables to connect the
server to a repeater. The wire pairs in those cables are
not twisted, and the cables do not meet other requirements
for use in a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX network. You can
identify telephone extension cables by their flat and thin
appearance. UTP cables are rounder and thicker than
telephone extension cables.
Table 1 on page 38 describes the specifications for UTP
cables used in 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX link segments.
Cables for these link segments must be certified as
EIA/TIA-568 Category 5.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
37
Table 1. Cabling specifications for 10BASE-T and
100BASE-TX link segments
Characteristic
Specificationñ
Cable type
UTP cable with two twisted pairs
of 22, 24, or 26 AWGò wire
Nominal impedance
100 Ohms
Velocity of propagation
0.585 có
Maximum attenuation
Ÿ
Ÿ
For 10BASE-T: 8 to 10 dB
per 100 m at 10 MHz
For 100BASE-TX: 67 dB
per 305 m at 100 MHz
Cables that have been certified as EIA/TIA-568
Category 5 meet all 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX
specifications. An EIA/TIA-568 Category 5 cable must
be used for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX.
The cable can contain two to four twisted pairs, but
only two of the pairs will be used by the 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX network.
The c represents the velocity of light traveling in a
vacuum, which is 300 000 km/sec (186 400 mi/sec).
ñ
ò
ó
Notes
AWG = American Wire Gauge
EIA = Electronics Industries Association
STP = shielded twisted pair
TIA = Telecommunications Industries Association
The following figure illustrates the RJ-45 connector.
10BASE-T or 100 BASE-TX
UTP Cable
1
2
RJ-45 Modular Plug Connector
3
Pins
6
The following figure illustrates the wiring in straight-through
cables.
RJ-45 Modular Connector
10BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX RJ-45 Modular Connector
Signal
Name
Pin
Pin
Signal
Name
1
TD+
1
1
TD+
1
TD
2
2
TD
2
RD+
3
3
RD+
2
RD
6
6
RD
Twisted
Pair
3, 4
(Not used) 4, 5, 7, 8
Relative to the device connected to the adapter
38
Netfinity Server HMM
4, 5, 7, 8
(Not used)
The following figure illustrates the wiring in crossover
cables.
RJ-45 Modular Connector 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX RJ-45 Modular Connector
Twisted
Pair
Signal
Name
Pin
Pin
Signal
Name
1
TD+
1
1
TD+
1
TD
2
2
TD
2
RD+
3
3
RD+
2
RD
6
6
RD
3, 4
(Not used) 4, 5, 7, 8
4, 5, 7, 8
(Not used)
Relative to the device connected to the adapter
Note
For additional information about Ethernet protocols,
refer to your Ethernet documentation.
Ethernet connection problems
Note
1. If you use the integrated Ethernet controller, you
must use Category 5 cabling. See “Ethernet
cable specifications” on page 36 for additional
information about Ethernet cable requirements.
2. If you directly connect two workstations (without a
hub), or if you are not using a hub with X ports,
use a crossover cable. To determine whether a
hub has an X port, check the port label. If the
label contains an X, the hub has an X port.
If the ethernet adapter cannot connect to the network, do
the following.
1. Verify that the cable is installed correctly.
2. Check the Ethernet activity light on the front of the
server.
Note
This light is off when you run the diagnostic
programs in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program.
If the Ethernet activity light is off:
a. Make sure that the hub and network are
operating, and that the correct device drivers are
loaded.
b. There might be a defective Ethernet connector or
cable, or a problem with the hub.
3. Make sure that you are using the correct device
drivers that come with the server.
4. Check for operating system-specific causes for the
problem.
5. Test the Ethernet controller or adapter.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
39
How you test the Ethernet controller or adapter
depends on which operating system is being used
(see “Configuring the ethernet controller” on
page 35).
Failover for redundant Ethernet
The Netfinity 5500 M20 has an integrated Ethernet
controller. The IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter
is an optional redundant network interface card (NIC
adapter) that you can install in the server. If you install
this NIC adapter and connect it to the same logical
segment as the primary Ethernet controller, you can
configure the server to support a failover function. You
can configure either the integrated Ethernet controller or
the NIC adapter as the primary Ethernet controller. In
failover mode, if the primary Ethernet controller detects a
link failure, all Ethernet traffic associated with it is switched
to the redundant (secondary) controller. This switching
occurs without any user intervention. Applications with
active sessions do not experience any data loss. When
the primary link is restored to an operational state, the
Ethernet traffic automatically switches back to the primary
Ethernet controller.
Note that only one controller in the redundant pair is active
at any given time. For example, if the primary Ethernet
controller is active, then the secondary Ethernet controller
cannot be used for any other network operation.
Note
The operating system determines the maximum
number of IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant
Adapters that you can install in the server. See the
documentation that comes with the adapter for more
information.
Special considerations when combining
failover and hot-plug functions:
If the operating system supports hot-plug PCI adapters and
the optional redundant NIC adapter is installed in a
hot-plug PCI slot, you can replace the NIC adapter without
powering off the server — even if it is the primary Ethernet
controller. Disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the
primary Ethernet controller will cause the Ethernet traffic to
be automatically switched to the secondary Ethernet
controller. This can be very useful when a network
problem is caused by faulty adapter hardware or when you
want to upgrade the primary adapter hardware.
40
Netfinity Server HMM
Configuring for failover:
The failover feature currently is supported by OS/2,
Windows NT, and IntraNetWare. The setup required for
each operating system follows.
OS/2
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the
instructions provided with the adapter and in
“Adapters” on page 161.
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet
Ethernet Family adapter device driver.
3. Using the MPTS Utility program, select the driver from
the list and select the Edit button.
Note
Only one driver instance needs to be loaded for
each redundant pair of Ethernet controllers.
4. Change the PermaNet Server Feature keyword to
TRUE and specify the Primary and Standby slots that
contain the redundant pair. Refer to “System board
component locations” on page 279 for the locations
and slot numbers of the PCI slots. The integrated
controller is located in slot E (PCI primary bus 0, slot
14).
5. To enable the writing of messages to the
IBMCOM\LANTRAN.LOG file when a failover occurs:
a. Copy the file PCNETOS2.EXE from the root
directory of the diskette created using the
ServerGuide CDs to the hard disk drive.
b. Add the following statement to the CONFIG.SYS
file:
Run=d:\path\PCNETOS2.EXE
where d and path are the drive and path to
which you copied PCNETOS2.EXE.
6. Restart the server.
The failover function is now enabled.
Windows NT
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the
instructions provided with the adapter and in
“Adapters” on page 161.
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet
Ethernet Family adapter device driver.
3. From the NT desktop, select Control Panel, then
select the Network icon, then the Adapters tab.
4. Highlight one of the adapters that will be in the
redundant pair and then select the Properties...
button.
5. Check the Grouping box. This will show the possible
combinations for redundant pairs.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
41
6. Select the adapter pair you want and then select OK.
Note that the integrated Ethernet controller is located
at PCI primary bus 0, slot 14.
7. Select Close to exit from the Network setup.
When you restart the server, the failover function will
be in effect.
If a failover occurs, a message is written to the NT Event
Viewer log. If the DMI instrumentation code for the
integrated Ethernet controller is active (PCNET.EXE was
run), a pop-up message is generated also.
IntraNetWare
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the
instructions provided with the adapter and in
“Adapters” on page 161.
2. Load the device driver by using the following
command:
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW.LAN PRIMARY=x SECONDARY=y
where d and path are the drive and path where the
driver is located, and x and y are the PCI slot
numbers where the redundant pair is located.
The slot number associated with the integrated
Ethernet controller can vary depending upon the
configuration of the server. To determine the slot
number, load the driver with no parameters. The
driver will display the available slot numbers. The slot
number that is greater than 10000 will be the slot
number of integrated Ethernet controller. When the
slot number of the integrated Ethernet controller is
determined, reload the driver with the appropriate
parameters.
3. When the driver is loaded, bind it to a protocol stack.
The failover function is now enabled. If a failover occurs:
Ÿ
Ÿ
42
A message is generated to the operating system
console.
The custom counters for the device driver contains
variables that define the state of the failover function
and the location of the redundant pair. You can use
the NetWare Monitor to view the custom counters.
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
If the primary adapter was hot-replaced while the
Ethernet traffic was being handled by the secondary
Ethernet controller, the traffic does not automatically
switch back to the primary adapter when the primary
adapter comes back online. In this case, issue the
command:
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW SCAN
where d and path are the drive and path where the
driver is located. This command causes the device
driver to locate the primary adapter and switch the
Ethernet traffic to it.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
43
Additional service information
The following additional service information supports
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
44
“Bypassing an unknown power-on password” on
page 45.
“Ethernet subsystem error messages” on page 45.
“Light path diagnostics” on page 48.
“Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor”
on page 52.
“Software installation” on page 60.
“Specifications” on page 61.
“Status LEDs” on page 63.
“Using the ServeRAID Advanced Configuration
Functions” on page 63.
Netfinity Server HMM
Bypassing an unknown power-on
password
When a power-on password is set, POST does not
complete until you enter the password. If you forget the
power-on password, you can regain access to the server
through either of the following methods:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Enter the administrator password at the power-on
prompt, if an administrator password has been set.
(If necessary, see “Using the Administrator Password
menu” on page 28 for details.) Start the
Configuration/Setup Utility program and change the
power-on password. See “Using the power-on
password menu” on page 26.
Change the position of the jumper on J24 as
described in Table 18 on page 280 to bypass the
power-on password check. You can then start the
Configuration/Setup Utility program and change the
power-on password. See “Using the power-on
password menu” on page 26.
Ethernet subsystem error messages
Notes
1. The following error messages may be displayed if
"Network" is selected in the startup sequence of
the configuration program.
2. The following error messages are available only
with the integrated Ethernet subsystem. These
error messages are not available when RPL
(remote program load) or DHCP (dynamic host
configuration protocol) is used through optional
network adapters.
RPL-related error messages:
If a failure condition occurs after the Ethernet controller is
initialized, an error message appears on the screen.
The two most common error messages are:
RPL-ROM-ERR: 1ð5
The integrated Ethernet failed the loopback test.
RPL-ROM-ERR: 1ð7
Media test failed; check the cable.
Error 105 indicates that a power-on diagnostic test
performed by the Ethernet module did not execute
correctly.
Error 107 indicates that the cable from the LAN is not
securely connected to the Ethernet port on your computer.
Check the cable to ensure that it is properly connected.
The following list contains other error codes that might
occur, followed by a description of the error code.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
45
Note
An x value that follows an error code represents any
alphanumeric character.
Table 2 (Page 1 of 3). Ethernet controller messages
Error Code
Description
RPL-ROM-ERR: 100
The integrated Ethernet controller cannot be found.
RPL-ROM-ERR: 101
The integrated Ethernet controller was unable to initialize.
RPL-ROM-ERR: 102
The integrated Ethernet controller could not be reset.
RPL-ROM-ERR: 103
There are multiple Ethernet controllers or adapters in the
system. Specify the correct serial number in the NET.CFG
file.
RPL-ROM-ERR: 104
The integrated Ethernet controller EEPROM is faulty or not
present.
RPL-ROM-ERR: 106
The integrated Ethernet controller is configured for Plug and
Play in a non-Plug and Play system.
RPL-ROM-ERR: 110
The integrated Ethernet controller RAM failed the memory
test.
E61
Service boot (startup) canceled; that is, the boot diskette
image was not downloaded from the network.
E62
Cannot initialize controller.
E63
Cannot initialize controller.
E67
Cannot initialize controller.
E6d
Cannot find boot protocol (BOOTP) server.
E6e
Cannot start from downloaded image.
E71
Too many multicast trivial file transfer protocol (MTFTP)
packages.
M10
Address resolution protocol (ARP) canceled by keystroke.
M11
ARP timeout.
M20
Cannot copy memory.
M21
Cannot write to memory.
46
Netfinity Server HMM
Table 2 (Page 2 of 3). Ethernet controller messages
Error Code
Description
M22
Cannot write to memory.
M30
Cannot ARP trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP) address.
M31
TFTP canceled by keystroke.
M32
TFTP open timeout.
M33
Unknown TFTP parameter (operation code).
M34
TFTP read canceled by keystroke.
M35
TFTP timeout.
M38
Cannot open TFTP connection.
M39
Cannot read from TFTP connection.
M40
BOOTP canceled by keystroke.
M40
DHCP canceled by keystroke.
M41
BOOTP timeout.
M41
DHCP timeout.
M42
No client or server Internet protocol (IP) address.
M43
No boot (startup) file name.
M44
Cannot ARP redirected BOOTP server.
M6f
System is locked. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart.
M90
Cannot initialize controller for multicast address.
M91
MTFTP canceled by keystroke.
M92
MTFTP open timeout.
M93
Unknown MTFTP parameter (operation code).
M94
MTFTP read canceled by keystroke.
M95
MTFTP timeout.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
47
Table 2 (Page 3 of 3). Ethernet controller messages
Error Code
Description
M96
Cannot ARP MTFTP address.
M98
Cannot open MTFTP connection.
M99
Cannot read from MTFTP connection.
Txx
If you are running a TFTP session to another computer, an
error message generated by the TFTP session will contain a
message prefix of Txx.
Light path diagnostics
The light path diagnostics built into the server allow you to
quickly identify the type of system error that occurred. The
server is designed so that any LEDs that are illuminated
remain illuminated when the server shuts down as long as
the AC power source is good and the power supplies can
supply +5V dc current to the server. This feature helps
you isolate the problem if an error causes the server to
shut down.
The light path diagnostics begin with the System Error LED
on the information LED panel. (See the illustration in
“Information LED panel” on page 205.) When this light is
illuminated, use the following information to isolate the
problem.
Ÿ
If the System Error LED on the information LED panel
on the front of the server is on, a system error was
detected. Check to see which of the LEDs on the
diagnostics panel inside the server are on.
– Diagnostics panel LEDs off
Error log is 75% full or more.
Action: PFA alert logged.
Check System Error Log for additional
information.
–
SMI LED on
A systems management event occurred.
Action: Restart the server.
If the problem persists, go to “General
checkout” on page 8. Check System
Error Log for additional information.
–
NMI LED on
A non-maskable interrupt occurred. The PCI 1
or PCI 2 LED will probably also be on.
Actions:
48
Netfinity Server HMM
1. If the PCI 1 or PCI 2 LED is on,
follow the instructions for those
LEDs.
2. If the PCI 1 or PCI 2 LED is not on,
restart the server.
If the problem persists, go to “General
checkout” on page 8. Check System
Error Log for additional information.
–
PCI 1 LED on
An error occurred on PCI primary bus 0. The
adapter in PCI slot 5 or the system board
caused the error.
Actions:
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a problem with the
integrated ServeRAID controller or
the Ethernet controller, go to
“General checkout” on page 8.
2. If you cannot determine that the
adapter is failing from the
information in the error log, try to
determine if it is failing by removing
the adapter from the PCI primary
bus 0 (PCI slot 5) and restarting the
server.
If the problem persists, go to “General
checkout” on page 8.
–
PCI 2 LED on
An error occurred on PCI primary bus 1. An
adapter in PCI slot 1, 2, 3, or 4 or the system
board caused the error.
Actions:
1. Check the error log for additional
information.
2. If you cannot correct the problem
from the information in the error log,
try to determine the failing adapter
by removing one adapter at a time
from PCI primary bus 1 (PCI slots
1–4) and restarting the server after
each adapter is removed.
If the problem persists, go to “General
checkout” on page 8.
–
CPU Wrong Slot LED on
The combination of microprocessors and
terminator cards is not valid.
Action: Install the microprocessors in the
correct order. See Table 13 on
page 240.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
49
–
MEM LED on
A memory error occurred.
Actions:
1. Check the DIMM Error LEDs on the
memory board.
2. Replace the DIMM indicated by the
lit DIMM Error LED.
3. Replace the memory board.
If the problem persists, go to “General
checkout” on page 8.
–
FAN 1 LED on
Fan 1 has failed or is operating too slowly.
Note: A failing fan can also cause the TEMP
and DASD1 LEDs to be on.
Action: Replace fan 1.
–
FAN 2 LED on
Fan 2 has failed or is operating too slowly.
Note: A failing fan can also cause the TEMP
and DASD1 LEDs to be on.
Action: Replace fan 2.
–
FAN 3 LED on
Fan 3 has failed or is operating too slowly.
Note: A failing fan can also cause the TEMP
and DASD1 LEDs to be on.
Action: Replace fan 3.
–
FAN 4 LED on
Fan 4 has failed or is operating too slowly.
Note: A failing fan can also cause the TEMP
and DASD1 LEDs to be on.
Action: Replace fan 4.
–
TEMP LED on
The system temperature has exceeded the
maximum rating.
Actions:
1. Check to see if a fan has failed. If it
has, replace the fan.
2. Make sure the room temperature is
not too hot. (See “Specifications”
on page 61)
If the problem persists, go to “General
checkout” on page 8.
–
VRM LED on
One of the voltage regulator modules on the
processor board has failed.
Actions:
50
Netfinity Server HMM
1. Check the VRM Error LEDs on the
processor board.
2. Turn off the server, reseat the VRM
indicated by the lit VRM Error LED,
and restart the server.
3. If the problem persists, replace the
VRM.
4. Replace microprocessor for that
VRM and the companion VRM (see
“Processor board component
locations” on page 254.)
5. Replace processor board.
If the problem persists, go to “General
checkout” on page 8.
–
CPU LED on
One of the microprocessors has failed.
Actions:
1. Check the Microprocessor Error
LEDs on the processor board. Also,
if possible, check the System Error
Log for additional information. If
temperature problems are indicated
in the log, check fans.
2. Turn off the server, reseat the
microprocessor indicated by the lit
Microprocessor Error LED, and
restart the server.
3. If the problem persists, replace the
microprocessor.
4. Replace both VRMs for that
microprocessor. (see “Processor
board component locations” on
page 254.)
5. Replace processor board.
If the problem persists, go to “General
checkout” on page 8.
–
PS1 LED on
The primary power supply has failed.
Action: Replace the primary power supply.
–
PS2 LED on
The secondary power supply has failed.
Action: Replace the secondary power supply.
–
DASD 1 LED on
A hot-swap hard disk drive has failed on SCSI
RAID channel 1.
Actions:
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a temperature problem
and the fans are working correctly,
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
51
go to “General checkout” on
page 8.
2. If the amber Hard Disk Status LED
on one of the hot-swap hard disk
drives is on, see “Controls and
indicators” on page 181 for more
information.
–
DASD 2 LED on
A hot-swap hard disk drive has failed on SCSI
RAID channel 2.
Actions:
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a temperature problem
and the fans are working correctly,
go to “General checkout” on
page 8.
2. If the amber Hard Disk Status LED
on one of the hot-swap hard disk
drives is on, see “Controls and
indicators” on page 181 for more
information.
Ÿ
System Error LED on the information LED panel on
the front of the server is off. The light path
diagnostics have not detected a system error.
Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor
The following information is about the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor that is integrated in the
Netfinity 5500 M20. It also describes how to access the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor without
Netfinity Manager.
Note
To use all of the functions of the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor, you must install the
Advanced System Management service for Netfinity
Manager. You also will need a user-provided modem
attached to serial port A to use the remote functions.
Refer to “Serial ports” on page 189 for information
about serial port A.
The Advanced System Management service gives you the
ability to configure and monitor many features of the
server's Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. You can connect to, and directly access and
control, the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor of a remote system. With the Advanced System
Management service you can configure Advanced System
Management service events (such as POST, loader, and
operating system timeouts; and critical temperature and
52
Netfinity Server HMM
voltage failures). If any of these events occur, the
Advanced System Management service can be configured
to automatically forward a Netfinity alert in one of three
ways:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Alert forwarded to another Netfinity system
Alert forwarded to a standard numeric pager
Alert forwarded to an alphanumeric pager
In addition, with the Advanced System Management
service you can remotely monitor, record, and replay all
textual data generated by a remote system during POST.
While monitoring a remote system during POST, you can
enter key commands on the keyboard that will then be
relayed to the remote system.
The Netfinity Manager software is included in the
ServerGuide package. Refer to the documentation that
comes with ServerGuide for information on how to install
the Netfinity Manager software. Then, refer to the online
Netfinity documentation or the online Advanced System
Management Service for Netfinity Manager User’s Guide
for information on using the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor.
System requirements for the Advanced
System Management Service with Netfinity
Manager:
The minimum system requirements for using the Advanced
System Management service are:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
(built into the Netfinity 5500 M20)
Netfinity Manager or Client Services for Netfinity
Manager, version 5.10.4 or later
2 MB of available hard disk drive space
Accessing the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor without Netfinity
Manager:
If for some reason you are unable to use Netfinity Manager
to access and manage the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor, you can use a terminal program
and a modem to connect directly to the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor. This modem should be
connected to management port C. (See “Management
port C” on page 190.) When connected, you will be able
to access a variety of monitor, configuration, and error log
data. You can also power the remote (Netfinity 5500 M20)
system on or off, shutdown and restart the server, and
initiate remote video mode on the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor. Remote video mode
enables you to remotely monitor all textual output
generated during POST. All POST data will be displayed
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
53
in the terminal program window as the remote system
completes POST. While you are monitoring POST on the
remote system, all local (terminal program) keystrokes are
relayed automatically to the remote system, enabling you
to use POST utilities (such as system configuration, RAID
Mini-Configuration program, and diagnostic programs) that
can be accessed during POST.
To use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor:
1. Use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor modem. The modem settings you should
use are:
Baud
57.6 k
Data Bits
8
Parity
None
Stop Bits
1
Flow Control Hardware
2. Log in to the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor.
When you have established a connection with the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor,
you will be prompted for a username and password.
You must provide a username and password
combination that has been previously configured for
use with the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. You can use one of two username and
password combinations:
Ÿ The default username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD)
Note
The default username and password is case
sensitive. You must use all caps, and the
“0” in PASSW0RD is the numeral zero.
Ÿ
A username and password that you define using
the Advanced System Management service and
Netfinity Manager
Important
If you update the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor microcode, the default
username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD) are reset. If applicable, notify the
system administrator.
When you have logged into the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor, the following main menu appears:
54
Netfinity Server HMM
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Y
Z
Monitors
Error Logs
Service Processor Configuration
System Services
System Power
Boot
Remote Terminal Status
Disconnect Current Logon
Start Remote Video
To access a menu item, press the number or letter that
corresponds to the information you want to access. After
you select a menu item, subsequent menus will offer more
specific information that pertains to the selection you made
from the main menu.
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Selecting Y Disconnect Current Logon ends
the current session and requires you to enter a
new username and password before continuing.
Selecting Read displays the last entry.
Selecting Read Last steps backwards through
the entries.
Selecting Write executes the command.
Menu Selection
Data Available for Viewing
Monitors
System board temperature, CPU
temperatures, power supply temperatures,
voltage readings, voltage regulator module
readings, fan status, redundant power supply
status
Error Logs
Contents of System Error Log
Service Processor
Configuration
Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor modem configuration, dial-out
entries, dial-out alerts, dial-in logins, system
status, thresholds, system statistics, VPD
information and system state
System Services
Status of Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor watchdog timers and
event alerts sent to the server
System Power
Current system power status, power-off
configuration and power-off delay values.
Note
You can use selections available from
the System Power menu to power the
system on or off. For more information,
see “System power menu selections” on
page 56.
Boot
You can use selections available from the
Boot menu to shutdown and restart the
system or to restart the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor. For more
information, see “Boot menu selections” on
page 57.
Remote Terminal
Status
Current remote terminal status
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
55
Menu Selection
Data Available for Viewing
Start Remote
Video
Use Start Remote Video to enable the
terminal program to remotely monitor and
manage the server during POST. For more
information, see “Using remote video mode to
monitor and access POST” on page 58.
When you are finished accessing the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor using a terminal program,
select Disconnect Current Logon from the main menu
and then use the terminal program to close the connection
to the Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor.
System power menu selections: You can use the
selections available from the System Power menu to:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
View data regarding the current server power status
View data regarding the server power configuration
Power the server off
Power the server on
To access these functions:
1. Use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor modem.
2. Log in to the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor.
When you have established a connection with the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor,
you will be prompted for a username and password.
You must provide a username and password
combination that has been previously configured for
use with the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. You can use one of two username and
password combinations:
Ÿ The default username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD)
Note
The default username and password is case
sensitive. You must use all caps, and the
“0” in PASSW0RD, is the numeral zero.
Ÿ
A username and password that you define using
the Advanced System Management service and
Netfinity Manager
Important
If you update the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor microcode, the default
username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD) are reset. If applicable, notify the
system administrator.
56
Netfinity Server HMM
When you have logged into the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor, the following main
menu appears:
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Y
Z
Monitors
Error Logs
Service Processor Configuration
System Services
System Power
Boot
Remote Terminal Status
Disconnect Current Logon
Start Remote Video
3. Select 6 System Power.
The following System Power menu appears:
1
2
3
4
Current Power Status
Power Configuration
Power On
Power Off
4. Select a System Power menu item.
Ÿ Select 1 Current power Status for information
about the current server power status.
Ÿ Select 2 Power Configuration for information
about the server power configuration.
Ÿ Select 3 Power On to power the server on (if it
is currently powered off).
Ÿ Select 4 Power Off to power the server off (if it
is currently powered on).
Boot menu selections: You can use the selections
available from the Boot menu to:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Shutdown the server operating system and then
restart the server
Restart the server immediately, without first
performing an operating system shutdown
Restart the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor
To access these functions:
1. Use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor modem.
2. Log in to the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor.
When you have established a connection with the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor,
you will be prompted for a username and password.
You must provide a username and password
combination that has been previously configured for
use with the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. You can use one of two username and
password combinations:
Ÿ The default username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
57
Note
The default username and password is case
sensitive. You must use all caps, and the
“0” in PASSW0RD, is the numeral zero.
Ÿ
A username and password that you define using
the Advanced System Management service and
Netfinity Manager
Important
If you update the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor microcode, the default
username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD) are reset. If applicable, notify the
system administrator.
When you have logged into the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor, the following main
menu appears:
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Y
Z
Monitors
Error Logs
Service Processor Configuration
System Services
System Power
Boot
Remote Terminal Status
Disconnect Current Logon
Start Remote Video
3. Select 7 Boot.
The following Boot menu appears:
1 Reboot w/OS Shutdown
2 Reboot immediately
3 Restart SP
4. Select a Boot menu item.
Ÿ Select 1 Reboot w/OS Shutdown to shutdown
the server operating system and then restart the
server.
Ÿ Select 2 Reboot immediately to restart the
server immediately, without first shutting down
the operating system.
Ÿ Select 3 Restart SP to restart the Netfinity
Advanced System Management Processor.
Using remote video mode to monitor and access
POST: You can use a terminal program to remotely
monitor all textual output generated during POST. All
POST data will be displayed in the terminal program
window as the remote system completes POST. While
you are monitoring POST on the remote system, all local
keystrokes are relayed automatically to the remote system,
enabling you to use POST utilities (such as system
configuration, RAID Mini-Configuration program, or
diagnostic programs) that can be accessed during POST.
58
Netfinity Server HMM
To use Remote Video Mode to monitor and access POST
on the server:
1. Use a terminal program to establish a connection with
the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor modem.
2. Log in to the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor.
When you have established a connection with the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor,
you will be prompted for a username and password.
You must provide a username and password
combination that has been previously configured for
use with the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. You can use one of two username and
password combinations:
Ÿ The default username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD)
Note
The default username and password is case
sensitive. You must use all caps, and the
“0” in PASSW0RD, is the numeral zero.
Ÿ
A username and password that you define using
the Advanced System Management service and
Netfinity Manager
Important
If you update the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor microcode, the default
username (USERID) and password
(PASSW0RD) are reset. If applicable, notify the
system administrator.
When you have logged into the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor, the following main
menu appears:
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
Y
Z
Monitors
Error Logs
Service Processor Configuration
System Services
System Power
Boot
Remote Terminal Status
Disconnect Current Logon
Start Remote Video
3. Start (or restart) the server.
Ÿ If the remote server is currently powered off:
a. Select 6 System Power from the main
menu.
b. Select 4 Power On from the System Power
menu.
Ÿ If the server is currently powered on, you must
restart the server. You can use selections from
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
59
the System Power menu or the Boot menu to
restart the server in several ways.
To restart the server using System Power menu
selection:
a. Select 6 System Power from the main
menu.
b. Select 3 Power Off from the System Power
menu.
c. Once the server has powered off, select 4
Power On to restore power to the server.
To restart the server using Boot menu
selections:
a. Select 7 Boot from the main menu.
b. Select either 1 Reboot w/OS Shutdown or
2 Reboot Immediately to restart the
server.
Note
For information on the System Power and
Boot menus, see “System power menu
selections” on page 56 and “Boot menu
selections” on page 57.
4. After you restart the server, return to the main menu
and select Z Start Remote Video.
Once you have started Remote Video mode on the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor, all
textual output generated during POST will be sent to the
terminal window. The terminal will also act as a
fully-active remote session, enabling you to enter keyboard
commands that will be sent to the remote server. In this
way, you can enter key commands and key-combinations
that access POST operations and utilities such as system
setup or the RAID Mini-Configuration program.
When you have finished using Remote Video mode, press
Ctrl+R, then press Ctrl+E, and then press Ctrl+T. This
will end Remote Video mode and return you to the main
menu.
Software installation
Use ServerGuide to verify that you have the proper
working environment for the specific operating system you
are installing, then follow the instructions provided in the
ServerGuide package to install the operating system.
To install application programs, refer to the application
program documentation.
60
Netfinity Server HMM
Specifications
The following list contains the specifications for the
Netfinity 5500 M20.
Size (Tower Models)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Depth: 700 mm (27.6 in.)
Height with NetBAY3: 530 mm (20.9 in.)
Height without NetBAY3: 356 mm (14 in.)
Width: 483 mm (19 in.)
Front clearance: 305 mm (12 in.)
Rear clearance: 100 mm (4 in.)
Side clearance: 50 mm (2 in.)
Size (Rack Models)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Depth: 650 mm (25.6 in.)
Height: 356 mm (14 in.) (8 U)
Width: 440 mm (17.3 in.)
Weight (Tower Models)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Unpacked, minimum configuration (with empty
NetBAY3): 39 kg (86 lb.)
Unpacked, maximum configuration: 55 kg (121 lb.)
Weight (Rack Models)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Unpacked, minimum configuration: 34.4 kg (76 lb.)
Unpacked, maximum configuration: 55.4 kg (111 lb.)
Heat Output
Ÿ
Approximate heat output in British thermal units (Btu)
per hour:
– Minimum configuration: 1023.9 Btu
– Maximum configuration: 2764.6 Btu
Environment
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Air temperature
– System on: 10° to 35° C (50° to 95° F)
Altitude: 0 to 914 m (3000 ft.)
– System on: 10° to 32° C (50° to 89.6° F)
Altitude: 914 m (3000 ft.) to 2133 m (7000 ft.)
– System off: 10° to 43° C (50° to 110° F)
Maximum altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.)
Humidity
– System on: 8% to 80%; maximum wetbulb,
23° C (73.4° F)
– System off: 8% to 80%; maximum wetbulb,
27° C (80.6° F)
Altitude: 0 to 2133 m (0 to 7000 ft.)
Acoustical Noise Emissions Values
Ÿ
Sound power, idling
– 6.2 bel for open bay system (no hard disk drives
installed)
– 6.3 bel for typical system configuration (1 hard
disk drive installed)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
61
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Sound power, operating
– 6.2 bel for open bay system (no hard disk drives
installed)
– 6.3 bel for typical system configuration (1 hard
disk drive installed)
Sound pressure, idling
– 47 dBA for open bay system (no hard disk drives
installed)
– 48 dBA for typical system configuration (1 hard
disk drive installed)
Sound pressure, operating
– 47 dBA for open bay system (no hard disk drives
installed)
– 48 dBA for typical system configuration (1 hard
disk drive installed)
These levels are measured in controlled acoustical
environments according to ISO 7779 (EMCA-74), and are
reported in accordance with ISO 9296 (EMCA-109). The
declared sound power levels indicate an upper limit, below
which a large portion of machines operate. Sound
pressure levels in your location might exceed the average
1-meter values stated because of room reflections and
other nearby noise.
Electrical Input
Ÿ
Ÿ
Sine-wave input (50±3 Hz or 60±3 Hz) is required
Input voltage
– Low range
- Minimum: 90 V ac
- Maximum: 137 V ac
- Nominal: 100-127 V ac
– High range
- Minimum: 180 V ac
- Maximum: 265 V ac
- Nominal: 200-240 V ac
– Input kilovolt-amperes (KVA) approximately
- Minimum configuration as shipped: 0.2
KVA
- Maximum configuration: 0.78 KVA
Electrostatic Discharge
Ÿ
Tested to 8 KV
Immunity
Ÿ
Verified to comply with EN 50082-1
Safety Standards
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
62
UL 1950
CSA C22.2 No. 950-M93
EN 60950 and countries/regions deviations
IEC 950
NOM-019
Netfinity Server HMM
Status LEDs
The server has LEDs to help you identify problems with
some server components (see, “Symptom-to-FRU index”
on page 285).
Status LEDs are located on the following components:
Ÿ
Information LED panel
Ÿ
For more information, see “Information LED panel” on
page 205.
Hard disk drive trays
Ÿ
For more information, see “Controls and indicators”
on page 181.
Power supply
Ÿ
For more information, see “Power supply LEDs” on
page 251.
Diagnostic panel
Ÿ
For more information, see “Diagnostics panel LEDs”
on page 187.
Processor board
Ÿ
See “Processor board component locations” on
page 254 for locations of the LEDs on the processor
board.
Memory board
See “Memory board component locations” on
page 230 for locations of the LEDs on the memory
board.
Using the ServeRAID Advanced
Configuration Functions
The Advanced Functions choice allows you to initialize
the configuration (reset the ServeRAID controller settings),
import the configuration information from the drives, enable
and disable the Boot CD-ROM and INT13 extensions, and
view the controller and PCI information.
When you select Advanced Functions from the Main
Menu, a screen similar to the following appears.
IBM ServeRAID Adapter Disk Array Mini-Configuration Ver. X.XX
Advanced Functions
Initialize Configuration
Import Configuration from Drive(s)
Configure BIOS Settings
Adapter and PCI Information
Exit
Select a choice using the Up and Down Arrow keys, then press Enter.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
63
Descriptions of the choices available from the Advanced
Functions menu are as follows:
Attention
The following choices might result in loss of data
due to changes in the configuration.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Initialize Configuration resets the ServeRAID
controller settings to their factory defaults and sets all
functional hard disk drives to the RDY state.
Import Configuration from Drive(s) reads the most
common configuration information from the drives in
the server and copies it to the controller’s NVRAM
and to the controller’s EEPROM module.
Boot CD-ROM and INT13 Extensions is used to
configure the BootCd feature. When BootCd is
enabled, the ServeRAID controller attempts to start
(boot) from a CD, if the CD-ROM drive contains a
startable (boot-enabled) CD, and no other controller is
currently using INT13 extensions.
Attention
Only one controller can support INT13
extensions.
Ÿ
Adapter and PCI Information displays the
ServeRAID controller hardware and PCI register
information, as shown in the following example
screen.
IBM ServeRAID Adapter Disk Array Mini-Configuration Utility Ver. X.XX
Adapter Information
PCI Reg Information
Code Seg.(Cs):
CB80h
Data Seg.(Ds):
9A00h
Adapter No:
1
Dev, Ven Id (00h):
002Eh 1014h
Status, Cmd(04h):
0200h 0107h
Class, Rev Id(08h):
010000h 04h
Intr No:
0009h
Bist,Hdr,Lat,Cach (0Ch):
I/O Adr:
F400h
Base Adr Reg0(10h):
0000F401h
Mem Adr:
FDFFE000h
Base Adr Reg1(14h):
FDFFE000h
Base Adr Reg2(18h):
00000000h
Base Adr Reg3(1Ch):
00000000h
Base Adr Reg4(20h):
00000000h
Base Adr Reg5(24h):
00000000h
Reserved(28h):
00000000h
Reserved(2Ch):
00000000h
Exp ROM Adr(30h):
00000000h
Reserved (34h):
00000000h
Reserved(38h):
00000000h
Bus No:
00h
Device No:
0Eh
StatusQ Start:
0009E814h
StatusQ End:
0009E82Ch
StatusQ Head:
0009E818h
Status Tail:
0009E814h
OS/2 Table:
Part Number:
4800h
01K8562
MaxLat,MinG,IntP,Intl(3Ch):
00h 00h 40h 08h
00h 00h 00h 00h
Press any key to continue.
Setting the BootCd feature:
When you select Boot CD-ROM and INT13 Extensions, a
screen similar to the following appears.
64
Netfinity Server HMM
IBM PC ServeRAID Adapter Disk Array MiniConfiguration Utility Ver. X.XX
Boot CD-ROM Configuration
BIOS Support for Bootable CD-ROM
Display Boot CD-ROM Menu
No
No
BIOS Support for Int13 Extensions
No
BIOS Support for reading Partition tables
Yes
BIOS Support for Service Processor
No
Save Configuration in Adapter
Exit
Select a choice using the Up and Down Arrow keys, then press Enter.
To enable the BootCd feature:
1. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to
highlight BIOS Support for Bootable CD-ROM.
Press Enter to change No to Yes. This also changes
No to Yes next to Display Boot CD-ROM Menu and
BIOS Support for INT13 Extensions.
2. Ensure that the screen displays Yes next to BIOS
Support for reading Partition tables. If not, use the
Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to highlight BIOS
Support for reading Partition tables; then, press
Enter to change No to Yes.
3. Highlight Save Configuration for Adapter; then,
press Enter. A Configuration Saved message
appears. The Main Menu of the Mini-Configuration
program returns. Restart the server.
Note
Highlighting Exit, instead of Save Configuration for
Adapter, and pressing Enter causes any changes you
made not to be saved.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
65
ServeRAID system board controller
Note
For a complete list of ServeRAID error codes, see
“ServeRAID controller error codes/messages” on
page 312.
The following information is for the integrated ServeRAID
controller on the system board.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
66
“Understanding RAID technology” on page 67.
“ServeRAID Configuration Program” on page 70.
“ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program” on page 94.
“ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Program”
on page 98.
“ServeRAID administration functions” on page 103.
“ServeRAID monitoring functions” on page 115.
“ServeRAID IPSSEND program (starting)” on
page 119.
“ServeRAID IPSSEND program (using)” on page 119.
“ServeRAID IPSMON program (starting)” on
page 128.
“ServeRAID IPSMON program (using)” on page 128.
“ServeRAID device drivers and utility programs
(installation)” on page 130.
“Administration and Monitoring Program” on
page 130.
“ServeRAID programs for Windows NT and Windows
95” on page 131.
“ServeRAID background-server components” on
page 131.
“ServeRAID programs for OS/2 and NetWare” on
page 132.
“ServerRAID programs for OpenServer and
UnixWare” on page 132.
“Installing the ServeRAID WIN32-based program” on
page 133.
“Installing ServeRAID device drivers” on page 134.
“Starting the ServeRAID background-server
components” on page 151.
“ServerRAID background-server components” on
page 152.
“IPSSEND and IPSMON programs” on page 154.
“Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page 157.
Netfinity Server HMM
Understanding RAID technology
RAID is the technology of grouping several hard disk
drives in a computer into an array that can be defined as
one or more logical drives. Each logical drive appears to
the operating system as a single drive. This grouping
technique greatly enhances logical-drive capacity and
performance beyond the physical limitations of a single
hard disk drive.
When multiple physical hard disk drives are grouped into a
logical drive, the ServeRAID controller can transfer data in
parallel from the multiple drives in the array. This parallel
transfer yields data-transfer rates that are many times
higher than with nonarrayed drives. This increased speed
makes the system better able to meet the throughput (the
amount of work in a given amount of time) or productivity
needs of the multiple-user network environment.
The ability to respond to multiple data requests provides
not only an impressive increase in throughput, but also a
decrease in response time. The combination of parallel
transfers and simultaneous responses to multiple requests
allows disk arrays to provide a high level of performance in
network environments.
Interleave depth and stripe-unit size:
With RAID technology, data is striped across an array of
hard disk drives. This data-distribution scheme
complements the way the operating system requests data.
The granularity at which data from one file is stored on one
drive of the array before subsequent data is stored on the
next drive of the array is called the interleave depth.
You can control the interleave depth and maximize the
performance of a ServeRAID controller by setting a
stripe-unit size that is close to the size of the system I/O
requests. You can set the stripe-unit size to 8 KB, 16 KB,
32 KB, or 64 KB. For example, performance in
transaction-based environments, which typically involve
large blocks of data, might be optimal when the stripe-unit
size is set to 32 KB or 64 KB; however, performance in file
and print environments, which typically involve multiple
small blocks of data, might be optimal when the stripe-unit
size is set to 8 KB or 16 KB.
The collection, in logical order of these stripe units, from
the first drive of the array to the last drive of the array, is
called a stripe. (See page 90 for more information.)
Supported RAID levels:
Disk arrays are used to improve performance and
reliability. The amount of improvement depends on the
application programs that are run on the server and the
RAID levels that are assigned to the logical drives.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
67
The ServeRAID adapters and controllers support RAID
level-0, RAID level-1, Enhanced RAID level-1, and RAID
level-5.
RAID level-0: RAID level-0 stripes the data across all
the drives in the array. This offers substantial speed
enhancement, but provides for no data redundancy. RAID
level-0 provides the largest capacity of the RAID levels
offered, because no room is taken up for redundant data
or data-parity storage.
The following illustration shows data arranged in an array
of three hard disk drives defined as one RAID level-0
logical drive. Notice that the data is striped across all the
drives in the array, but no copies of the data or parity
information is stored.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Stripe 1
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Stripe 2
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Stripe 3
Block 7
Block 8
Block 9
A hard disk failure within the array results in loss of data in
the logical drive assigned RAID level-0, but only in that
logical drive. If there are logical drives assigned RAID
level-1 or level-5 in the same array, they will not lose data.
Note
The ServeRAID controller automatically assigns RAID
level-0 to all logical drives in an array containing only
one hard disk drive.
When you replace a failed drive, the ServeRAID controller
can rebuild all the RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical
drives automatically onto the replacement hard disk drive.
However, any data stored in a failed RAID level-0 logical
drive is lost.
Though the risk of data loss is present, you might want to
assign RAID level-0 to one of the logical drives to take
advantage of the speed offered with this RAID level. You
could use this logical drive to enter data that is backed up
each day and for which safety is not of primary
importance, that is, data that can be easily re-created.
You also might want to use a RAID level-0 logical drive
when the work being done requires maximum capacity.
68
Netfinity Server HMM
RAID level-1: RAID level-1 provides 100% data
redundancy and requires two hard disk drives. With RAID
level-1, the first half of a stripe is the original data; the
second half of a stripe is a mirror (copy) of the data, but
written to another drive.
Because the data is mirrored, the capacity of the logical
drive when assigned RAID level-1 is 50% of the physical
capacity of the two hard disk drives in the array.
The following illustration shows data arranged in an array
of two hard disk drives defined as one RAID level-1 logical
drive. Notice that the data on Drive B is a mirror copy of
the data on Drive A.
Drive A
Drive B
.
.
.
Data Stripe 1
Block 1
Mirror Stripe
1
Block 1
Data Stripe 2
Block 2
Mirror Stripe
2
Block 2
Data Stripe 3
Block 3
Mirror Stripe
3
Block 3
.
If one of the hard disk drives fails, the ServeRAID
controller switches read and write requests to the
remaining functional drive in the array.
Enhanced RAID level-1: When you group more than
two physical drives into an array and select RAID level-1,
the ServeRAID controller automatically assigns the IBM
Enhanced RAID level-1 to the array.
The Enhanced RAID level-1 combines mirroring with data
striping. This RAID level stripes data and copies of the
data across all the drives in the array. As with the
standard RAID level-1, the data is mirrored, and the
capacity of the logical drive is 50% of the physical capacity
of the grouping of hard disk drives in the array.
The Enhanced RAID level-1 requires a minimum of three
drives and, depending upon the stripe-unit size, supports a
maximum of eight or 16 drives.
The following illustration shows data arranged in an array
with three hard disk drives. The logical drive is assigned
the Enhanced RAID level-1. Notice that the first stripe is
the data stripe and the second stripe is the mirror (copy) of
the first data stripe, but shifted one drive.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
69
.
.
.
.
.
.
Data Stripe 1
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Mirror Stripe
1
Block 3
Block 1
Block 2
Data Stripe 2
Block 4
Block 5
Block 6
Mirror Stripe
2
Block 6
Block 4
Block 5
RAID level-5: RAID level-5 requires a minimum of three
hard disk drives. This RAID level stripes data and parity
across all drives in the array. When an array is assigned
RAID level-5, the capacity of the logical drive is reduced by
one drive (for data-parity storage).
RAID level-5 is generally the most desirable choice,
because it offers both data protection and increased
throughput. RAID level-5 gives higher capacity than RAID
level-1, but RAID level-1 offers better performance.
The following illustration shows data arranged in an array
with three hard disk drives. The logical drive is assigned
RAID level-5. Notice that the storage of the data parity
also is striped, and it shifts from drive to drive.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Stripe 1
Block 1
Block 2
Parity 1+2
Stripe 2
Block 3
Parity 3+4
Block 4
Stripe 3
Parity 5+6
Block 5
Block 6
Stripe 4
Block 7
Block 8
Parity 7+8
ServeRAID Configuration Program
The graphical interface in the ServeRAID Configuration
Program makes it easy to create, delete, change, or view
the ServeRAID configuration. Before beginning, review the
following illustration to become familiar with the layout of
the configuration program screens.
70
Netfinity Server HMM
1
2
3
4
5
Descriptions of the numbered areas are as follows:
1. Menu Bar Provides standard File, View, Actions, and
Help pull-down menus. See “Menu bar” on
page 86 for more information.
2. Tool Bar Provides quick-path icons for common tasks.
The icons from left to right are Save the
Configuration Event Log, Configure the
ServeRAID Controller, Configure for
Clustering, Scan for New or Removed Ready
Drives, Create an Array, and Help. See “Tool
bar” on page 85 for more information.
3. Tree View Provides an expandable tree view of the
ServeRAID subsystem. You will perform
most ServeRAID configuration and
maintenance tasks by first selecting the
ServeRAID controller, array, logical drive,
hot-spare drive, or physical drive objects from
this Main Tree.
4. Main Panel Provides specific device information or
configuration instructions. When the
configuration program is in the Information
mode and an object is selected from the Main
Tree, detailed information about the object
appears in this panel. When the
configuration program is in the Configuration
mode, the instructions needed to configure
the ServeRAID subsystem appear in this
panel.
5. Event Viewer Provides advisory and progressive-status
information and messages during the
ServeRAID configuration process. Each
message appears with a time stamp, a date
stamp, and an icon that classifies the severity
of the event. Attention messages identify
potential data-loss situations, and Fatal
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
71
messages inform you when a failure has
occurred.
Starting the configuration program:
The ServeRAID Configuration Program runs in two modes:
the Configuration mode and the Information mode.
In the Configuration mode, you can create or delete disk
arrays, create or delete logical drives, and define hot-spare
drives. When this mode is active, only a limited set of
functions is available from the Menu and Tool Bars. See
“Configuration mode” on page 73 for more information.
In the Information mode, you can view the existing device
and configuration information for the ServeRAID
subsystem. When this mode is active, you can use the
functions available from the Menu and Tool Bars to
customize settings for the ServeRAID controllers. See
“Information mode” on page 78 for more information.
The ServeRAID Configuration Program is provided on the
IBM ServeRAID Configuration CD packaged with the
ServeRAID adapter, and it also is provided on the
ServerGuide CD (CD 1) that comes with some IBM server
models.
Notes
1. If you are configuring a ServeRAID controller on
a system board, see the installation instructions
and CDs provided with the server for information
about starting the configuration programs for the
server.
2. To gain access to the ServeRAID Configuration
or Mini-Configuration programs, you must restart
the server.
To start the configuration program:
1. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Configuration CD (or the
ServerGuide CD 1) into the CD-ROM drive; then, turn
on the server.
One of the following screens will appear:
Ÿ If the configuration program detects unconfigured
ServeRAID controllers, the program starts in the
Configuration mode and a screen similar to the
following appears.
72
Netfinity Server HMM
IBM ServeRAID Configuration Program - [Configure the ServeRAID Controller]
? X
File View Actions Help
IBM Server (BEST SERVER)
Controller 1 (not configured)
This program will guide you through the configuration of your ServeRAID
controller. You must configure each controller before you can use it.
To begin the configuration process, select a controller from the tree on
the left and select 'Express' or 'Custom' configuration path below;
then, click on the 'Next' button.
Configuration Paths
Express Configuration for Controller 1
Select this choice to configure your ServeRaid
controller automatically.
Custom Configuration for Controller 1
Select this choice to configure your ServeRaid
controller manually.
< Back
Next >
Cancel
Help
07/09/1998 7:37:51 PM The program found 1 ServeRAID controllers.
07/09/1998 7:37:51 PM The IBM ServeRAID Configuration Program started.
Select the Cancel button to switch from the
Configuration mode to the Information mode. all
ServeRAID controllers in the server are
configured, the program starts in the Information
mode and a screen similar to the following
appears.
IBM ServeRAID Configuration Program - [Controller 1 Information]
? X
File View Actions Help
IBM Server (BEST SERVER)
Controller 1
ServeRAID Controller Information
Description or Value
Controller Number
Firmware Version
Read-Ahead Cache Mode
Stripe-Unit Size
Rebuild Rate
Hot-Swap Rebuild
Data Scrubbing
Auto-Synchronization
Number of Arrays
Number of Logical Drives
Number of Hot-Spare Drives
1
3.00.00
Enabled
8K
High
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
2
2
0
07/09/1998 7:37:51 PM The program found 1 ServeRAID controllers.
07/09/1998 7:37:51 PM The IBM ServeRAID Configuration Program started.
Select the
icon on the Tool Bar to
switch from the Information mode to the
Configuration mode.
2. Continue with one of the following:
Ÿ “Configuration mode”
Ÿ “Information mode” on page 78
Configuration mode:
You can use the Configuration mode to create up to eight
independent disk arrays for each ServeRAID controller.
The Configuration mode provides two configuration paths:
Express Configuration and Custom Configuration.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
73
Express Configuration provides a quick and easy path for
you to automatically configure the ServeRAID controller.
This choice creates the most efficient ServeRAID
configuration based on the number and capacity of the
Ready drives available in the system. If four or more
Ready drives of the same capacity are available, this
choice also will define a hot-spare drive for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller. A hot-spare drive is a physical drive
that is defined for automatic use when a similar drive fails.
The Express Configuration choice groups up to 16 Ready
drives of the same capacity into one disk array and defines
one logical drive for each array. This choice defines the
size of the logical drive, based on the amount of free
space available, and it assigns the highest RAID level
possible, based on the number of physical drives available.
For example, if the server contains one 1024 MB Ready
drive, two 2150 MB Ready drives, and four 4300 MB
Ready drives, Express Configuration will create three
arrays and one hot-spare drive as follows:
Array A:
The total capacity of this array is 1024 MB
(1 x 1024 MB) and it contains one 1024 MB
RAID level-0 logical drive.
Array B:
The total capacity of this array is 4300 MB
(2 x 2150 MB) and it contains one 2150 MB
RAID level-1 logical drive.
Array C:
The total capacity of this array is 12900 MB
(3 x 4300 MB) and it contains one 8600 MB
RAID level-5 logical drive.
Hot Spare: Express Configuration defines one of the four
4300 MB drives as a hot-spare drive, as
follows:
Ÿ When there are four or more Ready
drives of the same capacity, Express
Configuration groups three of the drives
into one array (as in Array C) and
defines one of the drives as a hot spare.
Ÿ A hot-spare drive must be of equal or
greater capacity than the drive that it is
intended to replace. In this
configuration, the 4300 MB drive can
replace any failed drives in Array B or
Array C.
Using Express Configuration
To use the Express Configuration path:
1. Select the ServeRAID controller that you want to
configure in the Main Tree.
2. Select the Express Configuration radio button.
3. Select the Next button.
4. Review the information that appears on the
Configuration Summary screen.
74
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. Some operating systems have size
limitations for logical drives. Before you
save the configuration, you might want to
verify that the size of the logical drive is
appropriate for the operating system. See
the operating system documentation for
more detailed information.
2. To change the configuration, select a
Modify icon button.
5. Select the Apply button to accept and save the
configuration.
6. If you have not already done so, install the operating
system. See the server documentation or the
documentation provided with the operating system for
more information.
After you install the operating system, see “ServeRAID
device drivers and utility programs (installation)” on
page 130 (or see the installation instructions provided with
the server) for information about installing the ServeRAID
device drivers and utility programs.
Learning about custom configuration:
The Custom Configuration path allows you to manually
configure the ServeRAID subsystem. Using this path, you
can select the drives that you want to include in each
array, define the number and size of the logical drives for
each array, and select the drives that you want to use as
hot spares.
Before you select the Custom Configuration path, consider
the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are not familiar with the IBM implementation of
RAID technology, you might want to review the
information provided in “Understanding RAID
technology” on page 67 before you begin.
Each ServeRAID controller supports a maximum of
eight arrays.
Each ServeRAID controller supports a maximum of
eight logical drives.
When you create an array, you group hard disk drives
into one storage area. You can define this storage
area as a single logical drive, or you can subdivide it
into several logical drives. Each logical drive appears
to the operating system as a single physical hard disk
drive.
If you have only one array, you can define it as a
single logical drive, or you can divide it into several
logical drives. Typically, the first logical drive defined
on the first ServeRAID adapter or controller found by
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
75
the basic input/output system (BIOS) during startup
will be the startup (boot) drive.
If you have two or more arrays, each array can be
one logical drive, or you can divide each array into
multiple logical drives, as long as the total number of
logical drives for all of the arrays does not exceed
eight.
Note
Independent of the RAID logical drives, most
operating systems allow you to partition the
logical drives further.
The optimal way to create arrays is to use hard disk
drives that have the same capacity.
Ÿ
Hard disk drive capacities influence the way you
create arrays. Drives in an array can be of different
capacities (1 GB1, or 2 GB, for example), but RAID
controllers treat them as if they all have the capacity
of the smallest disk drive.
For example, if you group three 1 GB drives and one
2 GB drive into an array, the total capacity of the
array is 1 GB times 4, or 4 GB, not the 5 GB
physically available. Similarly, if you group three 2
GB drives and one 1 GB drive into an array, the total
capacity of that array is 4 GB, not the 7 GB physically
available.
A hot-spare drive is a disk drive that is defined for
automatic use in the event of a drive failure. The
hot-spare drive must be of equal or greater capacity
than the drive that it is intended to replace. If a
physical drive fails and it is part of a RAID level-1 or
RAID level-5 logical drive, the ServeRAID controller
automatically starts to rebuild the data on the
hot-spare drive.
You can include a maximum of 16 physical drives in
an array when the stripe-unit size is set to 8 KB (the
default setting) or 16 KB, and you can include a
maximum of 8 physical drives in an array when the
stripe-unit size is set to 32 KB or 64 KB. (See
“Interleave depth and stripe-unit size” on page 67 and
page 90 for more information.)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Using custom configuration:
To use the Custom Configuration path:
1. Select the ServeRAID controller that you want to
configure in the Main Tree.
1
When referring to hard-disk-drive capacity, GB means
approximately 1 000 000 000 bytes; total user-accessible
capacity may vary depending on operating environment.
76
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Select the Custom Configuration radio button.
3. Select the Next button.
4. Using the right mouse button, select the drive or SCSI
Channel icons in the Main Tree to select the drives
that you want to add to the arrays, delete from the
arrays, or define as hot-spare drives; then, select a
choice from the pop-up list.
OR
Drag the drive or SCSI Channel icon from the Main
Tree and drop it on the Array or Hot-Spare Drive icon
in the Main Panel on the right. If you change your
mind, you can drag the icons back to the Main Tree
to remove them from the configuration.
5. After you select the data drives for the arrays and
define the hot-spare drives, select the Next button.
If you change your mind, you can:
Ÿ Remove a specific drive from a newly defined
array or delete an entire newly defined array. To
do this, select the Back button, use the right
mouse button to select the specific drive or Array
icon in the Main Panel on the right, and then
select Remove from New Array or Delete New
Array.
Ÿ Remove a specific hot-spare drive or all newly
defined hot-spare drives. To do this, select the
Back button, use the right mouse button to
select the Hot-Spare Drive icon in the Main
Panel on the right, and then select Remove New
Hot-Spare Drive or Remove All New
Hot-Spare Drives.
6. Select a RAID level for the logical drive from the
RAID pull-down menu in the Main Panel. (See
“Supported RAID levels” on page 67 for descriptions
of the supported levels.)
7. Move the sliding bar in the Main Panel from right to
left to allot data and parity space for the logical drive.
Notes
1. You can define from one to eight logical
drives.
2. Some operating systems have size
limitations for logical drives. Before you
save the configuration, you might want to
verify that the size of the logical drive is
appropriate for the operating system. See
the operating system documentation for
more detailed information.
3. Typically, the first logical drive defined on
the first ServeRAID adapter or controller
found by system BIOS during startup will be
the startup (boot) drive.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
77
8. If free space is available and you want to define
another logical drive, click on the Add Logical Drive
button in the Main Panel.
9. Repeat steps 6, 7, and 8 for each logical drive that
you want to define; then, continue with step 10.
10. Select the Next button.
11. Review the information that appears on the
Configuration Summary screen.
Note
To change the configuration, select a Modify
icon button.
12. Select the Apply button to accept and save the
configuration.
13. If you have not already done so, install the operating
system. See the server documentation or the
documentation provided with the operating system for
more information.
After you install the operating system, see “ServeRAID
device drivers and utility programs (installation)” on
page 130 (or the installation instructions provided with the
server) for information about installing the ServeRAID
device drivers and utility programs.
Information mode:
You can use the Information mode to view the
configuration information for the server, ServeRAID
controllers, arrays, logical drives, hot-spare drives, and
physical drives that make up the ServeRAID subsystem.
You also can use this mode to change some of the
ServeRAID controller settings.
Viewing the Device and Configuration Information
To view the current settings:
1. Select the plus (+) box next to the object in the Main
Tree to expand that portion of the tree.
2. Select the icon for the server, ServeRAID controller,
array, logical drive, hot-spare drive, or physical drive
to view its current settings.
Detailed information about the selected device will appear
in the Main Panel on the right. The following pages
provide descriptions of the device information that might
appear.
System Information Panel
When you select the server from the Main Tree, the
following information appears in the Main Panel on the
right:
Ÿ
78
System Name shows the name you assigned to the
server.
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Number of Controllers shows the total number of
ServeRAID adapters and controllers found in the
server.
ServeRAID Controller Information Panel
When you select a ServeRAID controller from the Main
Tree, the following information appears in the Main Panel
on the right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Controller Type shows the type of ServeRAID
controller, such as ServeRAID II, ServeRAID-3H, or
ServeRAID-3L.
BIOS Version shows the level of basic input/output
system code currently installed for the ServeRAID
controller.
Firmware Version shows the level of microcode
currently installed for the ServeRAID controller.
Physical Slot shows the actual physical slot location
for the ServeRAID controller; for example, PCI slot 4.
Battery Backup Write Cache provides information
about the optional battery-backup cache device.
Statements such as Installed, Not Installed, Defective,
or Replace Battery might appear for this feature.
Read-Ahead Cache Mode shows the current setting,
Enabled or Disabled, for the read-ahead cache mode.
(See page 88 for more information.)
Stripe-Unit Size shows the current setting of 8 KB,
16 KB, 32 KB, or 64 KB for the stripe-unit size. (See
“Interleave depth and stripe-unit size” on page 67 and
page 90 for more information.)
Rebuild Rate shows the current setting (High,
Medium, or Low) for the rebuild rate. (See page 89
for more information.)
Hot-Swap Rebuild shows the current setting,
Enabled or Disabled, for the hot-swap rebuild feature.
This feature is set to Enabled when the level of
ServeRAID firmware in use supports this feature.
Data Scrubbing shows the current setting, Enabled
or Disabled, for the data-scrubbing feature. This
feature is set to Enabled when the level of ServeRAID
firmware in use supports this feature. The
data-scrubbing feature continuously reads all sectors
of RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives “in the
background” while the system is running. If a
defective sector is found, it is automatically repaired.
With this feature Enabled, you no longer need to
synchronize RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical
drives on a weekly basis.
Auto-Synchronization shows the setting for this
feature. The auto-synchronization feature always
appears as Enabled when the level of ServeRAID
firmware in use supports this feature. (See page 91
for more information.)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
79
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Clustering shows the current setting, Enabled or
Disabled, for this feature.
ServeRAID Controller Host ID appears only when
the controller is part of a shared-disk cluster.
Cluster Partner Host ID appears only when the
ServeRAID controller is configured for use in a
shared-disk cluster.
Number of Arrays shows the total number of arrays
(1 to 8) defined for this ServeRAID controller.
Number of Logical Drives shows the total number of
logical drives (1 to 8) defined for this ServeRAID
controller.
Number of Hot-Spare Drives shows the total
number of hot-spare drives defined for this
ServeRAID controller.
Array Information Panel
When you select the Arrays icon from the Main Tree,
general information about all configured arrays (such as
size, free space, and number of logical drives in each
array) appears in the Main Panel on the right.
When you select a specific array from the Main Tree, the
following information appears in the Main Panel on the
right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Array Letter shows the letter (A through H) assigned
to the array.
Array Size in MB shows the total size, in MB, of the
array.
Free Space in MB shows the amount of free space
available in the array.
Number of Logical Drives shows the number of
logical drives (1 to 8) defined for the array.
Number of Physical Drives shows the number of
physical drives grouped in the array.
Logical Drive Information Panel
When you select a logical drive from the Main Tree, the
following information appears in the Main Panel on the
right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
80
Logical Drive Number shows the number (1 to 8)
assigned to the logical drive.
Array Letter shows the letter (A through H) assigned
to the array in which the logical drive resides.
Drive State shows the current state of the logical
drive. See “Logical drive state descriptions” on
page 82 for descriptions of the states that might
appear in this field.
RAID Level shows the RAID level (0, 1, or 5)
assigned to the logical drive.
Data Space in MB shows the amount of space in the
logical drive defined for data storage.
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Parity Space in MB shows the amount of space in
the logical drive allocated for parity storage.
Date Created shows the date that you created the
logical drive.
Write-Cache Mode shows the current setting, write
through or write back, for the logical drive.
Battery Backup Write Cache shows the current
setting, Enabled or Disabled, for the battery backup
cache device. When the battery backup cache device
is installed, write cache is set to the write-back mode.
Merge-Group Number appears if the ServeRAID
controller is part of a cluster. The valid settings in the
Shared state are 1 through 8. Valid settings in the
Non-Shared state are 201 through 215.
Merge-Group State shows the current setting,
Shared or Non-Shared, for this parameter.
Hot-Spare Drive Information Panel
When you select the Hot-Spare Drives icon from the Main
Tree, information about the total number of functional
hot-spare and standby hot-spare drives defined for the
ServeRAID controller appears in the Main Panel on the
right.
When you select a specific hot-spare drive from the Main
Tree, the following information appears in the Main Panel
on the right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
SCSI ID shows the SCSI ID assigned to the drive.
Channel shows the SCSI channel to which the
hot-spare drive is attached.
Drive Type shows the type of physical drive. For a
hot spare, this will always appear as Hard Disk Drive.
Size in MB shows the total capacity of the hard disk
drive in MB.
Drive State shows the drive state. For a hot spare,
this will always appear as Hot Spare.
Vendor shows characters that represent the drive
manufacturer.
Product or Model Number shows characters that
represent the product or model number for the drive.
Serial Number shows the serial number for the drive.
Drive Firmware Level shows the current level of
microcode in use for the drive.
PFA Error indicates the status, Yes or No, for
predictive-failure alerts. Yes indicates that PFA errors
were detected and that you should plan to replace the
device. No indicates that PFA errors were not found.
Physical Drive Information Panel
When you select the Physical Drives icon from the Main
Tree, information about the total number of drives
connected to each channel of the ServeRAID adapter or
controller appears in the Main Panel on the right.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
81
When you select a specific physical drive from the Main
Tree, the following information appears in the Main Panel
on the right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
SCSI ID shows the SCSI ID assigned to the drive.
Channel shows the SCSI channel to which the
physical drive is attached.
Drive Type shows the type of physical drive (Hard
Disk, CD-ROM, Tape, Enclosure, Removable-Media,
or Unknown) selected.
Size in MB shows the total capacity of the drive, in
MB, if the drive is a hard disk. No value will appear if
the physical drive is a CD-ROM or Tape drive.
Drive State shows the current state of the physical
drive. See “Physical drive state descriptions” on
page 83 for descriptions of the states that might
appear in this field.
Array Letter shows the letter (A through H) assigned
to the array in which the physical drive resides, if the
physical drive is part of an array.
Vendor shows characters that represent the drive
manufacturer.
Product or Model Number shows characters that
represent the product or model number for the drive.
Serial Number shows the serial number for the drive.
Drive Firmware Level shows the current level of
microcode in use for the drive.
PFA Error indicates the status, Yes or No, for
predictive-failure alerts. Yes indicates that PFA errors
were detected and that you should plan to replace the
device. No indicates that PFA errors were not found.
Channel Information Panel
When you select a SCSI Channel icon from the Main Tree,
the following information appears in the Main Panel on the
right:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Number of Drives shows the number of physical
drives currently attached to the SCSI channel.
SCSI Initiator ID shows the initiator ID for the SCSI
channel.
SCSI Transfer Speed shows the current SCSI
transfer setting (Optimal, Ultra2 SCSI, UltraSCSI, Fast
SCSI 2, or SCSI 2) for the entire channel. See page
93 for more information.
Logical drive state descriptions:
The following table provides descriptions of the valid
logical drive states.
82
Netfinity Server HMM
Drive
State
Meaning
Blocked
During a rebuild operation, the ServeRAID
controller sets the state of any RAID level-0
logical drives associated with a failed array
to the Blocked state; then, it reconstructs the
data that was stored in RAID level-1 and
RAID level-5 logical drives.
After the Rebuild operation completes, you
can unblock the RAID level-0 logical drives,
and access them once again. However, the
logical drive might contain damaged data.
You must either re-create, install, or restore
the data from the most recent backup disk or
tape to the RAID level-0 logical drive.
Critical
Migrating
A logical drive in the critical state that is
undergoing a logical drive migration (LDM).
Critical
System
The ServeRAID controller uses this reserved
state during a logical drive migration (LDM).
Critical
A RAID level-1 or level-5 logical drive that
contains a defunct physical drive is in the
critical state. A critical logical drive is
accessible, despite a physical drive failure.
Attention
If the state of the logical drive is critical,
replace and rebuild the defunct drive as
soon as possible to prevent the loss of
data. If a second drive fails before the
first rebuild completes, you might lose
valuable data. See “Rebuilding a
defunct drive” on page 157 for more
information.
Migrating
The logical drive is undergoing a logical drive
migration; that is, a change in RAID levels, a
change in logical drive size, or an increase in
free space.
Offline
The logical drive is offline and not
accessible. This state occurs if one or more
physical drives in a RAID level-0 logical drive
is defunct. This state also occurs when two
or more physical drives in a RAID level-1 or
level-5 logical drive are defunct.
Okay
The logical drive is okay. It is in a good,
functional state.
System
The ServeRAID controller uses this reserved
state during logical drive migration (LDM).
If the state of the logical drive is critical you must replace
and rebuild the defunct drive. See “Rebuilding a defunct
drive” on page 157 for more information.
Physical drive state descriptions:
The following table provides descriptions of the valid
physical drive states.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
83
Drive
State
Meaning
Defunct
A physical hard disk drive in the Online,
Hot-Spare, or Rebuild state has become
defunct. It does not respond to commands,
which means that the ServeRAID controller
cannot communicate properly with the drive.
A hard disk drive in the Defunct state does
not necessarily mean that you need to
replace the drive. Before you replace the
drive, ensure that:
1. All cables are connected properly to the
server backplane and to the hard disk
drive. Also, check to ensure that all
cables inside the server are connected
properly.
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated
properly in the drive bay.
3. The termination for each device on the
SCSI channel is set properly.
4. Each device on the SCSI channel has
its own, unique SCSI ID.
If the hard disk drive still does not function
after you perform these steps, replace the
drive.
Empty
No device is present in the bay.
Hot Spare
A Hot-Spare drive is a hard disk drive that is
defined for automatic use when a similar
drive fails.
Online
The drive is Online. It is functioning properly
and is part of an array.
Rebuilding
The drive is being rebuilt.
For more information on rebuilding a drive,
refer to “Rebuilding a defunct drive” on
page 157.
Ready
The ServeRAID controller recognizes a
Ready drive as being available for definition.
Standby
A Standby drive is a hard disk drive that the
ServeRAID controller has spun down.
Standby
Hot Spare
A Standby Hot Spare is a Hot-Spare drive
that the ServeRAID controller has spun
down. If an Online drive becomes Defunct
and no suitable Hot-Spare drive is available,
a Standby Hot-Spare drive of the appropriate
size automatically spins up, and enters the
Rebuild state.
Changing the ServeRAID configuration
settings:
To change the settings:
1. Select the plus (+) box next to the object in the Main
Tree to expand the tree.
84
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Select the icon in the Main Tree for the ServeRAID
controller, array, logical drive, hot-spare drive, or
physical drive that you want to change.
3. Select Actions in the File Menu; then, make a
selection from the pull-down menu.
or
Using the right mouse button, select the object in the
Main Tree; then, make a selection from the pop-up
list.
See “Menu bar” on page 86 for descriptions of the choices
available from the Actions pull-down menu.
Tool bar:
Descriptions of the quick-path icons provided on the Tool
Bar are as follows:
Save the Configuration Event Log: This icon
appears in the Information mode. When you
select this icon, a pop-up window appears and
lets you specify a file name and path for the
ServeRAID Configuration Event Log.
Note
This feature currently is not supported on
IBM Netfinity 3000, 3500, 5000, and 5500
servers; however, IBM intends to support
this feature on these server models in the
near future. The updated BIOS code
needed to support this feature will be
made available on the World Wide Web.
(See page 130 for the instructions needed
to access the IBM support page.)
Configure the ServeRAID Controller: This
icon appears in the Information mode. When
you select this icon, the configuration program
switches from the Information mode to the
Configuration mode. A message will appear at
the bottom of the Main Panel if no Ready drives
are available for the selected ServeRAID
controller. If this occurs, you can select the
Cancel button to return to the Information mode
or select another ServeRAID controller.
Configure for Clustering: This icon appears
in the Information mode. You can select this
icon to define the ServeRAID controller for use
in a dual-node, high-availability, shared-disk
cluster environment. Detailed instructions for
using the clustering features are provided in the
IBM Netfinity High-Availability Cluster Solution
Installation and User's Guide. You can obtain a
copy of this manual at the following address on
the World Wide Web:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/netfinity/clustering
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
85
Scan for New or Removed Ready Drives:
This icon appears in the Information mode.
When you select a ServeRAID controller from
the Main Tree and select this icon, the
configuration program will scan the individual
channel, or all channels, on the controller for
new or removed Ready drives. Use this feature
whenever you physically change the
configuration of the ServeRAID subsystem, for
example, when you physically install or remove
one or more SCSI drives.
Create an Array: This icon appears in the
Information mode if you select a controller from
the Main Tree and that controller has Ready
drives available.
Help: This icon appears in both the
Information and Configuration modes. Select
this icon to access the online ServeRAID Help
facility. Task-oriented Help is available from
many of the pop-up windows that appear during
the configuration process; and, you also can
obtain context-sensitive Help by selecting an
item and then pressing the F1 key.
Menu bar:
Descriptions of the choices available from the Menu Bar
are as follows:
File
View
86
The File pull-down menu contains the
following choices in the Information mode:
Ÿ Save Configuration Event Log: Select
this choice to save configuration event
information (such as the start time and
completion time for a rebuild operation)
to a file.
Ÿ Clear Configuration Event Log:
Select this choice to erase the event
information stored in the Configuration
Event Log.
Ÿ Exit: Select this choice to exit from the
ServeRAID Configuration Program.
The View pull-down menu contains the
following choices in both the Information and
Configuration modes:
Ÿ Small Icons: This is the default setting.
When you select this choice, small icons
appear in the Main Tree on the left and
the Main Panel on the right.
Ÿ Large Icons: Select this choice to
display large icons in the Main Tree on
the left and the Main Panel on the right.
Ÿ Options: Select this choice to change
the Initialization and Synchronization
mode, as follows:
Netfinity Server HMM
–
–
Basic: This is the default setting.
When this mode is Enabled, the
configuration program automatically
initializes each new logical drive
and prevents access to the manual
initialization and synchronization
functions. This choice also forces
the synchronization of all new RAID
level-5 logical drives attached to
older ServeRAID adapter or
controller models that do not
support the auto-synchronization
feature.
Advanced: When Enabled, this
choice lets you select to
automatically initialize new logical
drives and force the
synchronization of all new RAID
level-5 logical drives before exiting
the ServeRAID Configuration
Program.
Attention
If you disable Automatic
Initialization, the ServeRAID
Configuration Program will not
initialize each logical drive (by
writing zeros to the first 1024
sectors of the logical drive)
when it is created. You still
must initialize all newly defined
logical drives before storing
data. If you disable the
synchronization feature and the
level of firmware being used by
the ServeRAID adapter or
controller does not support the
auto-synchronization feature,
you still must synchronize all
RAID level-5 logical drives
before storing data.
Actions
All choices available from the Actions
pull-down menu also are available from the
pop-up lists that appear when you use the
right mouse button and select the object in
the Main Tree.
The following choices appear on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select a
ServeRAID controller from the Main Tree:
Ÿ Configure the ServeRAID Controller:
This choice is available in the
Information mode only. It appears on
the pull-down menu when there are
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
87
Ÿ
Ready drives and logical-drive slots still
available for the ServeRAID controller.
Configure for Clustering: This choice
is available in the Information mode
only. You can select this choice to
define the ServeRAID controller for use
in a high-availability, shared-disk cluster
environment. Detailed instructions for
using the clustering features are
provided in the IBM Netfinity
High-Availability Cluster Solution
Installation and User's Guide. You can
obtain a copy of this manual at the
following address on the World Wide
Web:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/netfinity/clustering
Ÿ
Initialize the Controller Configuration:
This choice is available in both the
Configuration and Information modes.
Select this choice to delete the
ServeRAID controller configuration.
Attention
After you initialize the controller
configuration, you will not have
access to any data stored on the
logical drives attached to the
selected ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
This choice deletes the existing
configuration information, sets all
functional hard disk drives attached to
the controller to the Ready state, and
deletes all logical drives defined for the
controller.
Ÿ
Ÿ
88
This choice does not change any of the
ServeRAID adapter or controller settings
(such as the stripe-unit size, rebuild rate,
and so on) from their current or
customized values.
Copy the Configuration from the
Drives to the Controller: This choice
is available in the Information mode
only; it copies the configuration
information stored on the hard disk
drives to the ServeRAID controller. This
function is useful when you import
previously configured drives from
another system, or when you replace
the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
Disable or Enable Read-Ahead Cache
Mode: These choices are available in
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
the Information mode only. When
read-ahead cache is set to Enabled
(default setting), the ServeRAID
controller transfers data from a disk to
its local cache in increments equal to
the stripe-unit size. This provides
excellent overall performance when
workloads are steady and sequential.
However, if the workload is random or
the system I/O requests are smaller than
the stripe-unit size, reading ahead to the
end of the stripe might degrade
performance. When read-ahead cache
is set to Disabled, the ServeRAID
controller transfers data from a disk to
local cache in increments equal to the
system I/O request size, without reading
ahead to the end of the stripe.
Change the Rebuild Rate: This choice
is available in the Information mode
only. You can select this choice to set
the priority for Rebuild operations to
High (default), Medium, or Low.
– When the rebuild rate is set to
High, the rebuild I/O request gets
high priority in the execution order.
– When the rebuild request is set
from High to Medium in a heavily
loaded system, it can increase the
rebuild time, but provide better
system performance.
– When the rebuild request is set
from High or Medium to Low in a
moderate to heavily loaded system,
it can increase the disk rebuild
time, but provide better system
performance.
Change the Stripe-Unit Size: This
choice is available in the Information
mode only.
Attention
After you configure an array and
store data on the logical drives, you
cannot change the stripe-unit size
without destroying data in the
logical drives.
The stripe-unit size is the amount of
data written on a given disk before
writing on the next disk. To maximize
the overall performance, choose a size
that is close to the size of the system
I/O request. You can set the stripe-unit
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
89
Ÿ
size to 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, or 64 KB.
When the stripe-unit size is 8 KB (the
default setting) or 16 KB, the maximum
number of physical drives supported in
an array is 16. When the stripe-unit size
is 32 KB or 64 KB, the maximum
number of physical drives supported in
an array is eight. (See “Interleave depth
and stripe-unit size” on page 67 for
more information.)
Scan for New or Removed Ready
Drives: This choice is available in the
Information mode only. When you
select this choice, the configuration
program scans all channels on the
ServeRAID controller for new or
removed Ready drives.
The following choices appear on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select the Arrays
icon or a specific array icon from the Main
Tree:
Ÿ Create an Array: This choice appears
in the Information mode if you select the
Arrays icon and Ready drives are
available. When you select this choice,
the configuration program switches from
the Information mode to the
Configuration mode.
Ÿ Delete All Arrays: This choice is
available in the Information mode only.
It appears on the Actions pull-down
menu if you select the Arrays icon from
the Main Tree and arrays are defined for
the controller.
Ÿ Delete Array: This choice is available
in the Information mode only. It appears
on the Actions pull-down menu when
you select a specific array icon from the
Main Tree.
The following choices appear on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select the Logical
Drives icon or a specific logical drive icon
from the Main Tree:
Ÿ Create a Logical Drive in Array: This
choice appears on the Actions pull-down
menu in the Information mode if you
select the Logical Drives icon and free
space is available in one or more arrays.
Ÿ Change Write-Cache Mode to Write
Through or Write Back: These
choices are available in the Information
mode when you select a specific logical
drive icon from the Main Tree.
90
Netfinity Server HMM
When this feature is set to the
write-through mode, the completion
status of a write command is sent after
the data is written to the hard disk drive.
Under certain workloads, you can
improve performance by changing this
setting to the write-back mode, where
the completion status of a write
command is sent after the data is copied
to cache memory, but before the data is
actually written to the storage device.
Attention
1. You might lose data if a power
outage occurs while using the
write-back mode without a
battery-backup cache device.
2. If you do not have a
battery-backup cache installed
and Enabled and you set this
feature to the write-back mode,
wait at least 10 seconds after
the last operation before you
turn off the system. Failure to
follow this practice can result in
lost data.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Synchronize: This choice is available
in the Information mode when you select
a logical drive from the Main Tree and
the following conditions are both true:
– The ServeRAID adapter or
controller does not support the
auto-synchronization feature.
– You previously selected Options
from the View pull-down menu and
disabled the “Synchronize all new
RAID level-5 logical drives” setting.
Synchronizing a logical drive verifies that
the data redundancy for the logical drive
is correct. You must synchronize all
RAID level-5 logical drives before storing
data. (See page 79 for more
information.)
Initialize: This choice is available in the
Information mode when you select a
logical drive from the Main Tree and you
previously selected Options from the
View pull-down menu and disabled the
“Automatically initialize new logical
drives” setting.
Unblock the Logical Drive: This
choice appears in the Information mode
when you select a specific logical drive
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
91
that is in the Blocked state. You can
select this choice to change the Drive
Access setting for the RAID level-0
logical drive from Blocked to Unblocked.
During a rebuild operation, the
ServeRAID controller sets the state of
any RAID level-0 logical drives
associated with a failed array to the
Blocked state.
After the Rebuild operation completes,
you can unblock the RAID level-0 logical
drives, and access them once again.
However, the logical drive might contain
damaged data. You must either
re-create, install, or restore the data
from the most recent backup disk or
tape to the RAID level-0 logical drive.
The following choice appears on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select a hot-spare
drive from the Main Tree:
Ÿ Remove from Hot-Spare State: This
choice is available in the Information
mode only. Select this choice to remove
a hot-spare drive from the configuration
and set the drive state back to Ready.
The following choices appear on the Actions
pull-down menu when you select a physical
drive, a physical drive icon, or a SCSI
channel icon from the Main Tree:
Ÿ Set Drive State to Hot Spare: This
choice is available in the Information
mode only. It appears when the
physical drive that you select from the
Main Tree is in the Ready state. You
can select this choice to add the drive to
the configuration and to change its state
from Ready to Hot Spare.
Ÿ Set Drive State to Online: This choice
appears in the Information mode, and
you can use it to change the state of a
drive from Defunct to Online.
Attention
You might lose data by setting a
Defunct physical drive that is part of
an array to Online.
Ÿ
92
Replace Drive and Rebuild: This
choice is available in the Information
mode only. Select this choice when you
want to physically remove a defunct
drive from the system and install a good
drive in its place.
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Change the SCSI Transfer Speed:
This choice is available in the
Information mode only. It appears when
you select a SCSI Channel icon. You
can select this choice to change the
transfer speed from its default value of
Optimal. When the transfer speed is set
to Optimal, the ServeRAID adapter or
controller determines the best transfer
speed, based on the types of SCSI
drives and storage enclosures in use.
Choices available are Ultra2 SCSI,
UltraSCSI, Fast SCSI 2, and SCSI 2.
Remove Defunct Drive: This choice
appears in the Information mode only.
After you physically remove a drive,
select this choice to delete the drive
information from the configuration.
Replace Defunct Drive: This choice
appears in the Information mode only.
Select this choice to physically replace a
defunct disk drive.
Note
Always replace a defunct drive with
a drive of equal or greater capacity.
Scan for New or Removed Ready
Drives: This choice is available in the
Information mode only. When you
select this choice, the configuration
program scans the individual channel or
all channels on the ServeRAID controller
for new or removed Ready drives.
The following choices are available from the
Help pull-down menu:
Ÿ Contents: Select this choice to access
the online Help facility. This choice is
available in both the Information and
Configuration modes. Task-oriented
Help is available from many of the
pop-up windows that appear during the
configuration process; and, you also can
obtain context-sensitive Help by
selecting an item and then pressing the
F1 key.
Ÿ About: Select this choice to view the
version number and copyright
information for the ServeRAID
Configuration Program. This choice is
available in both the Information and
Configuration modes.
Ÿ
Help
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
93
ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program
The ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program is a quick way
to display the current settings for the ServeRAID adapter
or controller. You also can use this program to perform a
limited set of the configuration functions without using the
ServeRAID Configuration CD.
To access the Mini-Configuration program:
1. Turn on the server. If the server already is turned on,
restart it.
2. When the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration prompt
appears, press Ctrl+i.
3. If the system contains more than one ServeRAID
adapter or controller, a selection screen will appear.
To continue:
a. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to
select an adapter or controller.
b. Press Enter.
If the system contains only one ServeRAID adapter or
controller, or after you select a ServeRAID adapter or
controller, the Main Menu appears.
Descriptions of the choices available from the Main
Menu of the Mini-Configuration program are as
follows:
Ÿ View Controller Status shows the current status
of the ServeRAID adapter or controller. (See
“Viewing the controller status” for more
information.)
Ÿ View Configuration shows the current
configuration information for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller. (See “Viewing the
configuration” on page 95 for more information.)
Ÿ Advanced Functions lets you initialize the
configuration, import configuration from drives,
configure BIOS settings, and view the controller
and PCI information. (See “Advanced
Configuration Functions” on page 96 for more
information.)
4. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to
highlight your choice; then, press Enter.
5. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
6. Select Exit to leave the Main Menu.
Viewing the controller status:
When you select View Controller Status from the Main
Menu, the following information appears on the screen:
Ÿ
94
Unattended shows the current On/Off state of the
Unattended mode.
– When set to Off, you can choose the recovery
method when there is a ServeRAID adapter or
controller startup error.
Netfinity Server HMM
–
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
When set to On, the ServeRAID adapter or
controller chooses the recovery method when a
startup error occurs.
Read Ahead shows the current On/Off state of the
Read Ahead Cache mode.
BootCD shows the current On/Off state of the
Bootable CD-ROM function. (Refer to “Setting the
bootable CD-ROM feature” on page 97.)
CompMode shows the current BIOS compatibility
mode. On indicates 8 GB Extended; Off indicates 2
GB Limited.
Clustered shows the current On/Off state for
clustering.
NVRBB shows the current state of the battery-backup
cache option. The default value is Enabled.
Boot Blk shows the version number of the bootable
microcode loaded for the ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
Code Blk shows the current version number of the
firmware loaded for the ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
Rebuild Rate shows the current speed setting for
rebuilds: High, Medium, or Low.
Number of Defunct Drives shows the current
number of Defunct physical drives.
Number of Offline Drives shows the current number
of Offline logical drives.
Number of Critical Drives shows the current number
of Critical logical drives.
Config. Updates shows the number of times that the
configuration has been changed since it has been
initialized. When you initialize the configuration, the
Config. Update resets to zero.
Flash Pgms shows the current number of times that
the Flash EEPROM has been written.
Locked, Bad Stripe, or Blocked Drive identifies the
logical drives that are affected.
– Bad Stripe Drives indicates the area of a logical
drive that is inaccessible.
– Locked Stripe Drives is a reserved field.
– Blocked Drives indicates the logical drives that
are blocked. You must unblock a blocked drive
before you can use it. See “Logical drive state
descriptions” on page 82 for more information.
Viewing the configuration:
You can select View Configuration from the Main Menu to
view the number of each logical drive, and to view the
size, RAID level, state, stripe-unit size, write policy,
read-ahead status, and creation date for each logical drive.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
95
Advanced Configuration Functions:
You can select the Advanced Functions choice to reset
the ServeRAID adapter or controller, initialize the
configuration, import the configuration information from the
drives, configure BIOS settings, and view the adapter,
controller, or PCI information.
When you select the Advanced Functions choice from
the Main Menu, the following choices appear on the
screen.
Attention
Be careful when making selections from this menu. If
you change the configuration, you might lose data.
Ÿ
Initialize Configuration lets you reset the
configuration. You will not have access to any data
stored on the logical drives attached to the selected
ServeRAID adapter or controller.
This choice deletes the existing configuration
information, sets all functional hard disk drives
attached to the controller to the Ready state, and
deletes all logical drives defined for the controller.
Ÿ
Ÿ
96
This choice does not change any of the ServeRAID
adapter or controller settings (such as the stripe-unit
size, rebuild rate, and so on) from their current or
customized values.
Import Configuration from Drive reads the most
common configuration from the drives in the system
and copies it to the ServeRAID adapter or controller
NVRAM and EEPROM module.
Configure BIOS Settings lets you modify the BIOS
settings, such as the Bootable CD-ROM and INT13
Extensions settings, for the ServeRAID adapter or
controller. (See “Setting the bootable CD-ROM
feature” on page 97 for more information.)
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. The Multiple Controller mode has two
settings: Erase and Shrink. When this
parameter is set to Erase, redundant copies
of the ServeRAID BIOS are erased. When
this parameter is set to Shrink, the extra
copies of the ServeRAID BIOS are removed
from memory, but stored for future use.
When you have multiple ServeRAID
adapters and controllers installed, you need
only one active copy of ServeRAID BIOS.
However, to ensure that you will have a
copy of the ServeRAID BIOS available if the
active copy becomes defective or
unavailable, leave the Multiple Controller
parameter set to Shrink.
2. Only one adapter or controller in the system
can support the INT13 extensions.
Ÿ
Ÿ
View Controller and PCI Information shows the
ServeRAID adapter or controller hardware and PCI
register information.
Exit lets you exit the Mini-Configuration program.
Setting the bootable CD-ROM feature:
When you attach a CD-ROM drive to the ServeRAID
adapter or controller and set the Bootable CD-ROM feature
to Yes, the ServeRAID adapter or controller will attempt to
start a CD that has a bootable startup partition, if no other
adapter or controller in the system is currently using INT13
extensions. Only one adapter or controller in the system
can support the INT13 extensions.
To enable the Bootable CD-ROM feature:
1. Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu of
the Mini-Configuration program.
2. Select Configure BIOS Settings from the Advanced
Functions menu.
3. Use the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys to
highlight BIOS Support for Bootable CD-ROM; then,
press Enter to change No to Yes.
Note
This also changes No to Yes next to Display
Boot CD-ROM Menu and BIOS Support for
INT13 Extensions.
4. Ensure that the screen has Yes next to BIOS
Support for Reading Partition Tables. If not, use
the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys to
highlight BIOS Support for Reading Partition
Tables; then, press Enter to change No to Yes.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
97
Note
You must perform this next step to save the new
settings.
5. Highlight Save Configuration to the ServeRAID
Controller; then, press Enter. The program displays
a Configuration Saved message, and then returns
you to the Main Menu of the Mini-Configuration
program.
6. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.
ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program
You can use the Administration and Monitoring Program to
monitor the ServeRAID adapters and controllers, view the
ServeRAID configuration and associated devices, rebuild
an array, create a logical drive, create an array, delete an
array, dynamically increase the logical-drive size, change
RAID levels, and much more.
Starting the ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program:
Before you start the ServeRAID WIN32-Based
Administration and Monitoring Program, review the
following illustration to become familiar with the layout of
its Main screen.
1
2
3
8
7
4
6
5
Descriptions of the numbered areas are as follows:
1. Title Bar Displays the title of the application, along with
the minimize icon, the maximize icon, and the
close icon.
2. Menu Bar Displays the pull-down menus for all
supported functions.
3. Tool Bar Displays the icons for the commonly used
functions.
98
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Device Area Displays the state of each device
connected to the physical channels of the
ServeRAID adapter or controller, and if
applicable, its array identifier.
5. Status Bar Displays help for the area where the cursor
is currently pointing. Also displays the date
and time.
6. Status Window Displays messages regarding the
operational status of each adapter or
controller.
7. Logical Drive Area Displays the number of logical
drives created and the status of the logical
drive.
8. Adapter Area Displays the number and status of the
installed ServeRAID adapters and controllers
To start the WIN32-Based Administration and Monitoring
Program:
1. Do one of the following:
Ÿ Select the IBM ServeRAID Administration icon
or
Select IBM ServeRAID Administration from the
Start menu.
2. The Administration and Monitoring Program starts in
stand-alone mode. After this program loads, you can
access the ServeRAID adapters and controllers.
Ÿ
When the Main window appears:
Ÿ If you are running the program in the stand-alone
mode and you have ServeRAID adapters or
controllers installed in the system, the current
settings of the installed adapters or controllers
will appear on the screen.
Ÿ If you are running the program from a client with
no ServeRAID adapters or controllers, a
message will appear stating that no ServeRAID
adapters or controllers are installed in the
system.
3. To access the server that contains the ServeRAID
adapters or controllers, select Network Settings from
the Options menu.
4. When the window appears prompting for Stand-alone
or Client/Server, select the Client/Server button.
5. In the edit box, type in the host name of the server
that you want to access.
or
Select the host name from the pull-down list; then,
select Connect.
Note
If security is enabled on the server, you must
enter a valid user name and password.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
99
Options pull-down menu:
The following choices are available from the Options
pull-down menu on the Main Screen of the Administration
and Monitoring Program:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Network Settings
General Options
Alert Options
Network settings:
If you want to monitor the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers across a network, you must switch to
client/server mode.
You can use the Network Settings dialog box to select and
connect to servers in the network that contain IBM ServeRAID
adapters or controllers.
To select and connect to a server:
1. Select the
icon on the Tool Bar or select
Network Settings from the Options pull-down menu.
A screen similar to the following appears.
2. Select the Client/Server radio button.
3. If security is enabled on the server to which you are
connecting, type in the User Name and Password as
defined by the security file on the server to which you
are connecting. (Refer to “Background-server
component security” on page 153 for information on
the security file).
100
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Type in either the Host Name or the TCP/IP Address
of the system, or select it from the pull-down list.
Note
If the server was started on any port other than
the default (1087), after the Host Name or
TCP/IP Address that you just entered, type in a
colon and the correct port number for the
configuration (for example: ServeRAID:1088).
5. Select Connect to initiate a connection with the
remote system.
General options: When you select General Options
from the Options pull-down menu, a screen similar to the
following appears.
You can use this screen to:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Enable or Disable the alarm
Reset the alarm
Set the polling options
Enabling or disabling the alarm: The alarm alerts
you to a failure in the system. It sounds if any of the
following conditions occur:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
A DDD hard disk drive is found.
A Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) error occurs.
A ServeRAID adapter or controller is not responding.
To enable or disable the alarm, select the box for Disable
Alarm on the General Options screen. Placing a check
in the check box disables the alarm; removing the check
enables the alarm.
Resetting the alarm:
STOP
Resetting the alarm turns off the alarm for the current failure
without disabling the feature.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
101
STOP
To reset the alarm, you can either select the
icon
or select Reset Alarm on the General Options screen.
Polling options: The ServeRAID adapter or controller
will poll, or check, the server at a specified time interval for
any changes that may have occurred in the server.
You can choose how often the adapter or controller polls
the server by specifying a time interval on the options
menu, from five to 60 seconds. The default time interval
setting is five seconds.
The program will poll for the following events:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Rebuild started
Rebuild completed
Synchronization started
Synchronization completed
Migration started
Migration completed
PFA error detected
Dead drive detected
Adapter or controller is not responding to commands
Alert options:
The Netfinity Manage alerts allow system administrators
who are using the IBM Netfinity Manager Program to
configure the ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program to notify the Netfinity Alert Manager of various
activities occurring on the server.
To configure the settings for the Netfinity Manager alerts:
1. Open the Options pull-down menu.
2. Select Alert Options.
3. Select Netfinity Alerts. A screen similar to the
following appears.
Note
The default setting for the Netfinity Manager
alerts is disabled.
102
Netfinity Server HMM
4. To enable all Netfinity Manager alerts, select the
check box next to Enable Netfinity Alerts.
5. To disable any of the Netfinity Manager alerts:
a. Ensure there is a check in the check box next to
Enable Netfinity Alerts.
b. Select the check box next to the specific alert or
alerts you want disabled.
6. To test the Netfinity Manager integration, select the
Send Test Alert button. This will send a Netfinity
Manager alert to the Alert Manager with a test
message.
When you enable Netfinity Manager Alerts, the
ServeRAID adapter or controller will relay the
following three types of messages to the Netfinity
Alert Manager:
a. Information
Ÿ Rebuild started
Ÿ Rebuild completed
Ÿ Synchronization started
Ÿ Synchronization completed
Ÿ Migration started
Ÿ Migration completed
b. Warning
Ÿ PFA error detected
c. Fatal
Ÿ Dead drive detected
Ÿ Adapter or controller is not responding to
commands
By knowing what these types of messages are, you
can configure the Netfinity Manager program with
instructions for monitoring the server configuration
and the appropriate action to take if an alert is given.
For example, you could set the Netfinity Manager
program to dial a specified phone number, should a
defunct drive be detected on any server across the
network. See the documentation provided with
Netfinity Manager for more information.
ServeRAID administration functions
The following information is about using the following
ServeRAID administration functions:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Array administration
Logical drive administration
Logical drive migration administration
Physical drive administration
Adapter administration
Array administration:
Use the following information for creating and deleting disk
arrays.
Creating disk arrays:
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
103
You can use disk arrays to improve security, performance,
and reliability.
To create a disk array:
icon on the Tool Bar or select
1. Select the
Manage Disk Arrays from the Advanced pull-down
menu; then, select Create Disk Array. A screen
similar to the following appears.
2. Select one or more Ready (RDY) drives for the new
disk array from the Main screen of the Administration
and Monitoring Program.
To select a RDY drive, click the desired RDY button
from the device area. A disk array identifier appears
beside each RDY drive added to the disk array.
If you change your mind about a selected drive,
select the button again to remove the selected drive
from the disk array.
3. Select OK to define a logical drive for the new array.
A screen similar to the following appears.
4. Select the appropriate RAID level from the pull-down
list.
104
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
The number of hard disk drives in the array
determines the RAID levels available for the
array.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the array contains one hard disk drive, you
can select only RAID level-0 for the logical
drive.
If the array contains two hard disk drives,
you can select RAID level-0 or RAID level-1
for the logical drive.
If the array contains three or more hard disk
drives, you can select RAID level-0, RAID
level-1, or RAID level-5 for the logical drive.
5. Enter the Requested Space in the entry field.
The ServeRAID program uses the maximum available
space for the selected RAID level to calculate the
default value that it assigns.
Note
The actual logical drive size might be slightly
different from what you type in the Requested
Space field. The RAID level and the number of
hard disk drives determine the size of the logical
drive. For example, a disk array consisting of
three, 1 GB hard disk drives with a requested
RAID level-0 logical drive of 1000 MB will actually
contain only 999 MB because the data is striped
across all three drives, with 333 MB on each
drive.
6. Select OK to create the disk array.
Deleting disk arrays:
Deleting a disk array deletes all logical drives that are defined
in that disk array. All data and programs on the logical drives
in the disk array will be lost during this procedure.
To delete a disk array:
on the Tool Bar or select Manage
1. Select the
Disk Arrays from the Advanced pull-down menu;
then, select Delete Disk Array. A screen similar to
the following appears.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
105
2. Select the desired disk array ID from the pull-down
list.
Attention
Before proceeding, ensure that you have backed
up any data and programs that you want to save.
3. Select OK to delete the disk array.
Note
For some operating systems, deleting a disk array and
its associated logical drives might change the
drive-letter assignments of the remaining drives when
you restart the system.
Logical drive administration:
Use the following information to create logical drives,
initialize and synchronizing logical drives, or access
blocked logical drives.
Creating logical drives:
Each ServeRAID adapter or controller supports a maximum
of 8 logical drives. Depending upon the stripe-unit size
being used, you can combine a maximum of 8 or 16
physical drives into each logical drive.
To create a logical drive:
icon on the Tool Bar or select
1. Select the
Manage Logical Drive from the Advanced pull-down
menu; then, select Create Logical Drive. A screen
similar to the following appears.
2. Select the desired disk array ID from the pull-down
list.
106
Netfinity Server HMM
3. Select the appropriate RAID level from the pull-down
list.
Note
The number of hard disk drives in the array
determines the RAID levels available for the
array.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the array contains one hard disk drive, you
can select only RAID level-0 for the logical
drive.
If the array contains two hard disk drives,
you can select RAID level-0 or RAID level-1
for the logical drive.
If the array contains three or more hard disk
drives, you can select RAID level-0, RAID
level-1, or RAID level-5 for the logical drive.
4. Enter the Requested Space in the entry field.
The ServeRAID program uses the maximum available
space for the selected RAID level to calculate the
default value that it assigns.
Note
The actual logical drive size may be slightly
different from what you type in the Requested
Space field. The RAID level and the number of
hard disk drives determine the size of the logical
drive. For example, a disk array consisting of
three, 1 GB hard disk drives with a requested
RAID level-0 logical drive of 1000 MB will actually
contain only 999 MB because the data is striped
across all three drives, with 333 MB on each
drive.
5. Select OK to create the logical drive.
Notes
1. If you plan to use the Logical Drive Migration
(LDM) feature, do not define more than seven
logical drives. The LDM feature requires one
free logical drive to perform the migration. Refer
to “Logical drive migration administration” on
page 109 for more information.
2. If you plan to use the Change RAID Level
function of the LDM feature, you must assign the
same RAID level to all logical drives within a
single disk array. Refer to “Change RAID levels”
on page 109 for more information.
Initializing logical drives: Initializing a logical drive
erases the first 1024 sectors on the drive and prevents
access to any data previously stored on the drive.
To initialize a logical drive:
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
107
1. Select the desired logical drive from the Main screen
of the Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Select Initialize to initialize the drive.
3. If you have initialized a RAID level-5 drive, you must
synchronize to ensure data integrity. Go to
“Synchronizing logical drives.”
Synchronizing logical drives: The purpose of
synchronizing logical drives is to compute and write the
parity data on the selected drives.
If the type of ServeRAID adapter or controller you are
using does not support the auto-synchronization and
data-scrubbing features, manually synchronize the RAID
level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives weekly. This does
not alter data on the drive.
Synchronizing a logical drive verifies that the data
redundancy for the logical drive is correct.
To synchronize a logical drive:
1. Select the desired logical drive from the Main screen
of the Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Select Synchronize to synchronize the drive.
3. The synchronization begins automatically and reports
progress information on the screen.
Note
Only one synchronization command can be
active at a time.
Unblocking logical drives: When the ServeRAID
adapter or controller performs a Rebuild operation on an
array, it reconstructs the data that was stored in RAID
level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives. However, the
ServeRAID adapter or controller cannot reconstruct the
data that was stored in any RAID level-0 logical drives in
that array. The data in the RAID level-0 logical drives is
blocked when the ServeRAID adapter or controller detects
that the array is valid, but the data might be damaged.
108
Netfinity Server HMM
After the Rebuild operation completes, you can unblock the
RAID level-0 logical drives and access them once again.
But remember, the logical drive might contain damaged
data. You must either re-create, install, or restore the data
from the most recent backup disk or tape.
To unblock a blocked drive:
1. Select the blocked logical drive from the Main screen
of the Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Select Unblock to unblock the drive.
3. Initialize all unblocked logical drives before using
them. See “Initializing logical drives” on page 107.
4. Restore the data to the drive from the most recent
backup disk or tape.
Logical drive migration administration:
The logical drive migration (LDM) feature dynamically
changes the current logical drive structure. You can use
this procedure to change the RAID level, increase the free
space in a disk array, or change the size of a logical drive.
To use the LDM feature, you must have at least two logical
drives available: one free (FRE) logical drive and one
source logical drive that is in the okay (OKY) state. During
the LDM procedure, the ServeRAID adapter or controller
changes the state of the FRE logical drive to SYS; then,
temporarily uses the SYS drive to perform the migration.
When the migration procedure completes, the ServeRAID
adapter or controller changes the state of the SYS drive
back to FRE.
Change RAID levels:
You can change (migrate) the RAID levels of currently defined
logical drives. To use the Change RAID Level feature, all of
the logical drives within the array must be the same RAID
level.
The ServeRAID adapters and controllers support changing
RAID levels as follows:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Change two-drive RAID level-0 to RAID level-5 by
adding one hard disk drive
Change two-drive RAID level-1 to RAID level-5 by
adding one hard disk drive
Change from RAID level-5 to RAID level-0 by
removing one hard disk drive
To change the RAID level of an existing disk array:
Note
If you are migrating to RAID level-0, the last drive
defined in the array becomes RDY.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
109
1. Select the
icon on the Tool Bar or select
Manage Disk Arrays from the Advanced pull-down
menu; then, select Logical Drive Migration. A
screen similar to the following appears.
2. Select Change RAID Level.
3. Select OK.
4. Select a migrating option from the pull-down list.
Note
The affected logical drives appear, based on the
migrating option you select.
5. Select OK to proceed.
6. Select OK to verify the operation.
7. Select a Ready (RDY) drive to add to the array, if you
are migrating to RAID level-5.
Adding a physical drive:
You can expand currently defined arrays by adding one to
three new hard disk drives.
The ServeRAID adapters and controllers support adding
new space to a disk array in the following scenarios:
Ÿ
110
You can increase the free space in a disk array
without changing the size of the logical drives. This is
useful when you need to add logical drives to the
existing disk arrays. Refer to the following illustration.
Netfinity Server HMM
Logical Drive 0
500 MB
Logical Drive 0
500 MB
Logical Drive 1
1000 MB
Logical Drive 1
1000 MB
Free Space
2800 MB
Disk 1
Disk 2
Free Space
Disk 1
Disk 3
Disk 2
Before LDM
Ÿ
Disk 3
4950 MB
Disk 4
After LDM
For example, an existing disk array uses three,
2150 MB hard disk drives that are configured as two
RAID level-5 logical drives (one 500 MB and
1000 MB) and 2800 MB of free space. If you use the
logical drive migration procedure and add a 2150 MB
hard disk drive to increase the amount of free space,
the end result will be two RAID level-5 logical drives
(one 500 MB and one 1000 MB) and with 4950 MB
of free space.
You can increase the size of all the logical drives
proportionally in a disk array. This is useful when you
want to increase the size of the currently defined
logical drives. Refer to the following illustration.
Logical Drive 0
500 MB
Logical Drive 0
Logical Drive 1
1000 MB
Logical Drive 1
Free Space
2800 MB
Disk 1
Disk 2
4200 MB
Free Space
Disk 1
Disk 3
750 MB
1500 MB
Before LDM
Disk 2
Disk 3
Disk 4
After LDM
For example, an array uses three 2150 MB hard disk
drives that are configured as two RAID level-5 logical
drives (one 500 MB and 1000 MB) and 2800 MB of
free space. If you use the logical drive migration
procedure and add a 2150 MB hard disk drive to
proportionally increase the size of the disk array, the
end result will be two RAID level-5 logical drives (one
750 MB and 1500 MB) and 4200 MB of free space.
To add a physical device:
icon on the Tool Bar or select
1. Select the
Manage Disk Arrays from the Advanced pull-down
menu; then, select Logical Drive Migration. A
screen similar to the following appears.
2. Select Add Physical Drive(s).
A prompt appears requesting that you select from 1 to
3 Ready (RDY) drives to add to the existing array.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
111
3. Select the appropriate RDY drives on the Main
screen. An X appears beside the selected drives.
4. When you are finished selecting drives, select OK.
5. Select one of the available expansion options from
the pull-down list.
The screen will show a list of the affected logical
drives with their new sizes.
6. Select OK.
Physical device administration:
Use the following information to set device states and
rebuild devices.
Setting physical device states: The following table
shows the valid device states and valid alternative states.
Device
State
Alternative States
EMP
SBY
DHS
SHS
DDD
RDY
HSP
ONL
RBL
RDY SBY
RDY EMP HSP SHS
EMP HSP SHS
HSP DHS
ONL RBL
EMP HSP SHS SBY
RDY SHS DHS
DDD
DDD ONL
To set or change the physical device state:
1. Select the device from the Main screen of the
Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Select the radio button that indicates the desired
state.
Note
If you set a DDD drive to ONL without performing
a Rebuild (RBL) operation and that drive is part
of a critical (CRT) logical drive, the system might
lose data.
3. Select Set Device State.
Rebuilding a device: When a hard disk drive goes
defunct (DDD), a Rebuild operation is required to
reconstruct the data for the device in its respective disk
112
Netfinity Server HMM
array. The ServeRAID adapters and controllers can
reconstruct RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives,
but they cannot reconstruct data stored in RAID level-0
logical drives. To prevent data integrity problems, the
ServeRAID adapters and controllers set the RAID level-0
logical drives to Blocked during a Rebuild operation. After
the Rebuild operation completes, you can unblock the
RAID level-0 logical drives, and access them once again.
But remember, the logical drive might contain damaged
data. (Refer to “Unblocking logical drives” on page 108 for
more information.)
To perform a Rebuild operation:
1. Select the DDD device on the Main screen of the
Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Select Rebuild Device.
3. Select a RDY drive to use to reconstruct the data, or
click on OK to use the same drive slot and SCSI ID if
you have physically replaced the defunct drive.
4. The reconstruction begins automatically and reports
progress information on the screen.
Notes
1. The ServeRAID adapter or controller can perform
only one Rebuild operation at a time.
2. If the array contains a critical (CRT) logical drive,
the Rebuild operation changes the hard disk
drive state from DDD to RBL. After the Rebuild
operation completes, the hard disk drive state
changes from RBL to ONL. (If you rebuild to a
RDY drive, the DDD drive is removed from the
disk array and becomes a defunct hot-spare
(DHS).)
3. The hard disk drive being rebuilt must be the
same size or larger than the failed drive.
4. If a hot-spare (HSP) drive is available, a Rebuild
operation will start automatically.
5. If multiple hot-spare (HSP) drives are available,
the ServeRAID adapter or controller searches all
the drives on each channel for a hot-spare drive
of the appropriate size. The first appropriate
hot-spare drive found enters the Rebuild (RBL)
state.
Adapter administration:
This section provides instructions for copying the drive
configuration to the ServeRAID adapter or controller,
copying the ServeRAID adapter or controller configuration
to the drives, initializing the adapter or controller
configuration, and scanning for new drives.
Copying the drive configuration to the adapter:
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
113
You can copy the configuration stored on the hard disk
drives to the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
This operation is useful when drives are imported from
other systems.
To copy the configuration:
icon on the Tool Bar or select
1. Select the
Adapter Configuration from the Advanced pull-down
menu. A screen similar to the following appears.
2. Select Copy Drive Configuration to Adapter.
3. Select OK.
Copying the adapter configuration to the
drives:
You can copy the configuration stored for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller to all configured hard disk drives.
To copy the configuration:
1. Select the
icon on the Tool Bar or select
Adapter Configuration from the Advanced pull-down
menu. A screen similar to the following appears.
2. Select Copy Adapter Configuration to Drives.
3. Select OK.
Initializing the adapter:
Initializing the adapter or controller configuration clears all
the logical drives and resets all the functional hard disk
drives to the Ready (RDY) state.
114
Netfinity Server HMM
This operation is useful when you want to start over and
create a new configuration.
To initialize the adapter or controller:
1. Select the
icon on the Tool Bar or select
Adapter Configuration from the Advanced pull-down
menu. A screen similar to the following appears.
2. Select Initialize Adapter Configuration.
Attention
After you initialize the configuration, you will not
have access to any data stored on the logical
drives attached to the selected ServeRAID
adapter or controller.
This choice deletes the existing configuration
information, sets all functional hard disk drives
attached to the controller to the Ready state, and
deletes all logical drives defined for the controller.
This choice does not change any of the ServeRAID
adapter or controller settings (such as the stripe-unit
size, rebuild rate, and so on) from their current or
customized values.
3. Select OK.
Scanning for new drives: You can scan for new
devices attached to the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
icon on the Tool
To scan for new drives, select the
Bar or select Scan For New Drives from the Advanced
pull-down menu.
ServeRAID monitoring functions
This section contains instructions for using the
Administration and Monitoring Program to monitor the
ServeRAID adapter and controller status information, event
logs, logical drive information, and physical device
information.
Monitoring adapter status information:
A green or red light on the screen indicates the currently
active adapter button. (Green indicates that the
ServeRAID adapter or controller is responding and red
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
115
indicates that it is not responding.) If there is more than
one ServeRAID adapter or controller in the system,
selectce on the appropriate adapter or controller to make it
active.
You can then monitor the status by clicking on the active
adapter button on the Main screen of the Administration
and Monitoring Program.
Note
You might need to use the scroll bar and scroll down
to see all of the items that appear on this screen.
Descriptions of the information that appears on the screen
are as follows:
Adapter Number
The active adapter or controller (1
to 8).
Number of Logical Drives The number of defined logical
drives (0 to 8).
Unattended Mode
Off - The user chooses the
recovery method when there is a
ServeRAID startup error.
On - The adapter or controller
chooses the recovery method when
there is a ServeRAID startup error.
Code Block Version The current version number of the
firmware loaded on the adapter or
controller.
Boot Block Version The current version number of the
bootable microcode loaded on the
adapter or controller.
Concurrent Commands The maximum number of
concurrent commands supported.
Maximum Devices Supported The maximum number of
devices supported.
Flash Program Count The current number of times the
flash EEPROM has been written.
Defunct Disk Count The current number of defunct hard
disk drives.
Rebuild Rate
The current setting (Low, Medium,
or High) of the rebuild rate.
Hot-Swap Rebuild
The current state (Enabled or
Disabled) of the hot-swap rebuild
feature.
Offline Logical Drive Count The current number of offline
logical drives.
Configuration Update Count The number of times that
the ServeRAID configuration has
been updated.
NVRAM Battery Backup Device The current state of the
battery-backup cache (installed, not
installed, or defective).
116
Netfinity Server HMM
Monitoring the device event logs:
The ServeRAID adapters and controllers store information
concerning various events in the event logs. There are
four types of event logs: a device event log, a hard event
log, a soft event log, and a configuration event log. (See
“ServeRAID Configuration Program” on page 70 and
“ServeRAID Mini-Configuration Program” on page 94 for
information about the configuration event log.)
To view the hard, soft, or device event logs:
1. Select the adapter on the Main screen of the
Administration and Monitoring Program.
2. Select an event log button from the bottom of the
screen.
The Device Event Log contains event counters for each
attached physical device, as follows:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Parity Event - The ServeRAID adapter or controller
detected a parity event while transferring data on the
SCSI bus. A large number of parity events might
indicate a problem with the SCSI cable, connectors,
or terminators on the SCSI channel.
Soft Event - These events are detected by the SCSI
device and reported to the ServeRAID adapter or
controller through the SCSI Check Condition status.
Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) - The device has
signaled the adapter or controller that it might fail in
the near future.
Hard Event - These events are detected by the
ServeRAID adapter or controller. The most likely
cause of a hard event is a problem with the SCSI
cabling, termination, or adapter seating. If one of
these is not the problem, replace the controller.
Misc Event - These miscellaneous events are
detected by the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
These events do not include parity, soft, PFA, or hard
events. The most likely cause of a miscellaneous
event is a cable, termination, or connector problem.
Note
Under normal operating conditions, the event logs will
contain entries that are not errors.
Monitoring the logical drive information:
You can monitor the logical drive information by clicking on
the desired logical drive button on the Main screen of the
Administration and Monitoring Program.
Descriptions of the information that appears on the Logical
Drive Information screen are as follows:
Logical Drive Number The number of the logical drive.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
117
Blocked
No - The logical drive is accessible.
Yes - The logical drive is not
accessible.
Part of Array
The identifier of the logical drive
disk array (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H).
Part of Merge Group The identifier of the logical drive
merge group (1 through 254).
Date Created
The date the logical drive was
created.
State
The current state (see “Logical
drive state descriptions” on
page 82 for more information).
Size
The size in megabytes.
RAID Level
RAID level (0, 1, or 5).
Write Policy
WT - Write-through.
WB - Write-back.
NVRAM Battery Backup Enable - The battery-backup
cache is On.
Read Ahead
Stripe-Unit Size
Number of Chunks
Stripe Order
Disable - The battery-backup
cache is Off.
Off - Disk Read-Ahead is inactive.
On - Disk Read-Ahead is active.
The size of each stripe unit per
hard disk (8, 16, 32, 64).
The number of hard disk drives that
make up the logical drive.
The channel and SCSI ID of the
physical drives that make up the
logical drive.
Monitoring the physical device
information:
You can monitor the physical device information by clicking
on the desired device button on the Main screen of the
Administration and Monitoring Program.
Descriptions of the fields that might appear on the Device
Management screen are as follows.
Note
The number of fields that appear on the Device
Management screen depend on the physical device
selected.
Channel
SCSI ID
Vendor
Serial Number
Size
118
The channel to which the device is
connected (1, 2, or 3).
The SCSI ID (0 to 15).
The manufacturer of the physical
device.
The manufacturer identifier.
The size in megabytes.
Netfinity Server HMM
State
Soft Event
Hard Event
Misc Event
Parity Event
PFA Event
The current state (see “Physical drive
state descriptions” on page 83 and
“Logical drive state descriptions” on
page 82 more information).
The number of soft events reported
from the device event log.
The number of hard events reported
from the device event log.
The number of miscellaneous events
reported from the device event log.
The number of parity events reported
from the device event log.
Yes - device indicates predictive
failure analysis event.
No - device does not indicate
predictive failure analysis error.
ServeRAID IPSSEND program (starting)
You can run the IPSSEND program from the operating
system command line.
To start the IPSSEND program:
Ÿ
If you are using OS/2 or Windows NT:
1. Type:
c:\ipsadm\ipssend
2. Press Enter.
Note
The c represents the drive where OS/2 or
Windows NT is installed.
Ÿ
If you are using NetWare:
1. From the console, type:
load ipssend
Ÿ
2. Press Enter.
If you are using DOS:
1. Insert the bootable IPSSEND diskette that you
created into diskette drive A; then, type:
a:\ipssend
Ÿ
2. Press Enter.
If you are using OpenServer or UnixWare:
1. Type:
/usr/bin/ipssend
2. Press Enter.
ServeRAID IPSSEND program (using)
When you run the IPSSEND program with no
command-line parameters, a list of available functions and
their specific parameters appears. All functions require a
minimum set of parameters to run the command. If you
run the IPSSEND program with a specific function but
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
119
without its required parameters, specific help for that
function will appear on the monitor.
There are four basic types of IPSSEND commands:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Server roll-out commands
Error-recovery commands
Problem-isolation and debug commands
RAID configuration commands
ServeRAID server roll-out commands:
The IPSSEND server roll-out commands include the
following:
BACKUP
Use the BACKUP command to save a
ServeRAID adapter or controller configuration
to a diskette or to a hard disk drive. The
ServeRAID adapter or controller configuration
must be valid.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, DOS, OpenServer, and
UnixWare.
Command:
IPSSEND BACKUP Controller Filename Oparm
COPYLD
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Filename with the path and file name
where the configuration is to be written
Ÿ Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
Use the COPYLD command to copy a source
logical drive to a target logical drive. The
size of the target logical drive must be
greater than or equal to the size of the
source logical drive.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND COPYLD Controller Source Target
Oparm
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Source with the source logical drive
number
Ÿ Target with the target logical drive
number
Ÿ Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
120
Netfinity Server HMM
RESTORE
Use the RESTORE command to load a
configuration from a file stored on a diskette
or a hard disk drive. The configuration must
be a valid configuration file from the BACKUP
option on the IBM ServeRAID DOS
Configuration Utility Program Diskette or
IPSSEND. This operation overwrites the
existing configuration information stored for
the ServeRAID adapter or controller.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND RESTORE Controller Filename Oparm
INIT
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Filename with the path and file name
where the configuration is to be written
Ÿ Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
Use the INIT command to initialize the first
0.5 MB of a logical drive. This process will
erase the partition tables on the drive, and all
data on the logical drive will be lost.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND INIT Controller DriveNum Oparm
INITSYNC
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ DriveNum with the logical drive number
(0 to 7)
Ÿ Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
Use the INITSYNC command to initialize and
synchronize a logical drive at the same time.
This command works only on RAID level-1
and level-5 logical drives. The command will
erase the entire logical drive, and all data on
the logical drive will be lost.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND INITSYNC Controller DriveNum
Oparm
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
121
SYNCH
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ DriveNum with the logical drive number
(0 to 7)
Ÿ Oparm with the optional parameter,
NOPROMPT, to override the user
prompt
Use the SYNCH command to synchronize the
parity information on redundant logical drives.
If the parity information is inconsistent, the
IPSSEND program will repair it automatically.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND SYNCH Controller Scope DriveNum
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Scope with Drive for a single logical
drive
Ÿ DriveNum with the logical drive number
(0 to 7)
ServeRAID error-recovery commands:
The IPSSEND error-recovery commands include the
following:
GETSTATUS Use the GETSTATUS command to display
the current logical-drive status for the most
recent rebuild, synchronization, or
logical-drive migration. The status includes
such information as the remaining size of the
logical drive, the percentage completed for
the function in process, or information about
the most recently completed logical-drive
function.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND GETSTATUS Controller
REBUILD
122
Replace:
Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Use the REBUILD command to rebuild a
designated disk drive. This command is valid
for disk arrays that contain one or more
logical drives that are in the critical (CRT)
state. Progress is indicated during the
rebuild operation, but you can also use the
Netfinity Server HMM
GETSTATUS command to obtain progress
information about the rebuild.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND REBUILD Controller DCh DSID NCh
NSID
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ DCh with the channel number for the
Defunct drive (1 to 3)
Ÿ DSID with the SCSI ID for the Defunct
Drive
(0 to 15)
Ÿ NCh with the channel number for the
New Drive (1 to 3)
Ÿ NSID with the SCSI ID for the New
Drive
(0 to 15)
SETSTATE Use the SETSTATE command to change the
state of a physical device from its current
state to a new state.
Attention
You must be very careful when you use
this command. For example, you might
lose data if you reset a Defunct (DDD)
device to Online (ONL) without first
performing a Rebuild operation.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND SETSTATE Controller Channel SID
NState
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Channel with the channel number for the
drive (1 to 3)
Ÿ SID with the SCSI ID for the drive (0 to
15)
Ÿ NState with the new state for the drive.
Valid states are: EMP for Empty, RDY
for Ready, HSP for Hot Spare, SHS for
Standby Hot Spare, DDD for Defunct
Disk Drive, DHS for Defunct Hot Spare,
RBL for Rebuild, SBY for Standby, and
ONL for Online. (See “Setting physical
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
123
UNBLOCK
device states” on page 112 for more
information.)
Use the UNBLOCK command to gain access
to a blocked logical drive. RAID level-0
logical drives become blocked if they are in
an array that contains RAID level-1 or level-5
logical drives and the array is being rebuilt.
Because the RAID level-0 logical drives
cannot be rebuilt, the data stored on the
RAID level-0 logical drives is damaged and
should not be accessed. After you issue the
UNBLOCK command, you must re-create or
restore the data previously stored on the
RAID level-0 logical drives.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND UNBLOCK Controller DriveNum
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ DriveNum with the logical drive number
(0 to 7)
ServeRAID problem-isolation and debug
commands:
The IPSSEND problem-isolation and debug commands
include the following:
CERTIFY
Use the CERTIFY command to verify the
media of a hard disk drive. If the program
finds a media error, it reassigns the sectors.
A summary of reassignments and PFA errors
appears upon completion of the verification.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND CERTIFY Controller Channel SID
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Channel with the channel number for the
device (1, 2, or 3)
Ÿ SID with the SCSI ID for the device (0 to
15)
ERASEEVENT Use the ERASEEVENT command to clear
all logged entries in the designated event log.
See GETEVENT help for information about
the contents of the Device Event Log and the
Adapter Soft and Hard Event Logs.
124
Netfinity Server HMM
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
O/S2, Netware, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND ERASEEVENT Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Options with one of the following:
– DEVICE for the Device Event Log
– SOFT for the ServeRAID adapter
or controller Soft Event Log
– HARD for the ServeRAID adapter
or controller Hard Event Log
FMSTATUS Use the FMSTATUS command to display the
progress of a format operation currently
processing.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND FMSTATUS Controller Channel SID
FORMAT
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Channel with the channel number for the
device (1, 2, or 3)
Ÿ SID with the SCSI ID for the device (0 to
15)
Use the FORMAT command to perform a
low-level format of a hard disk drive.
Attention
When you issue this command, all data
on the drive will be lost.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND FORMAT Controller Channel SID
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Channel with the channel number for the
device (1, 2, or 3)
Ÿ SID with the SCSI ID for the device (0 to
15)
GETEVENT Use the GETEVENT command to display
information about various unexpected events.
IBM uses the Soft and Hard Event Logs for
development and debugging purposes only.
The Device Event Log contains event
counters for each attached physical device.
These counters include:
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
125
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Parity: An unexpected event while
transferring data on the SCSI bus. This
usually indicates a problem with the
SCSI cable, connectors, or terminators.
Soft: A SCSI device detected a check
condition event.
Hard: The SCSI controller detected an
unexpected event. The controller is the
most likely cause.
Misc: The ServeRAID adapter or
controller detected an event that was
most likely caused by the device.
The Device Event Log also provides
predictive failure analysis (PFA) alerts, which
indicate that the device has signaled the
ServeRAID adapter or controller that it might
fail in the near future.
Supported Operating Systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND GETEVENT Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Options with one of the following:
DEVICE for Device Event Log, SOFT for
the ServeRAID adapter or controller Soft
Event Log, or HARD for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller Hard Event Log.
SELFTEST The SELFTEST command is used to direct
an adapter or a device to perform its self-test.
Supported operating systems: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND SELFTEST Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Options with AD for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller self-test or PD
Channel SID for the Device self-test.
Note
Channel represents the drive
channel and SID represents the
SCSI ID for the device.
STARTDELY Use the STARTDELY command to set the
number of drives in a group to start up
simultaneously and to set the delay in
seconds between the startup of these groups
of drives.
126
Netfinity Server HMM
Supported operating systems: DOS
Command:
IPSSEND STARTDELY Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Options with a question mark (?) to
display concurrent drive startup count:
Drive Count (1 to 16) and Delay Time (3
to 15 seconds).
RAID configuration commands:
The IPSSEND RAID configuration commands include the
following:
DRIVEVER Use the DRIVEVER command to display the
vendor ID, microcode version, and serial
number of a SCSI device. The IPSSEND
program retrieves this information directly
from the device.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND DRIVEVER Controller Channel SID
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Channel with the channel number for the
device (1, 2, or 3)
Ÿ SID with the SCSI ID for the device (0 to
15)
GETCONFIG Use the GETCONFIG command to display
the ServeRAID adapter or controller
configuration information. This includes
information about the firmware version;
initiator ID and rebuild rate; logical drive
status, RAID level, and size; and physical
device type, SCSI ID, and PFA error.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND GETCONFIG Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Options with one of the following: AD
for adapter or controller information, LD
for logical drive information, PD for
physical device information, AL (default)
for all information.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
127
HSREBUILD Use the HSREBUILD command to set the
ServeRAID adapter or controller hot-swap
rebuild feature on. Use a question mark (?)
to display the current status of the hot-swap
rebuild feature.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT,
OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, UnixWare, and
DOS
Command:
IPSSEND HSREBUILD Controller Options
Replace:
Ÿ Controller with the ServeRAID controller
number (1 to 8)
Ÿ Options with ON to enable the hot-swap
rebuild feature, or ? to display the status
of the hot-swap rebuild feature.
ServeRAID IPSMON program (starting)
You can run the IPSMON program from the operating
system command line.
To start the IPSMON program:
Ÿ
If you are using OS/2 or Windows NT:
1. Type:
c:\ipsadm\ipsmon
2. Press Enter.
Note
The c represents the drive where OS/2 or
Windows NT is installed.
Ÿ
If you are using Novell NetWare:
1. From the console, type:
load ipsmon
Ÿ
2. Press Enter.
If you are using SCO OpenServer or UnixWare:
1. Type:
/usr/bin/ipsmon
2. Press Enter.
ServeRAID IPSMON program (using)
When you start this monitoring program, it immediately
begins polling all ServeRAID adapters and controllers for
specific conditions. If a condition being monitored is found,
this program logs a message to the monitor, to a file, or to
both the monitor and a file.
The IPSMON program uses command-line parameters to
determine where to log the messages. If you need help,
you can type the IPSMON -? command for a list of valid
parameters.
128
Netfinity Server HMM
If you start this program without any command-line
parameters, the IPSMON program will log the messages to
the IPSMON.LOG file, and the messages will not appear
on the monitor.
The valid parameters for IPSMON are:
Ÿ
-f:filename
Ÿ
Use the -f parameter to specify the name of the file in
which to record messages. The default file name is
IPSMON.LOG.
-s
Ÿ
Use the -s parameter to display messages on the
standard output (usually the monitor).
-?
Use the -? parameter to obtain a current list of valid
parameters.
After you start the IPSMON program, the program will
continuously poll the ServeRAID adapters and controllers
until you take one of the following actions:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are using Windows NT or OS/2, press Ctrl+C.
If you are using NetWare, type: unload ipsmon at the
system console.
If you are using OpenServer or UnixWare, press the
Del key to cancel the program.
During operation, the program will log various messages.
Each message will contain an alert code and a location
specifier.
Ÿ
Ÿ
The alert code begins with the message type and
number. For example, INF, WRN, or CRT, followed
by the message number.
After the alert code comes the location specifier:
A specifies the adapter or controller number
SID specifies the SCSI ID (if required)
C specifies the channel number (if required)
For example, a message of CRTxxx:A2C3SID04 signifies
that a Critical condition (CRTxxx) was found on Adapter 2
(A2), Channel 3 (C3), SCSI ID 4 (SID04).
The IPSMON program can log the following messages,
based on the required condition.
Information Messages:
<Date and Time> INF000:A1C-SID
-- no errors detected
<Date and Time> INF001:A1C-SID
-- rebuild started
<Date and Time> INF002:A1C-SID
-- rebuild completed
<Date and Time> INF003:A1C-SID
-- synchronization started
<Date and Time> INF004:A1C-SID
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
129
-- synchronization completed
<Date and Time> INF005:A1C-SID
-- migration started
<Date and Time> INF006:A1C-SID
-- migration completed
Warning Messages:
<Date and Time> WRN001:A2C3SID12
-- PFA Error detected
Critical Messages:
<Date and Time> CRT001:A3C2SID04
-- dead drive detected
<Date and Time> CRT002:A1C-SID
-- not responding to commands
ServeRAID device drivers and utility
programs (installation)
This chapter provides information about the device drivers
and utility programs available for the IBM ServeRAID
adapters and controllers.
IBM ServeRAID utility programs:
This section contains information about the device drivers
and utility programs available for the ServeRAID adapters
and controllers.
Obtaining ServeRAID updates: IBM periodically
makes updated versions of the ServeRAID device drivers
and utility programs available from the IBM Support page
on the World Wide Web. In addition to the updated device
drivers and utility programs, there are also two ServeRAID
command-line programs, IPSSEND and IPSMON,
available from the World Wide Web. These programs are
both on the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette.
You can download the most current versions of the
ServeRAID device drivers and utility programs or a copy of
the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs Diskette
from the following address on the World Wide Web:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support
From the IBM Support page:
1. Select IBM Server Support; then, select Server
Options from the Family menu.
2. Select Downloadable Files; then, select ServeRAID.
Administration and Monitoring Program
The IBM ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program monitors the ServeRAID adapters and controllers
while the network operating system is up and running.
130
Netfinity Server HMM
This section provides information about the IBM
ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Program files for
the ServeRAID adapters and controllers. You can use
these files with the Windows NT, Windows 95, OS/2,
Novell NetWare, SCO OpenServer, and SCO UnixWare
operating systems.
ServeRAID programs for Windows NT
and Windows 95
The ServeRAID program files available for Windows NT
consist of the ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program, device drivers, background-server components,
and the IPSSEND and IPSMON command-line programs.
(See “IPSSEND and IPSMON programs” on page 154 for
more information.)
The IBM ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program for Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 95 is
called the WIN32-Based program. This program provides
a graphical interface that enables you to monitor
ServeRAID configuration changes being performed on the
server while the server is fully operational. You can create
an array, delete an array, create a logical drive, change
the RAID level, dynamically increase the logical drive size,
rebuild an array, and perform other basic ServeRAID
configuration functions.
You can run the WIN32-Based program in the stand-alone
mode only on a Windows NT server. Or, you can run the
WIN32-Based program remotely on a Windows NT or
Windows 95 client and access the client from a server that
has TCP/IP, a background-server component (see
“ServeRAID background-server components”), and one of
the following operating systems installed:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Microsoft Windows NT
IBM OS/2 Warp Server and OS/2 LAN Server
Novell NetWare 3.12 and 4.1X
SCO UnixWare 7.0
SCO OpenServer 5.0.X
ServeRAID background-server
components
The background-server components are
operating-system-specific program files that enable servers
running Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, OpenServer, or
UnixWare to act as the TCP/IP interface for a remote client
that has the WIN32-Based program installed. These files
install automatically when you use the instructions in this
chapter to install the ServeRAID operating-system-specific
device drivers.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
131
Notes
1. Only one remote session at a time can access
ServeRAID adapters and controllers using the
background-server component.
2. It is possible to run multiple background-server
components with each component using a
different TCP/IP port; however, to avoid damage
to data, you must restrict administration activities
to one remote client and use the other remote
clients for monitoring purposes only.
ServeRAID programs for OS/2 and
NetWare
The ServeRAID program files available for the OS/2 and
NetWare operating systems consist of the Administration
and Monitoring program, device drivers, background-server
components, and the IPSSEND and IPSMON
command-line programs. (See “IPSSEND and IPSMON
programs” on page 154 for more information.)
The Administration and Monitoring Program files for OS/2
and NetWare run only on the system containing a
ServeRAID adapter or controller (stand-alone mode).
These ServeRAID programs provide a limited subset of the
functions provided in the WIN32-Based program, and they
install automatically when you use the instructions in this
chapter to install the ServeRAID device driver for OS/2 or
NetWare.
A good way to use these operating-system-specific
programs is to run the OS/2 or NetWare versions of the
Administration and Monitoring Program files locally on the
server, while using the WIN32-Based program on a remote
Windows NT or Windows 95 client. This method enables
you to take advantage of the more advanced
administration and monitoring functions provided in the
WIN32-Based program.
ServerRAID programs for OpenServer
and UnixWare
The ServeRAID program files available for OpenServer
and UnixWare consist of device drivers, background-server
components, and the IPSSEND and IPSMON
command-line programs. (See “IPSSEND and IPSMON
programs” on page 154 for more information.)
The background-server components for SCO operating
systems install automatically when you use the instructions
in this chapter to install the ServeRAID OpenServer or
UnixWare device drivers.
To use the ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program with a SCO operating system, you must first
install the WIN32-Based program on a Windows NT or
132
Netfinity Server HMM
Windows 95 client. Then, attach the Windows NT or
Windows 95 client to the same network as the OpenServer
or UnixWare system that contains the ServeRAID adapter
or controller. You must perform all administration functions
from the remote WIN32-Based client.
Installing the ServeRAID WIN32-based
program
This section provides instructions for installing the
ServeRAID WIN32-Based program.
Before you begin the installation.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Be sure that the ServeRAID adapter or controller is
physically installed, properly cabled, and configured.
Be sure that the network operating system is installed
and functional.
If the network operating system is Windows NT, you
can use the ServeRAID WIN32-Based program
remotely in the client/server mode or locally in
stand-alone mode.
The ServeRAID adapters and controllers do not
support Windows 95. However, you can run the
WIN32-Based program remotely on a Windows 95
client attached to a remote server running the OS/2,
NetWare, Windows NT, UnixWare, or OpenServer
operating system. Use the instructions in this section
to install the WIN32-Based program on the Windows
95 client.
If the network operating system is OS/2, NetWare,
OpenServer, or UnixWare, you must run the
ServeRAID WIN32-Based program remotely, in the
client/server mode.
Other requirements for this environment include:
– A Windows NT or Windows 95 client running the
IBM ServeRAID WIN32-Based program
–
–
–
Use the instructions in this section to install the
WIN32-Based program.
A network adapter with proper cabling for access
to the remote systems
The TCP/IP networking protocol installed on both
the local and remote systems
The ServeRAID device driver and
background-server component installed on the
remote system
Refer to “Installing ServeRAID device drivers” on
page 134 for more information.
If you are using Windows NT, use the installation
instructions and ServerGuide CDs provided with the server
to install the Administration and Monitoring program. If you
want to install the program on a remote Windows 95 client,
use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an IBM
ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Diskette; then,
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
133
use the instructions in this section to install the
Administration and Monitoring program.
To install the ServeRAID WIN32-Based program:
1. Turn on the system and allow Windows NT or
Windows 95 to start.
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Diskette into the diskette drive.
3. Select Start, select Run; then, type the following:
a:\setup
Note
The a represents the letter assignment for the
diskette drive.
4. Press Enter; then, follow the instructions that appear
on the screen to complete the installation.
Refer to “Starting the ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program” on page 98 for more information
about the WIN32-Based program.
Installing ServeRAID device drivers
This section provides the instructions for installing the
device drivers for Windows NT, NetWare, OS/2,
OpenServer, and UnixWare. The OS/2 and NetWare
Administration and Monitoring Program files and
background-server components install automatically when
you use the instructions in this section to install the
ServeRAID device drivers for OS/2 and NetWare. The
Windows NT, UnixWare, and OpenServer
background-server components install automatically when
you use the instructions in this chapter to install the
ServeRAID device drivers for Windows NT, UnixWare, and
OpenServer.
When using:
Windows NT
NetWare
OS/2
OpenServer
UnixWare
Go to:
“Installing ServerRAID device drivers for
Windows NT”
“Installing ServeRAID device drivers for
NetWare” on page 136
“Installing ServerRAID device drivers for
OS/2” on page 140
“Installing ServerRAID device drivers for
OpenServer” on page 143
“Installing ServeRAID device drivers for
UnixWare” on page 146
Installing ServerRAID device drivers for
Windows NT:
This section provides two sets of instructions for installing
the ServeRAID device driver: one that you can use during
the initial Windows NT installation and one that you can
use if Windows NT already is installed.
134
Netfinity Server HMM
The background-server components for Windows NT 3.5X
and Windows NT 4.0 install automatically when you use
the instructions in this chapter to install the ServeRAID
device drivers.
Installing the files while installing Windows NT:
To install the ServeRAID files while installing Windows NT:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Insert the Windows NT boot diskette into the diskette
drive or insert the bootable Windows NT CD into the
CD-ROM drive; then, restart the server.
3. When the message Setup is inspecting the
computer's hardware configuration... appears,
press the F6 key.
4. After loading some files, Windows NT displays a
screen that allows you to manually specify an
adapter. When this screen appears, press S to
specify additional devices.
5. When prompted in the next window, select Other
from the list.
6. When prompted to insert the
Manufacturer-supplied-hardware support disk,
insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into
the diskette drive; then, press Enter.
7. Select IBM ServeRAID Adapter; then, press Enter.
A message similar to the following will appear. Setup
is loading files (IBM ServeRAID Adapter)....
8. When prompted, press Enter to continue.
9. Use the instructions provided in the Windows NT
manual to complete the normal installation process.
10. After you complete the installation, be sure to apply
the latest Service Pack.
Installing the files after installing Windows NT:
To install the ServeRAID files after Installing Windows NT:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into
the diskette drive.
3. From the Windows NT Start Menu, select Settings;
then, select Control Panel.
4. Select SCSI Adapter; then, select the Drivers tab.
5. Select Add; then, select Have Disk.
6. In the Copy manufacturer's files from field, type:
a:\nt
7. Select OK; then in the next dialog box, select OK
again.
8. When a message appears asking if you want to use
the currently installed device driver or if you want to
install a new one, select New.
9. When prompted to enter the full path to the IBM
ServeRAID files, type:
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
135
a:\nt
10. Select Continue; then after the device driver installs,
restart the system.
Installing ServeRAID device drivers for
NetWare:
This section provides instructions for installing the
ServeRAID device drivers while installing NetWare 3.12 or
4.1X, and instructions for installing the ServeRAID device
drivers if NetWare 3.12 or 4.1X already is installed.
The Administration and Monitoring Program files and the
background-server components for NetWare install
automatically when you use the instructions in this chapter
to install the ServeRAID device drivers for NetWare.
Installing the files while installing NetWare 3.12:
The ServeRAID device driver for NetWare, IPSRAID.HAM,
is in the NetWare directory on the IBM ServeRAID Device
Driver Diskette. You can use the INSTALL.BAT file, which
is also in the NetWare directory on the diskette, to copy all
required files to the server directory. The INSTALL.BAT
file will modify the STARTUP.NCF file so that it will load
the required NetWare modules.
Use the instructions provided in the NetWare 3.12 manual
along with the following instructions to install the
ServeRAID device driver, background-server component,
and Administration and Monitoring Program files while
installing NetWare, Version 3.12.
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. After you create the diskette, type the following at the
command prompt to manually create the directory for
NetWare:
md server.312
Note
The SERVER.312 is the default NetWare 3.12
directory. If you are using a different path, be
sure to specify the same path throughout the
entire NetWare installation process.
3. Press Enter.
4. Change to the SERVER.312 directory on the hard
disk; then, insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver
Diskette into the diskette drive.
5. At the operating system prompt, type:
a:
136
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
The a represents the drive assignment for the
diskette drive that contains the ServeRAID
diskette.
6. Press Enter. Then, type:
cd netware
7. Press Enter. Then, type:
install
8. Press Enter. Then, follow the instructions that
appear on the screen to complete the ServeRAID
device driver and program installation.
Installing the files after installing NetWare 3.12:
The ServeRAID device driver for NetWare, IPSRAID.HAM,
is in the NetWare directory on the IBM ServeRAID Device
Driver Diskette. You can use the INSTALL.BAT file, which
is also in the NetWare directory on the diskette, to copy all
of the required files to the server directory. The
INSTALL.BAT file will modify the STARTUP.NCF file so
that it will load the required NetWare modules.
Use the instructions provided in the NetWare 3.12 manual
along with the following instructions to install the
ServeRAID device driver, background-server component,
and Administration and Monitoring Program files after
installing NetWare, Version 3.12.
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into
the diskette drive.
3. Go to the default NetWare 3.12 directory. To do this,
type:
cd\server.312
Note
The SERVER.312 is the default NetWare 3.12
directory. If you are using a different path, be
sure to specify the same path throughout the
installation process.
4. Press Enter; then, from the operating system prompt
in the SERVER.312 directory, type:
a:
Note
The a represents the drive assignment for the
diskette drive that contains the ServeRAID
diskette.
5. Press Enter. Then, type:
cd netware
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
137
6. Press Enter. Then, type:
install
7. Press Enter. Then, follow the instructions that
appear on the screen to complete the ServeRAID
device driver and program installation.
Installing the files while installing NetWare
4.1X: Use the instructions provided in the NetWare 4.1X
manual along with the following instructions to install the
ServeRAID device driver, background-server component,
and Administration and Monitoring Program files while
installing NetWare, Version 4.1X.
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Use the instructions provided in the NetWare manual
to begin the installation.
3. When the Choose the Server Drivers - Disk Driver
prompt appears during the install process, insert the
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into the
diskette drive.
4. Select Select additional or modify selected
Disk/LAN drivers.
5. If IPSRAID appears, select Deselect a selected
driver.
6. Select Select an additional driver; then, press the
Ins (Insert) key to add an unlisted new device driver.
7. Press F3 to specify a path; then, type:
a:\netware
Note
The a represents the drive assignment for the
diskette drive that contains the ServeRAID
diskette.
8. Select IPSRAID.HAM from the list of device drivers
that appears in the window; then, press Enter.
Note
The IPSRAID.HAM and support files will be
copied to the system volume.
9. Select OK to overwrite the existing files.
10. Follow the instructions in the NetWare manual to
complete the installation.
Installing the files after installing NetWare 4.1X
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. From the system console, start the NetWare
installation utility program by typing:
load install
3. Press Enter.
138
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette into
the diskette drive.
5. Select Driver options from the Installation Options
list.
6. Select Configure disk and storage from the Driver
Options pop-up window.
7. Select Select an additional driver from the
Additional Drivers Actions pop-up window.
8. When the next screen appears, press the Ins key to
install an unlisted driver.
9. When the next screen appears, press the F3 key to
specify a different path.
10. In the Specify a directory path field, type:
a:\netware
11. When prompted to select a driver to install, select
IPSRAID.HAM.
12. Select Yes when prompted to copy the IPSRAID.HAM
driver.
13. When the prompt appears to specify the server boot
path, type:
c:\nwserver
Notes
1. This instruction assumes that you installed
NetWare in its default directory. If you did
not install NetWare in the NWSERVER
directory on drive C, modify step 13
accordingly.
2. If any of the files you are installing already
exist on the server, NetWare will prompt you
to save the older files. Although it is not
necessary to save the older files, it usually
is a good idea.
14. After the installation program copies all files, you can
edit parameters (such as the ServeRAID slot number)
from the Driver IPSRAID Parameter Actions screen.
15. After you edit the parameters, select Save
Parameters and load driver to load the ServeRAID
device driver.
16. Press Esc to exit the installation screens.
Note
If you want NetWare to load the ServeRAID device
driver automatically during startup, you must add the
appropriate LOAD command (for example, load
ipsraid.ham slot=1) to the NetWare startup command
file (usually C:\NWSERVER\STARTUP.NCF).
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
139
Installing ServerRAID device drivers for
OS/2:
This section provides two sets of instructions for installing
the ServeRAID device driver: one that you can use during
the initial OS/2 installation and one that you can use if
OS/2 already is installed.
The ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Program
files and background-server component for OS/2 install
automatically when you use the instructions in this chapter
to install the ServeRAID device driver for OS/2.
Installing the files while installing OS/2: You can
use the following instructions to install the ServeRAID
device driver and Administration and Monitoring Program
files while installing OS/2 Warp Server.
Note
If you install these files on a logical drive that has its
write policy set to the write-back mode, wait at least
10 seconds after being prompted to press
Ctrl+Alt+Del before you actually press the keys.
Waiting 10 seconds or longer gives the ServeRAID
adapter or controller the time needed to flush all
dirty-cache pages out to the hard disk.
To install the ServeRAID files while installing OS/2:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. Make a copy of the OS/2 Warp Diskette 1 and label it
Copy of OS/2 Diskette 1.
3. Copy the IPSRAID.ADD file from the OS2 directory
on the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette to the
Copy of OS/2 Diskette 1.
If there is not enough space, delete files not needed
in the installation (such as proprietary CD-ROM or
SCSI device drivers). Make sure you remove all
entries referring to any device drivers you delete from
the CONFIG.SYS file.
4. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the Copy of OS/2
Diskette 1 to add the following lines:
BASEDEV=IPSRAID.ADD
SET COPYFROMFLOPPY=1
5. Install OS/2, but when prompted to insert diskette 1,
use the updated Copy of OS/2 Diskette 1.
6. After you complete the OS/2 installation, insert the
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
7. From an OS/2 window, type:
a:
140
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
The a represents the drive assignment for the
diskette drive that contains the ServeRAID
diskette.
8. Press Enter. Then, type:
ddinstal
9. Press Enter.
The OS/2 Device Driver Installation window will
appear and prompt you for the source and destination
drives. The source directory shows where to insert
the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette. The
destination directory shows where the program will
copy the device driver files.
10. Select Install.
Ÿ The program copies the following ServeRAID
device driver and program files to the OS/2
subdirectory on the hard disk: IPSRAID.ADD,
IPSADM.EXE, and IPSRADM.EXE.
Ÿ The program copies the ServeRAID
IPSRADM.HLP Help file to the \OS2\HELP
directory.
11. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file and verify that there is only
one copy of the line BASEDEV=IPSRAID.ADD.
Notes
1. If you have more than one ServeRAID or
SCSI adapter in the system, make sure that
the BASEDEV statement for the adapter
controlling the startup (boot) device appears
before the BASEDEV statements for other
ServeRAID or SCSI adapters in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
2. After you install any service packs, check
the path for the IPSRAID.ADD device driver
and verify that the correct device driver is
installed.
12. Restart the server.
Installing the files after installing OS/2: You can
use the following instructions to install the ServeRAID
device driver and Administration and Monitoring Program
files after installing OS/2 Warp Server.
To install the ServeRAID files after installing OS/2:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
2. After you complete the OS/2 installation, insert the
IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
3. From an OS/2 window, type:
a:
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
141
Notes
1. The a represents the drive assignment for
the diskette drive that contains the
ServeRAID diskette.
2. If you install these files on a logical drive
that has its write policy set to the write-back
mode, wait at least 10 seconds after being
prompted to press Ctrl+Alt+Del before you
actually press the keys. Waiting 10 seconds
or longer gives the ServeRAID adapter or
controller the time needed to flush all
dirty-cache pages out to the hard disk.
4. Press Enter. Then, type:
ddinstal
5. Press Enter.
The OS/2 Device Driver Installation window will
appear and prompt you for the source and destination
drives. The source directory shows where to insert
the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette. The
destination directory shows where the program will
copy the device driver files.
6. Select Install.
Ÿ The program copies the following ServeRAID
device driver statement to the CONFIG.SYS file:
BASEDEV=IPSRAID.ADD
Ÿ The program copies the following ServeRAID
device driver and program files to the OS/2
subdirectory on the hard disk: IPSRAID.ADD,
IPSADM.EXE, and IPSRADM.EXE
Ÿ The program copies the following ServeRAID
Help file to the \OS2\HELP directory:
IPSRADM.HLP
7. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file and verify that there is only
one copy of the line BASEDEV=IPSRAID.ADD.
Notes
1. If you have more than one ServeRAID or
SCSI adapter in the system, make sure that
the BASEDEV statement for the adapter
controlling the startup (boot) device appears
before the BASEDEV statements for other
ServeRAID or SCSI adapters in the
CONFIG.SYS file.
2. After you install any service packs, check
the path for the IPSRAID.ADD device driver
and verify that the correct device driver is
installed.
8. Restart the server.
142
Netfinity Server HMM
Starting the Administration and Monitoring
Program: To start the ServeRAID Administration and
Monitoring Program for OS/2:
1. Go to the OS/2 subdirectory on the hard disk drive;
then, type:
ipsradm /lf=d:\path\logfile
Notes
1. Make sure that the path you type exists.
The program will not create a path.
2. Logfile is where the program will log
messages.
3. If you omit the /lf parameter, the program
will create the IPSRADM.LOG default file in
the OS2 subdirectory to log the program
messages.
2. Press Enter.
3. Use the following steps if you want to define
IPSRADM to OS/2:
a. Open the Templates Folder on the OS/2
Desktop.
b. Drag a program template onto the Desktop. A
Program Settings window will appear.
c. At the Program page in the Path and File Name
field, type:
c:\os2\ipsradm.exe
d. In the Parameters field, type:
/lf=d:\path\logfile
e. At the General Tab in the Title field, type:
ServeRAID
Installing ServerRAID device drivers for
OpenServer:
To use the ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring
Program with SCO, you must first install the WIN32-Based
version of the Administration and Monitoring Program on a
Windows NT or Windows 95 client. Then, attach the
Windows NT or Windows 95 client to the same network as
the OpenServer systems that contain the ServeRAID
adapters or controllers. Finally, you must install the
ServeRAID device driver and background-server
component for OpenServer.
The background-server component for OpenServer installs
automatically when you use the instructions in this chapter
to install the ServeRAID OpenServer device driver. This
component enables the OpenServer system to act as the
TCP/IP interface for the remote WIN32-Based Program.
(See “ServeRAID programs for Windows NT and Windows
95” on page 131 for more information.)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
143
Installing the files for OpenServer: Before you
begin the installation, review the following information:
Ÿ
Ÿ
You must install logical drives as Bus Number 0 when
using the MKDEV program, regardless of the channel
that the physical drives are on.
You must install nondisk devices, such as CD-ROM
and tape drives, as Bus Numbers 1, 2, or 3 relative to
the channel to which they are attached. External
Channel 1 connector is Bus Number 1, external
Channel 2 connector is Bus Number 2, and internal
Channel 3 connector is Bus Number 3.
To configure the default nondisk devices during the initial
installation:
1. Redefine the default tape drive in the initial bootstring.
For example, to install the IPSRAID BTLD and
redefine the tape drive, go to the BOOT prompt and
type:
link Stp=ips(ð, 1, 2, ð)
The numbers in parentheses represent the Host
Adapter Number, the Bus Number, the SCSI ID, and
the LUN respectively.
2. When prompted for the location of the installation CD,
change the Bus Number and SCSI ID, as required.
Adding BTLD at boot time: To install the ServeRAID
device driver for OpenServer, Version 5.0.X:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
2. At the BOOT prompt, type:
link
3. Press Enter; then, when asked for the name of the
package to load, type:
ipsraid
4. Press Enter.
5. After the kernel loads but before it runs, link prompts
you to insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for
SCO Operating Systems Diskette.
While the installation program copies the files, one or
both of the following messages might appear:
Messages
1. Extracting BTLD distribution for
ipsraid... /etc/uadmin getdev b ips: No
such device (error 19)
2. dynamic linker: dlvr_audit: Cannot open
/dev/zero for file /lib/libprot.so.1
You can ignore Message A, no action is required.
But if Message B appears, you must press Enter
when prompted to continue the installation.
144
Netfinity Server HMM
6. Keep the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO
Operating Systems Diskette readily available. You
will need it to configure the device driver into the link
kit.
For additional information about adding a BTLD at boot
time, refer to “Using Boot-Time Loadable Drivers” in the
SCO OpenServer Handbook.
Adding BTLD after the initial installation
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
2. Start the server in system maintenance mode, and
log in as root.
3. Type:
installpkg
4. Press Enter; then, select the diskette drive in which
you will insert the installation diskette.
5. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO
Operating Systems Diskette, when prompted.
6. When prompted for the name of the package, type:
ipsraid
7. Press Enter; then, relink the kernel (as described in
“Relinking the kernel” in the SCO OpenServer
Handbook) by entering the following commands:
cd /etc/conf/cf.d
./link_unix
8. After the kernel rebuilds, the following message
appears:
The UNIX kernel has been rebuilt.
this kernel to boot by default?
Do you want
To continue, enter: y
The system backs up the old kernel by moving /UNIX
to /UNIX.OLD.
9. When the system asks for the kernel environment to
be rebuilt, enter: y
The system will respond with a successful message.
10. Use shutdown to bring down the system; then, restart
the system.
Using an IDE CD-ROM drive to install
OpenServer files: This section contains instructions
for installing files for OpenServer 5.0.0, OpenServer 5.0.2,
and OpenServer 5.0.4 when using an IDE CD-ROM Drive.
Installing the files for OpenServer 5.0.0:
To install files for OpenServer 5.0.0 using an IDE CD-ROM
drive:
1. Type the following at the BOOT prompt:
restart ahslink="ATAPI ipsraid" Srom=wd(ð,ð,ð,ð)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
145
2. Insert the ATAPI BTLD diskette when prompted; then,
press r to replace the wd driver.
The fields for the ATAPI CD-ROM are:
Srom=wd(c,d,l,b) where:
c = primary (0) or secondary (1) IDE/EIDE
controller
d = master (0) or slave (1) device
l = LUN of device (always 0 with ATAPI or wd
driver)
b = BUS of device (always 0 with ATAPI or wd
driver)
Installing the files for OpenServer 5.0.2 and
5.0.4: To install files for OpenServer Versions 5.0.2 or
5.0.4 using an IDE CD-ROM drive:
1. Type the following at the BOOT prompt:
restart link=ipsraid Srom=wd(ð,ð,ð,ð)
Note
The ATAPI BTLD (which includes the wd driver)
is included in OpenServer 5.0.2 and 5.0.4.
The fields for the ATAPI CD-ROM are:
2.
3.
4.
5.
Srom=wd(c,d,l,b) where:
c = primary (0) or secondary (1) IDE/EIDE
controller
d = master (0) or slave (1) device
l = LUN of device (always 0 with ATAPI or "wd"
driver)
b = BUS of device (always 0 with ATAPI or "wd"
driver)
Let the system start normally until it comes to the
select Media options.
Ÿ If you are using OpenServer 5.0.2, go to step 3.
Ÿ If you are using OpenServer 5.0.4, go to step 4.
To install with OpenServer 5.0.2:
a. Select Adapter type as WD.
b. Select Media Type as SCSI CD-ROM.
c. Select ID, BUS and LUN as 0.
d. Go to step 5.
To install with OpenServer 5.0.4:
a. Select Media Type as IDE CD-ROM Drive.
b. Select Primary Adapter and Master Device.
c. Go to step 5.
You have completed the installation.
Installing ServeRAID device drivers for
UnixWare:
The instructions for installing the ServeRAID files when
using UnixWare depend on the number of IDE and SCSI
disk-storage adapters and controllers installed in the
system. If all of the direct-access-storage devices (DASD)
146
Netfinity Server HMM
in the system are attached to a single disk-storage adapter
or controller (such as the ServeRAID adapter or controller),
you can skip the instructions in this section and go directly
to “Installing the files while installing UnixWare” on
page 150 or “Installing the files after installing UnixWare”
on page 151.
If you are attaching devices to multiple disk-storage
adapters or controllers (including IDE and SCSI controllers
integrated on the system board), use the following
instructions.
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are installing UnixWare on a drive attached to a
ServeRAID adapter or controller, follow the
instructions in “Installing UnixWare on a ServeRAID
drive.”
If you are installing UnixWare on a drive attached to a
non-ServeRAID adapter or controller and you intend
to store only data on the drives attached to the
ServeRAID adapters and controllers, follow the
instructions in “Installing UnixWare on a
non-ServeRAID drive” on page 149.
Installing UnixWare on a ServeRAID drive: Use
the following instructions if you are using multiple
disk-storage adapters or controllers and you are installing
UnixWare on a drive attached to a ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
Note
If you are not using multiple disk-storage adapters and
controllers, go to “Installing the files while installing
UnixWare” on page 150.
1. Install all ServeRAID adapters that you intend to use
in the system.
2. Using the ServeRAID Configuration Program, create
all of the arrays and define all of the logical drives.
3. Make a list of all of the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers, including the order and slot number,
installed in the system. To do this:
a. Turn on the server.
b. When the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration prompt
appears, press Ctrl+i. When a system contains
more than one ServeRAID adapter or controller,
a selection screen appears.
c. The menu lists the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers in order. Select the first ServeRAID
adapter or controller from the menu.
d. Select Advanced Functions from the Main
Menu.
e. Select View Controller and PCI Information
from the Advanced Functions menu.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
147
f. Record the slot number for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller; then, press Esc three times
to return to the controller selection screen.
g. Repeat step 3c on page 147 through step 3f
until you record the slot number for each
ServeRAID adapter or controller that appears on
the selection screen.
4. Turn off the system; then, remove all ServeRAID
adapters and controllers except the first one on the
list.
Note
If one of the ServeRAID controllers that you need
to remove is on the system board, you must do
one of the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the CD-ROM drive that you are using to
install the operating system is attached to
the integrated ServeRAID controller,
disconnect or remove all disk drives
attached to the integrated controller.
If only disk drives are attached to the
integrated controller, disconnect the SCSI
cable from the ServeRAID connector on the
system board. See the label inside the
server cover for the location of the
ServeRAID connector.
5. Remove all other non-ServeRAID IDE and SCSI
disk-storage adapters and controllers.
Note
If one of the disk-storage controllers that you
need to remove is on the system board, you
must do one of the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the CD-ROM drive that you are using to
install the operating system is attached to
the integrated disk-storage controller,
disconnect or remove all disk drives
attached to the integrated controller.
If only disk drives are attached to the
integrated controller, disconnect the cable
for the integrated controller from the IDE or
SCSI connector on the system board. See
the label inside the server cover for the
location of the IDE or SCSI controller
connector.
6. Follow the instructions in “Installing the files while
installing UnixWare” on page 150; then, return here
and continue with
step 7.
7. Power down the system.
148
Netfinity Server HMM
8. Install any non-ServeRAID disk-storage adapters or
controllers in the server; then, attach the drives to the
disk-storage adapters and controllers.
9. Install the second ServeRAID adapter or controller
from the list you created in step 3f on page 148;
then, attach the drives to the ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
10. Turn on the system and allow UnixWare to discover
the new disk-storage adapters and controllers.
11. Power down the system.
12. Repeat steps 9, 10, and 11 until all ServeRAID
adapters, ServeRAID controllers, and drives are
installed.
13. You can now partition and format the logical drives
attached to the additional ServeRAID adapters and
controllers. See the information provided with
UnixWare for more instructions.
Installing UnixWare on a non-ServeRAID drive:
Use the instructions in this section if you are using multiple
disk-storage adapters or controllers, you are installing
UnixWare on a drive attached to a non-ServeRAID adapter
or controller, and you intend to store only data on the
drives attached to the ServeRAID adapters and controllers.
1. Install all ServeRAID adapters that you intend to use
in the system.
2. Using the ServeRAID Configuration Program, create
all of the arrays and define all of the logical drives.
3. Make a list of all of the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers, including the order and slot number,
installed in the system. To do this:
a. Turn on the server.
b. When the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration prompt
appears, press Ctrl+i. When a system contains
more than one ServeRAID adapter or controller,
a selection screen appears.
c. The menu lists the ServeRAID adapters and
controllers in order. Select the first ServeRAID
adapter or controller from the menu.
d. Select Advanced Functions from the Main
Menu.
e. Select View Controller and PCI Information
from the Advanced Functions menu.
f. Record the slot number for the ServeRAID
adapter or controller; then, press Esc three times
to return to the controller selection screen.
g. Repeat step 3c through step 3f until you record
the slot number for each ServeRAID adapter or
controller that appears on the selection screen.
4. Turn off the system; then, remove all ServeRAID,
IDE, and SCSI disk-storage adapters and controllers
except the one attached to the drive where you intend
to install UnixWare.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
149
Note
If one of the disk-storage or ServeRAID
controllers that you need to remove is on the
system board, do one of the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the CD-ROM drive that you are using to
install the operating system is attached to
the integrated controller, disconnect or
remove all disk drives attached to the
integrated controller.
If only disk drives are attached to the
integrated controller, disconnect the SCSI or
IDE cable for the integrated controller from
the connector on the system board. See the
label inside the server cover for the location
of the SCSI and IDE cable connectors.
5. Follow the instructions in “Installing the files while
installing UnixWare”; then, return here and continue
with
step 6.
6. Power down the system.
7. Install any non-ServeRAID disk-storage adapters or
controllers in the server; then, attach the drives to the
disk-storage adapters and controllers.
8. Install the first ServeRAID adapter or controller from
the list you created in step 3f on page 149; then,
attach the drives to the ServeRAID adapter or
controller.
9. Turn on the system and allow UnixWare to discover
the new disk-storage adapters and controllers.
10. Power down the system.
11. Repeat steps 8, 9, and 10 until all ServeRAID
adapters, ServeRAID controllers, and drives are
installed.
12. You can now partition and format the logical drives
attached to the ServeRAID adapters and controllers.
See the information provided with UnixWare for more
instructions.
Installing the files while installing UnixWare: To
install the ServeRAID files while installing UnixWare 7.0:
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
2. Use the instructions provided with UnixWare to begin
the installation.
3. When a message appears asking if you want to install
any HBA diskettes, insert the IBM ServeRAID Device
Drivers for SCO Operating Systems Diskette; then,
select Install HBA diskette.
4. Use the instructions provided in the UnixWare manual
to complete the normal installation process.
150
Netfinity Server HMM
Installing the files after installing UnixWare: Use
the following instructions to install the ServeRAID files after
you install UnixWare, or use these instructions to update a
previously installed ServeRAID file with a newer version.
You can use the UnixWare Pkgadd or the UnixWare
SCOAdmin utility program to install the files.
Installing an HBA diskette file using Pkgadd
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO
Operating Systems Diskette into the diskette drive.
3. Type:
pkgadd –d/ dev/dsk/fðt
4. Press Enter
5. When the message Insert diskette into Floppy
Drive 1 appears, press Enter.
6. When the message Installation of IBM ServeRAID
SCSI IHV HBA (ips) was successful appears, type:
q
7. Press Enter; then after the device driver installs,
restart the system.
Installing an HBA diskette file using SCOAdmin
1. Use the ServerGuide Diskette Factory to create an
IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO Operating
Systems Diskette.
2. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Device Drivers for SCO
Operating Systems Diskette into the diskette drive.
3. Start the SCOAdmin utility program.
4. Select Software_Management.
5. Select Application Installer.
6. Select Disk_A from the Install From tab.
7. Select the Update View button.
8. When the icon labeled ips appears in the window,
select Install.
9. After the device driver installs, restart the system.
Starting the ServeRAID
background-server components
To start the background-server components:
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are using OS/2 or Windows, select the
IPSRAID ADMIN-MONITOR icon on the desktop.
If you are using OpenServer or UnixWare:
1. Make sure you are logged on as root.
a. If you are not, type:
su
b. When prompted, enter the root password.
2. Start the background-server component
(daemon) running in the background. To do this,
type:
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
151
ipsadm &
Ÿ
3. Press Enter.
If you are using Novell NetWare:
1. Load the remote component. To do this, type:
load ipsadm.nlm
2. Press Enter
Notes
1. To load the NetWare Administration
program with NetWare SFT III installed,
load IPSADM.NLM in the mirrored
server engine. The ServeRAID
adapters and controllers in the primary
and backup servers will appear to the
Administration and Monitoring Program
as if they were in one server.
2. When a rebuild, synchronization, or
logical-drive migration is in process,
you cannot stop the IPSADM.NLM
module by pressing the Esc key. To
stop the module during one of these
operations, you must unload the
IPSADM.NLM module.
ServerRAID background-server
components
This section provides information about background-server
component command-line parameters and logging
messages.
Command-line parameters:
To use the command-line parameters provided in the
background-server components, issue the IPSADM
command in the following format:
IPSADM parameter 1 parameter 2 parameter 3 etc....
Valid command-line parameters for the background-server
components are as follows:
–?
The –? command displays the help for the
valid parameters.
–p:number The –p:number command specifies the port
number that the server will check for client
connections.
The port number is a parameter used in
TCP/IP to distinguish among different
services on a single server. The default for
the server utility programs is port number
1087. You can use this parameter to change
the port number if another service on the
system is using 1087.
152
Netfinity Server HMM
–s:filename The –s:filename command specifies the name
of the file that contains security information.
For more about security information, see
“Background-server component security” on
page 153.
–f
The –f command specifies to log messages
to the default file, IPSADM.LOG.
–f:filename The -f:filename command lets you specify the
name of a file in which to log messages.
–d
The –d command disables the logging of
messages to the standard output, which is
usually the screen.
Logging messages:
Messages generated by the ServeRAID adapter or
controller consist of startup information, connecting and
disconnecting clients, and error messages.
When using the –f, –f:filename and –d parameters, you
can specify how you want the ServeRAID messages
handled. The default is to log messages to the standard
output, which is usually the screen. However, you can
have these messages logged to other output devices, such
as a printer or a text file.
The following information provides examples of different
formats for using the IPSADM command and the results.
Command
IPSADM
IPSADM -f
IPSADM -f:NEWFILE.LOG
IPSADM -d
IPSADM -f -d
Results
Logs messages to the
standard output and not to a
file.
Logs messages to the
standard output and to the
IPSADM.LOG file.
Logs messages to the
standard output and to the
file that you defined:
NEWFILE.LOG.
Disables the logging of
messages.
Logs messages to the
IPSADM.LOG file; however,
messages are not logged to
the standard output.
Background-server component security:
Security information is maintained in an optional text file on
the server. The file stores unencrypted user names and
unencrypted passwords; therefore, the file must be kept in
a secure directory.
When user names and passwords are entered into the
Administration and Monitoring Program (the client), they
are encrypted for delivery to the server. The server
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
153
decrypts the user names and passwords to verify proper
access to the ServeRAID adapter or controller. If the
verification is successful, the adapter or controller accepts
commands from the client. If no security file is present in
the default directory, or the directory specified by the -s
parameter, security is disabled. The server component
then accepts commands from any client connection.
The security file contains one user name and password
combination per line. The strings are separated by a colon
(:) and each string has a maximum of eight characters.
Background-server component name
resolution:
The server component relies on name resolution to
determine the host name from the client that is trying to
connect. When a client is trying to access a remote
server, the server tries to look up the name of the client
connecting. The method used to look up the name is
determined by the configuration of the server. Some
possible methods for this are Domain Name Servers
(DNS) or HOSTS files. With certain configurations, some
timing delays might occur due to misconfiguration or
inability to access the DNS. If problems persist, check the
network configuration.
IPSSEND and IPSMON programs
IPSSEND and IPSMON are advanced command-line
programs that you can use to manage the ServeRAID
adapters and controllers. These utility programs are
provided on the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette. This ServeRAID diskette is available from the
ServerGuide Diskette Factory or from the following address
on the World Wide Web:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support
See page 130 for the instructions needed to access the
IBM support page.
You can use the IPSSEND program to view the
configuration of a ServeRAID adapter or controller, rebuild
a defunct drive, initialize logical drives, synchronize logical
drives, and perform other functions.
You can use the IPSMON program to monitor a
ServeRAID adapter or controller for defunct drives,
predictive failure analysis (PFA) warnings, rebuild
operations, synchronizations, and logical-drive migrations.
This program can log a message to the monitor, to a file,
or to both the monitor and a file whenever activities occur.
You can use the IPSSEND and IPSMON programs with
the following operating systems:
Ÿ
Ÿ
154
IBM OS/2 Warp Server and OS/2 LAN Server
Novell NetWare 3.12 and 4.1X
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Microsoft Windows NT
SCO OpenServer 5.0.X
SCO UnixWare 7.0
You also can use the IPSSEND program with DOS, but
DOS requires the ASPI Manager.
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for OS/2,
Windows NT, or NetWare:
To install these programs for OS/2, Windows NT, or
NetWare:
1. After you create an IBM ServeRAID Command Line
Programs Diskette using Diskette Factory or by
downloading the image from the IBM Support Page
on the World Wide Web, start the server.
2. After the operating system loads, insert the IBM
ServeRAID Command Line Programs Diskette into
the diskette drive.
3. If you are using NetWare, go to step 5. If you are
using Windows NT or OS/2, create an IPSADM
directory on the hard disk drive. To do this, go to the
operating system command prompt and type:
md c:\ipsadm
Notes
1. The c represents the drive where OS/2 or
Windows NT is installed.
2. If you installed the Administration and
Monitoring Program files, you already
created this directory.
4. Press Enter.
5. Copy the IPSSEND.EXE file to the hard disk drive by
typing one of the following at the command prompt:
Ÿ For OS/2, type:
copy a:\os2\ipssend.exe c:\ipsadm
Ÿ
For Windows NT, type:
copy a:\nt\ipssend.exe c:\ipsadm
Ÿ
For NetWare, type:
copy a:\netware\ipssend.nlm c:\nwserver
Notes
1. The a represents the drive assignment
for the diskette drive that contains the
ServeRAID diskette.
2. The c represents the drive where OS/2,
Windows NT, or NetWare is installed.
3. These instructions assume that you
installed NetWare in the NWSERVER
directory.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
155
6. Press Enter; then, copy the IPSMON.EXE file to the
hard disk drive by typing one of the following at the
command prompt:
Ÿ For OS/2, type:
copy a:\os2\ipsmon.exe c:\ipsadm
Ÿ
For Windows NT, type:
copy a:\nt\ipsmon.exe c:\ipsadm
Ÿ
For NetWare, type:
copy a:\netware\ipsmon.nlm c:\nwserver
Notes
1. The a represents the drive assignment
for the diskette drive that contains the
ServeRAID diskette.
2. The c represents the drive where OS/2,
Windows NT, or NetWare is installed.
3. These instructions assume that you
installed NetWare in the NWSERVER
directory.
7. Press Enter; then, refer to “Starting the ServeRAID
Administration and Monitoring Program” on page 98
for information to start and use the IPSSEND and
IPSMON programs.
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for
OpenServer:
To install these programs for OpenServer 5.0.X:
1. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette into the diskette drive.
2. Copy the program files from the IBM ServeRAID
Command Line Programs Diskette by typing the
following:
doscp –r a:/openserv/ipssend /usr/bin/ipssend
3. Press Enter; then, type:
doscp –r a:/openserv/ipsmon /usr/bin/ipsmon
4. Press Enter; then, change the access permissions by
typing the following:
chmod 7ðð /usr/bin/ipssend
5. Press Enter; then, type:
chmod 7ðð /usr/bin/ipsmon
6. Press Enter; then, refer to “Starting the ServeRAID
Administration and Monitoring Program” on page 98
for information to start and use the IPSSEND and
IPSMON programs.
156
Netfinity Server HMM
Installing IPSSEND and IPSMON for
UnixWare:
To install these programs for UnixWare 7.0:
1. Insert the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette into the diskette drive.
2. Copy the program files from the IBM ServeRAID
Command Line Programs Diskette by typing the
following:
doscp –r a:/unixware/ipssend /usr/bin/ipssend
3. Press Enter; then, type:
doscp –r a:/unixware/ipsmon /usr/bin/ipsmon
4. Press Enter; then, change the access permissions by
typing the following:
chmod 7ðð /usr/bin/ipssend
5. Press Enter; then, type:
chmod 7ðð /usr/bin/ipsmon
6. Press Enter; then, refer to “Starting the ServeRAID
Administration and Monitoring Program” on page 98
for information to start and use the IPSSEND and
IPSMON programs.
Installing IPSSEND for DOS:
To install IPSSEND for DOS:
1. Create a startable diskette. To do this, insert a blank
diskette in diskette drive A; then, type:
format a: /s
2. Press Enter.
3. Copy the ASPI device driver from the DOS directory
on the IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette to the
startable diskette.
4. Copy the IPSSEND.EXE file from the DOS directory
on the IBM ServeRAID Command Line Programs
Diskette to the startable diskette.
5. Leaving the startable diskette in the diskette drive,
restart the system; then, refer to “Starting the
ServeRAID Administration and Monitoring Program”
on page 98 for information to start and use the
IPSSEND and IPSMON programs.
Rebuilding a defunct drive
When a hard disk drive goes defunct (DDD), a Rebuild
operation is required to reconstruct the data for the device
in its respective disk array. The ServeRAID adapters and
controllers can reconstruct RAID level-1 and RAID level-5
logical drives, but they cannot reconstruct data stored in
RAID level-0 logical drives.
To prevent data integrity problems, the ServeRAID
adapters and controllers set the RAID level-0 logical drives
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
157
to Blocked during a Rebuild operation. After the Rebuild
operation completes, you can unblock the RAID level-0
logical drives, and access them once again. But
remember, the logical drive might contain damaged data.
(Refer to “Unblocking logical drives” on page 108 for more
information.)
Before you rebuild a drive, review the following guidelines
and general information.
Guidelines for the rebuild operation:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
The replacement hard disk drive must have a
capacity equal to or greater than the failed drive.
If the hard disk drive being rebuilt is part of a RAID
level-0 logical drive, the RAID level-0 drive is blocked.
– You must unblock any RAID level-0 logical
drives at the end of the rebuild operation.
– If you use the Administration and Monitoring
program to initiate the rebuild operation, you can
unblock the blocked RAID level-0 drive when the
rebuild operation completes. (See “Unblocking
logical drives” on page 108 for more
information.)
Data in a logical drive with RAID level-0 is lost during
the rebuild operation. If you backed up the data
before the drive failed, you can restore the data to the
new drive.
General information about the rebuild
operation:
A physical hard disk drive can enter the rebuild state if:
Ÿ
Ÿ
You physically replace a defunct drive that is part of
the critical logical drive.
When you physically replace a defunct drive in a
critical logical drive, the ServeRAID adapter or
controller rebuilds the data on the new physical drive
before it changes the logical drive state back to Okay.
The ServeRAID adapter or controller adds a
hot-spare or a standby hot-spare drive to the array
and changes its state from Hot-Spare or Standby
Hot-Spare to Rebuilding.
Automatically rebuilding the defunct drive:
The ServeRAID adapter or controller will rebuild a defunct
drive automatically when all of the following conditions
exist:
Ÿ
Ÿ
158
The physical drive that failed is part of a RAID level-1
or RAID level-5 logical drive.
A hot-spare or standby hot-spare drive with a capacity
equal to or greater than the capacity of the defunct
drive is available the moment the drive fails.
Netfinity Server HMM
–
–
When multiple hot-spare drives are available, the
ServeRAID adapter or controller searches for a
hot-spare drive of the appropriate size. The
smallest drive that meets this requirement enters
the Rebuild state.
If no hot-spare or standby hot-spare drives are
available, the rebuild operation will start the
moment you replace the defective drive.
Note
If you physically replace the drive and the
new drive does not appear in the Physical
Drives branch of the Main Tree, you must
scan for new or removed Ready drives.
Ÿ
No rebuild, synchronization, or logical-drive migration
operation is in process.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
159
Locations/Removals
The following information supports the Netfinity 5500 M20 Type 8662 server.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
160
“Adapters” on page 161.
“Battery replacement” on page 173.
“Changing jumper positions” on page 176.
“Completing the installation” on page 178
“Controls and indicators” on page 181.
“CD-ROM drive” on page 184.
“DASD backplane removal” on page 186.
“Diagnostics panel LEDs” on page 187.
“External options” on page 188.
“Front bezel removal” on page 195.
“Hot-swap power supply installation” on page 196.
“Hot-swap power supply removal” on page 200.
“Hot-swap fan assembly replacement” on page 202.
“Information LED panel” on page 205.
“Information LED panel cover removal” on page 207.
“Information LED panel assembly removal” on
page 208.
“Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on
page 209.
“Interior LED and speaker assembly” on page 212.
“Internal drives installation” on page 213.
“Installing devices in the NetBAY3” on page 225.
“Memory board component locations” on page 230.
“Memory board jumpers” on page 231.
“Memory board removal” on page 232.
“Memory modules” on page 234.
“Microprocessor installation” on page 238.
“Preparing to install options” on page 246.
“Power backplane removal” on page 249.
“Power supplies” on page 250.
“Power supply LEDs” on page 251.
“Power supply filler panel” on page 252.
“NetBAY3 bezel installation” on page 253.
“Processor board component locations” on page 254.
“Processor board jumpers” on page 255.
“Processor board removal” on page 257.
“Processor support tray removal” on page 259.
“Processor support tray installation” on page 261.
“Rack installation” on page 262.
“SCSI backplane component locations” on page 273.
“SCSI backplane option jumpers” on page 274.
“Server cabling” on page 275.
“Server door and trim bezels removal” on page 276
“Shuttle removal” on page 277
“Side cover(s) removal” on page 278.
“System board component locations” on page 279.
“System board jumpers” on page 280.
“System board removal” on page 282.
“Top cover removal” on page 284
Netfinity Server HMM
Adapters
You can add adapters to extend the capabilities and power
of the server. Many adapters provide bus-master
capabilities, which enable the adapters to perform
operations without interrupting the server's microprocessor.
You can install up to six adapters in the expansion
connectors, called slots, on the system board of the server.
Five of the slots are peripheral component interconnect
(PCI) expansion slots and one is an industry standard
architecture (ISA) expansion slot.
In four of the PCI slots, you can install a new PCI adapter
or replace an existing PCI adapter with the same type of
adapter without turning off the server power and restarting
the system, if these features are supported by the
operating system. These slots are called hot-pluggable
PCI slots. They are also referred to as hot-plug PCI slots.
The remaining, non-hot-plug PCI slot supports only a short
adapter.
The expansion slots have Plug and Play capabilities. See
“Plug and Play technology” on page 164 for additional
information.
The server comes with a video controller. This video
controller is an integrated component on the system board.
It is not in an expansion slot. The integrated video
controller has super video graphics array (SVGA)
technology.
The integrated video controller is not removable. If you
want to disable this controller and use a video adapter
instead, you can install a video adapter in an expansion
slot. When you install a PCI video adapter, the server
BIOS automatically disables the integrated video controller.
When you install an ISA video adapter, you must move a
jumper to disable the integrated video controller. See
“System board jumpers” on page 280 for more information.
Note
Video adapters are not supported in PCI slots on PCI
primary bus 1 (PCI slots 1–4).
The following illustration shows the location of the PCI and
ISA expansion slots on the system board.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
161
.1/
.2/
bus
.3/
bus
.4/
.5/
.6/
Not available for use
Non-hot-plug 32-bit PCI slot 5 (on PCI primary
0, half card only)
Hot-plug 32-bit PCI slots 1–4 (on PCI primary
1)
Attention LEDs for hot-swap slots
Power LEDs for hot-swap slots
16-bit ISA slot
LEDs for hot-plug PCI slots:
Each hot-plug PCI slot has three LEDs associated with it
— two Attention LEDs and one Power LED.
Ÿ
Ÿ
162
Power LED: This LED is on when the hot-plug PCI
slot is active and has power. An adapter must not
be added to or removed from the PCI slot when the
Power LED is on. When this LED is off, the PCI slot
is inactive and has no power applied. An adapter can
be installed when the Power LED for the PCI slot is
off. Refer to the operating system documentation to
determine if it supports hot-plug PCI adapters, and, if
so, how to disable the hot-plug PCI slot.
Attention LEDs: Each hot-plug PCI slot has an
Attention LED that is visible from the rear of the
server and one that can be seen from inside the
server. (The LEDs have the same meaning; they are
duplicated to be visible from outside or inside the
server.) An Attention LED flashes approximately
once per second when it is on. The meaning of the
Attention LEDs is defined by the operating system.
Netfinity Server HMM
Refer to the operating system documentation to
determine if it supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if
so, what the Attention LEDs indicate.
The following table describes the LEDs:
Power LED
Attention
LED
Description
On
Flashing
The adapter requires attention.
Slot still has power applied.
Do not remove or install an
adapter in the slot. Refer to the
operating system documentation
for instructions.
On
Off
Normal operation; no
intervention is required.
Off
Flashing
The adapter requires
intervention. Power is removed
from the slot. An adapter can
be removed or installed in the
slot.
Off
Off
Power is removed from the
slot. An adapter can be
removed or installed in the slot.
Adapter considerations:
Before you continue with the adapter-installation
procedure:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Review the documentation that comes with the
adapter and follow those instructions in addition to
these instructions. If you need to change the switch
or jumper settings on the adapter, follow the
instructions that come with the adapter
documentation.
You can install a full-length ISA adapter in the ISA
expansion slot.
You can install full-length adapters in PCI expansion
slots 1-4.
You can install only a short adapter in PCI expansion
slot 5.
You can install hot-plug PCI adapters in PCI slots
1–4, if the operating system supports this feature.
Non-hot-plug PCI adapters can also be installed in
these slots.
The server supports 5.0 V and universal PCI
adapters; it does not support 3.3 V adapters.
Note
A universal PCI adapter supports both 3.3 V and
5.0 V operation.
Ÿ
Ÿ
The server uses a rotational interrupt technique to
configure PCI adapters. Because of this technique,
you can install a variety of PCI adapters that currently
do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
PCI slot 5 is on PCI bus 0 and PCI slots 1–4 are on
the PCI bus 1. Both PCI buses are primary buses.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
163
The performance of the PCI adapters depends on the
configuration of adapters in the system.
Plug and Play technology:
Plug and Play is an ISA technology designed to make
expanding the server easier. Plug and Play adapter
support is built into the system board in the server. If the
operating system supports Plug and Play technology, the
server will automatically configure itself when you install an
ISA Plug and Play device.
Note
PCI adapters are also often referred to as plug and
play because they configure automatically.
Plug and Play adapters: Plug and Play adapters are
easier to install and set up because they are
auto-configuring. This means that there are no jumpers or
switches to set.
A Plug and Play adapter comes with built-in identification
and configuration specifications (set in memory on the
adapter) that provide installation information to the server
during startup. This information is read by the input/output
(I/O) bus and interpreted by the server BIOS. The BIOS
routines automatically configure the adapter around the
resources already in use by other devices.
Legacy adapters: If an adapter that you install is not
Plug and Play compatible, you can use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to manually configure
the adapter. Adapters that are not Plug and Play
compatible are known as legacy adapters.
Configuration/Setup Utility program: Within the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, the Plug and Play
screen displays server resources that are typically required
by adapters:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
I/O port address
Memory address
IRQ line
DMA channel
From the Configuration/Setup Utility program screens, you
can select available resources for the adapter that you are
installing. Resources that are not currently being used by
adapters that are already installed in the server are listed
as [ Plug and Play ]. The system resources that are in
use by other devices are listed as [Not Applicable].
164
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. Refer to the documentation that comes with the
adapter for information about required system
resources. Then, make the appropriate jumper
or switch settings on the adapter.
2. If you have a resource conflict, set the resources
that are used by the ISA legacy adapter to [ Plug
and Play ]. This will manually configure the ISA
legacy adapter to that specific server resource.
Once Plug and Play detects that a resource is
not available, it will skip that resource, and
reconfigure to other available system resources.
(See “Plug and Play” on page 31.)
Enabling hot-plug PCI support:
The Netfinity 5500 M20 has hot-plug PCI capability. In
order to enable this feature, you must install the operating
system services for hot-plug PCI support code. To obtain
the operating system hot-plug PCI support code, access
the IBM Web site at:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support
Select Intel Processor Based Servers Support. From the
Select family field, select Netfinity 5500 M20. Select
Downloadable files.
Attention
All hot-plug operations must be done through the
operating system console (or supported user
interface). Failure to do this can result in a system
hang or serious damage to the adapter card or system
unit.
Hot-plug PCI adapter installation:
Use the
following information for installing a hot-plug PCI adapter.
If you want to remove a hot-plug adapter, reverse the
steps. If the operating system supports hot-replace PCI
adapters, you can replace a failing hot-plug PCI adapter
with a new adapter of the same type without turning off
power to the server. If the operating system and adapter
also support the hot-add feature, you can install a new
adapter without turning off the power to the server.
The color orange on components or labels in the Netfinity
5500 M20 indicates hot-plug components.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
165
Notes
1. Read “Safety information” on page 338.
2. Read the documentation that comes with the
adapter for any special requirements or
restrictions.
3. Read the documentation that comes with the
operating system.
Attention
Do not remove a hot-plug adapter before performing
the operating-system-defined procedure for disabling
the hot-plug PCI slot that contains the adapter.
Failure to do so might cause the system to lock up.
Refer to the operating system documentation.
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
166
Tab
Adapter retention latch
Expansion-slot cover
Attention light
Power light
Plastic divider
Netfinity Server HMM
.1/
.2/
.3/
.7/
.8/
Tab
Adapter retention latch
- .6/ See preceding page
Adapter
Adapter retention latch
To install a hot-plug PCI adapter:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. Determine which expansion slot you will use for the
adapter.
Note
Only PCI slots 1–4 can be used for hot-plug PCI
adapters.
3. Disable the selected PCI slot from the operating
system. (Refer to the documentation that comes with
the operating system for information about disabling a
hot-plug PCI slot.) Disabling the PCI slot turns off the
Power light for that PCI slot.
Attention
Make sure the Power light .5/ for the hot-plug
PCI slot is off before you continue to the next
step.
4. Remove the expansion-slot cover .3/:
a. Rotate the orange adapter retention latch .2/
counterclockwise.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
167
b. Lift the tab .1/ covering the top of the
expansion-slot cover .3/ and remove
expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in
a safe place for future use.
Attention
Expansion-slot covers must be installed on
all vacant slots. This maintains the
electromagnetic emissions characteristics of
the system and ensures proper cooling of
system components.
5. Refer to the documentation that comes with the
adapter for any cabling instructions. It might be
easier for you to route any cables before you install
the adapter.
6. Remove the adapter from the static-protective
package.
Note
Avoid touching the components and gold-edge
connectors on the adapter.
7. Place the adapter, component-side up, on a flat,
static-protective surface.
8. Install the adapter .7/:
a. Carefully grasp the adapter .7/ by its top edge
or upper corners, and align it with the expansion
slot on the system board.
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention
When you install an adapter in the server,
be sure that it is completely and correctly
seated in the system board connector.
Incomplete insertion might cause damage to
the system board or the adapter.
c. Lower the tab .1/ over the tab on the top corner
of adapter. Rotate the orange adapter retention
latch .2/ clockwise until it snaps into place.
Note
The expansion slot also has an adapter
retention latch .8/ at the end of the slot
toward the middle of the server. To remove
the adapter, you need to push this adapter
retention latch .8/ away from the adapter
until the top edge of the adapter is past the
latch.
9. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
10. Enable the PCI slot from the operating system.
(Refer to the documentation that comes with the
operating system for information about enabling a
168
Netfinity Server HMM
hot-plug PCI slot.) Make sure that the Power light
.5/ for the hot-plug PCI slot is on.
11. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the installation” on
page 178.
Non-hot-plug adapter installation: Use the
following procedure for installing a non-hot-plug adapter. If
you want to remove a non-hot-plug adapter, reverse the
steps.
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Read the documentation that comes with the
option.
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
Expansion-slot cover screw
Expansion-slot cover
Adapter
Adapter retention latch
Retaining bracket on adapter
To install a non-hot-plug adapter:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
169
“Preparing to install options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. Determine which expansion slot you will use for the
adapter.
Note
Check the instructions that come with the adapter
for any requirements or restrictions.
3. Remove the expansion-slot cover .2/:
Ÿ If you are installing an adapter in PCI slot 1, 2,
3, or 4:
a. See the illustration in “Hot-plug PCI adapter
installation” on page 165 for operation of
the adapter retention latch on the end of the
slot near the rear of the server.
b. Rotate the adapter retention latch
counterclockwise.
c. Lift the tab covering the top of the
expansion-slot cover and remove
expansion-slot cover from the server. Store
it in a safe place for future use.
Ÿ If you are installing an adapter in PCI slot 5 or in
the ISA slot:
a. Remove the screw .1/ on the top of the
expansion-slot cover .2/.
b. Slide the expansion-slot cover out of the
server.
c. Store these items in a safe place for future
use.
Attention
Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all
vacant slots. This maintains the electromagnetic
emissions characteristics of the system and
ensures proper cooling of system components.
4. Refer to the documentation that comes with the
adapter for any cabling instructions. It might be
easier for you to route any cables before you install
the adapter.
5. Remove the adapter from the static-protective
package.
Note
Avoid touching the components and gold-edge
connectors on the adapter.
6. Place the adapter, component-side up, on a flat,
static-protective surface.
7. Set any jumpers or switches as described by the
adapter manufacturer.
8. Install the adapter:
170
Netfinity Server HMM
a. Carefully grasp the adapter .3/ by its top edge
or upper corners, and align it with the expansion
slot on the system board.
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention
When you install an adapter in the server, be
sure that it is completely and correctly seated in
the system board connector before you apply
power. Incomplete insertion might cause
damage to the system board or the adapter.
9. If you are installing an adapter in PCI slots 1, 2, 3, or
4:
a. Refer to the illustration in “Hot-plug PCI adapter
installation” on page 165 for operation of the
adapter retention latch on the end of the slot
near the rear of the server.
b. Lower the tab on the adapter guide over the tab
on the top corner of the adapter. Rotate the
adapter retention latch clockwise until it snaps
into place.
If you are installing an adapter in PCI slot 5 or in the
ISA slot:
a. Align the rounded notch in the retaining bracket
on the adapter .5/ with the threaded hole in the
expansion-slot frame. The retaining bracket on
the adapter fits into the space that was occupied
by the expansion-slot cover.
b. Insert the expansion-slot screw .3/ that you
removed earlier into the threaded hole, and push
the rounded notch up against the screw.
c. Tighten the expansion-slot screw firmly.
Note
The expansion slot also has an adapter
retention latch .4/ at the end of the slot
toward the middle of the server. To remove
the adapter, you need to push this adapter
retention latch .4/ away from the adapter
until the top edge of the adapter is past the
latch.
10. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
11. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the installation” on
page 178.
Verifying compatibility between network
adapters and device drivers:
The server supports several types of network adapters. If
you are having trouble with the installation or operation of
a network adapter or network operating system, ensure
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
171
that the network adapter device driver supports up to four
processors. Refer to the network adapter documentation
for additional information about adapter compatibility
requirements.
172
Netfinity Server HMM
Battery replacement
IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind.
The lithium battery must be handled correctly to avoid
possible danger. If you replace the battery, you must
adhere to the following instructions.
Caution
When replacing the battery, use only IBM FRU
Number 33F8354 or an equivalent type battery
recommended by the manufacturer. If the system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only
with the same module type made by the same
manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Throw or immerse into water
Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances
or regulations.
Note
In the U.S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about
battery disposal.
If you replace the original lithium battery with a
heavy-metal battery or a battery with heavy-metal
components, be aware of the following environmental
consideration. Batteries and accumulators that contain
heavy metals must not be disposed of with normal
domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge by
the manufacturer, distributor, or representative, to be
recycled or disposed of in a proper manner.
Notes
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Follow any special handling and installation
instructions supplied with the replacement
battery.
After you replace the battery, you must
reconfigure the server and reset the system date
and time.
To replace the battery:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
173
2.
3.
4.
5.
“Preparing to install options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
Locate the battery on the system board (see “System
board component locations” on page 279).
Remove any adapters that are installed in PCI slots 1
and 2, so you can access the battery. (See “Hot-plug
PCI adapter installation” on page 165 for information
about installing and removing adapters from the
hot-plug PCI slots.)
Lift and remove the plastic dividers between PCI slot
1 and the ISA slot and between PCI slot 1 and PCI
slot 2 by pressing the latches on the top ends of the
dividers toward the dividers and lifting the dividers
from the server.
Remove the battery:
a. Use one finger to lift the battery clip over the
battery.
b. Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward
the rear of the server. The spring mechanism
behind the battery will push it out toward you as
you slide it forward.
c. Use your thumb and index finger to pull the
battery from under the battery clip.
d. Ensure that the battery clip is touching the base
of the battery socket by pressing gently on the
clip.
6. Insert the new battery:
a. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the
front of the socket, under the battery clip.
b. As you slide it under the battery clip, press the
battery down into the socket.
7. Reinstall any adapters you removed. (See “Hot-plug
PCI adapter installation” on page 165 for information
about installing and removing adapters from the
hot-plug PCI slots.)
8. Insert the plastic dividers into the divider guides
beside PCI slots 1 and 2.
9. Reinstall the top cover and complete the installation
(see “Completing the installation” on page 178).
174
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
You will have to wait approximately 20 seconds
after you plug the power cord of the server into
an electrical outlet for the Power Control button
to become active.
10. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and set
configuration parameters as needed.
Ÿ To set the system date and time, go to “Date
and time” on page 25.
Ÿ To set the power-on password, go to “Using the
power-on password menu” on page 26.
Ÿ To reconfigure the server, follow the instructions
given in “Configuration/Setup Utility program” on
page 21 (all models).
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
175
Changing jumper positions
Jumpers located on the system board and the processor
board help you to customize the way the server operates.
The system board, processor board, and SCSI backplane
contain two-pin and three-pin jumper blocks.
In some cases, groups of jumpers might combine to define
a function.
Two-pin jumper blocks:
Covering both pins with a jumper defines one function of
the jumper block. To change the function of the jumper
block, cover one pin only or remove the jumper entirely.
The following illustration identifies pins 1 and 2 on a
two-pin jumper block.
2
1
To change a jumper's position for a two-pin jumper
block:
1. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the server power
cords.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Preparing to install
options” on page 246).
3. Do one of the following:
Ÿ Lift the jumper straight off the pin block.
Ÿ Align the holes in the bottom of the jumper with
the two pins on the pin block, and then slide the
jumper onto these pins.
Ÿ
176
Align one of the holes in the bottom of the
jumper with one of the pins on the pin block, and
then slide the jumper onto that pin only.
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Reinstall the server cover and connect the cables
(see “Completing the installation” on page 178).
Three-pin jumper blocks:
With the three-pin jumper blocks, each jumper covers two
of the three pins on a pin block. You can position the
jumper to fit over the center pin and either of the other two
pins.
The following illustration identifies pins 1, 2, and 3 on a
three-pin jumper block.
3
2
1
To change a jumper's position for a three-pin jumper
block:
1. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the server power
cords.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Preparing to install
options” on page 246).
3. Lift the jumper straight off the pin block.
4. Align the holes in the bottom of the jumper with the
center pin and the pin that was not covered
previously.
5. Slide the jumper fully onto these pins.
6. Reinstall the server cover and connect the cables
(see “Completing the installation” on page 178).
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
177
Completing the installation
To complete the installation, you must reinstall the side
and top covers, reconnect all the cables that you
disconnected in “Preparing to install options” on page 246,
and, for certain options, run the Configuration/Setup Utility
program.
Attention
For correct cooling and airflow, install the top cover
before turning on the server. Operating the server for
extended periods of time (over 30 minutes) with the
top cover removed might damage server components.
Installing the top cover:
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Thumbscrews
.2/ Top cover
To install the server top cover:
1. Before installing a cover, check that all cables,
adapters, and other components are installed and
seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools
or parts inside the server.
2. Lower the cover .2/ with the rear edge of the cover
about 25 mm (1 inch) back from the rear edge of the
server.
3. Slide the cover forward.
178
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Tighten the two thumbscrews .1/ on the back edge of
the cover.
5. If you disconnected any cables from the back of the
server, reconnect the cables; then, plug the power
cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.
Notes
1. If you are in the United Kingdom and have a
modem or fax machine attached to the
server, reconnect the telephone line after
you plug in the power cords.
2. If necessary, see “Input/output connectors
and expansion slots” on page 209 for
connector locations.
Installing the trim bezels and server door:
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Server door
.2/ NetBAY3 bezel
.3/ Media-bay trim bezel
To install the media-bay trim bezel:
1. Insert the two tabs on the top of the media-bay trim
bezel .3/ in the matching holes on the server
chassis.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
179
2. Push the bottom of the bezel toward the server until
the two tabs at the bottom of the bezel snap into
place.
To install the NetBAY3 bezel:
1. Hook the tabs on the left side of the NetBAY3 bezel
.2/ around the posts on the NetBAY3.
2. Gently push the right side of the bezel toward the
server until the bezel snaps into place.
3. Lock the NetBAY3 bezel.
To install the server front door:
1. Align the pins on the server door .1/ with the hinges
on the server and slide the door down.
2. Close and lock the door.
Reconfiguring the server:
When you start the server for the first time after you add or
remove an internal option or an external SCSI device, you
might see a message telling you that the configuration has
changed.
Some options have device drivers that you need to install.
Refer to the documentation that comes with the option for
information about installing any required device drivers.
If you have more than one microprocessor installed, you
might want to upgrade the operating system. If you have
installed or removed hard disk drives, refer to “ServeRAID
system board controller” on page 66 for information about
reconfiguring the disk arrays.
Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to save the
new configuration information.
180
Netfinity Server HMM
Controls and indicators
The most commonly used controls and indicators on the
front of the server appear in the following illustration.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
.9/
Door Lock (On Side Cover, Tower Models Only):
You can lock the door on the server to deter
tampering with the internal components. This same
lock also locks the top cover in place.
Hard Disk Status Light: Each of the hot-swap
drive bays has a Hard Disk Status light. When this
amber light is on continuously, the drive has failed.
When the light flashes slowly (one flash per
second), the drive is being rebuilt. When the light
flashes rapidly (three flashes per second), the
controller is identifying the drive.
Hard Disk Activity Light: Each of the hot-swap
drive bays has a Hard Disk Activity light. When this
green light is flashing, the drive is being accessed.
CD-ROM Eject/Load Button: Press this button to
eject or retract the CD-ROM tray so that you can
insert or remove a CD.
CD-ROM Drive In-Use Light: When this light is
on, the CD-ROM drive is being accessed.
Diskette-Eject Button: Press this button to eject a
diskette from the drive.
Diskette Drive In-Use Light: When this light is on,
the diskette drive is being accessed.
Reset Button: Press this button to reset the server
and run the power-on self-test (POST).
Power Control Button: Press this button to
manually turn the server on or off.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
181
Caution
The Power Control button on the device and
the power switch do not turn off the electrical
current supplied to the device. The device also
might have more than one power cord. To
remove all electrical current from the device,
ensure that all power cords are disconnected
from the power source.
2
1
The server can be activated in several ways:
Ÿ You can turn on the server by pressing the
Power Control button on the front of the
server.
Note
If you have just plugged the power cord of
the server into an electrical outlet, you will
have to wait approximately 20 seconds
before pressing the Power Control button.
Ÿ
Ÿ
If the server is activated and a power failure
occurs, the server will start automatically when
power is restored.
The server can also be powered on by the
Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor.
The server can be deactivated as follows:
Ÿ You can turn off the server by pressing the
Power Control button on the front of the
server. Pressing the Power Control button
starts an orderly shutdown of the operating
system, if this feature is supported by the
operating system, and places the server in
standby mode.
Note
After turning off the server, wait at least 5
seconds before pressing the Power
Control button to power the server on
again.
182
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
You can press and hold the Power Control
button for more than 4 seconds to cause an
immediate shutdown of the server and place
the server in standby mode. This feature can
be used if the operating system hangs.
You can disconnect the server power cords
from the electrical outlets to shut off all power
to the server.
Note
Wait about 15 seconds after disconnecting
the power cord for the system to stop
running. Watch for the System Power
light on the information LED panel to stop
blinking.
.1ð/
Information LED Panel: The lights on this panel
give status information for the server. See
“Information LED panel” on page 205 for more
information.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
183
CD-ROM drive
An IDE CD-ROM drive is a standard feature on the server.
CD-ROM drives can play back or read from a CD, but
cannot write information to it. CD-ROM drives use industry
standard, 12 cm (4.75-inch) CDs.
Follow these guidelines when using a CD-ROM drive:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Do not place the server where the following
conditions exist:
– High temperature
– High humidity
– Excessive dust
– Excessive vibration or sudden shock
– An inclined surface
– Direct sunlight
Do not insert any object other than a CD into the
drive.
Before moving the server, remove the CD from the
drive.
The following illustration shows the front of the CD-ROM
drive.
CD-ROM Drive
In-Use Light
Emergency-Eject
Hole
Eject/Load
Button
Handling a CD:
When handling a CD, follow these guidelines:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Hold the CD by its edges. Do not touch the surface.
To remove dust or fingerprints, wipe the CD from the
center to the outside with a soft, nonabrasive cloth.
Wiping the CD in a circular direction might cause loss
of data.
Do not write or stick paper on the CD.
Do not scratch or mark the CD.
Do not place or store the CD in direct sunlight.
Do not use benzene, thinners, or other cleaners to
clean the CD.
Do not drop or bend the CD.
Loading a CD:
To load a CD into a CD-ROM drive:
1. Press the Eject/Load button. The tray slides out of
the drive. (Do not manually force the tray open.)
184
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Place the CD in the tray with the label facing up.
3. Close the tray by pressing the Eject/Load button, or
by gently pushing the tray forward. When the tray is
closed, the CD-ROM drive In-Use light on the front of
the drive will activate to indicate that the drive is in
use.
4. To eject the CD, press the Eject/Load button. When
the tray slides out, carefully remove the CD.
5. Close the tray by pressing the Eject/Load button, or
by gently pushing the tray forward.
Note
1. If the tray does not slide out of the drive when
you press the Eject/Load button, insert the
pointed end of a large paper clip into the
emergency-eject hole located on the front of the
CD-ROM drive.
2. In some models, you might have to remove the
front bezel that houses the CD-ROM drive so that
you can access the emergency-eject hole.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
185
DASD backplane removal
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
To remove the DASD backplane, do the following:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. To access the cable(s) attached to the DASD
backplane, slide the shuttle to the rear of the system
(see “Shuttle removal” on page 277).
3. Disconnect the DASD backplane cables.
4. Remove the DASD backplane.
a. Remove the DASD backplane screws; then,
remove the DASD backplane.
186
Netfinity Server HMM
Diagnostics panel LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the
diagnostics panel inside the server. See
“Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 285 and “Light path
diagnostics” on page 48 for information on identifying
problems using these LEDs.
SMI
NMI
PCI1
PCI2
CPU
WRONG
SLOT
MEM
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FAN4
TEMP
VRM
CPU
DASD1
DASD2
PS1
PS2
Speaker
To replace the diagnostics panel LEDs, you must replace
the interior LED and speaker assembly (see “Interior LED
and speaker assembly” on page 212).
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
187
External options
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Read the documentation that comes with the
options.
Connecting external SCSI devices:
You can attach a SCSI storage expansion enclosure to the
server.
Cabling requirements: The ServeRAID controller in
the server has one channel that can be used to attach
external devices. This channel is connected to the SCSI
connector on the back of the server. To select and order
the correct cables for use with external devices, contact
your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Refer to “ServeRAID system board controller” on page 66
to determine the number of internal and external
connectors, channels, and SCSI devices that the controller
supports.
For information about the maximum length of SCSI cable
between the terminated ends of the cable, see ANSI SCSI
Standards:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
X3.131-1986 (SCSI)
X3.131-1994 (SCSI-2)
X3T10/1071D
Adhering to these standards ensures that the server
operates properly.
Setting SCSI IDs for external devices: Each SCSI
device that is connected to a SCSI controller must have a
unique SCSI ID, so that the SCSI controller can identify
the devices and ensure that different devices do not
attempt to transfer data at the same time. SCSI devices
that are connected to different SCSI controllers can have
duplicate SCSI IDs. See “SCSI IDs” on page 215 and
refer to the instructions that come with the SCSI devices
for more information about setting a SCSI ID.
Installation procedure: To attach an external
device:
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Follow the instructions that come with the option to
prepare it for installation and to connect it to the
server.
Input/output ports and connectors:
The input/output (I/O) connectors are for attaching external
devices, such as printers, keyboards, and displays, to the
server. The I/O connectors on the server include:
188
Netfinity Server HMM
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Two
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
Two
One
serial-port connectors
system management connector
parallel-port connector
video-port connector
keyboard-port connector
auxiliary-device-port connector
SCSI-port connector
Ethernet-port connector
USB-port connectors
RS-485-port connector
See the illustration in “Input/output connectors and
expansion slots” on page 209 for the locations of the
connectors.
Serial ports: The server comes with two serial ports.
(See “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on
page 209 for the locations of the connectors.) These ports
are used to communicate with printers, plotters, external
modems, scanners, and auxiliary terminals. These ports
also enable you to transfer data between computers.
Serial ports can transfer data asynchronously, which
means that they can transmit any number of characters at
any time, with no restriction on the duration of the pauses
between characters.
The serial ports can transmit and receive data and
commands at rates of from 300 bits per second up to
115 000 bits per second.
Serial port A is shared by the operating system and the
integrated Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. Serial port B can be used only by the
operating system.
Each serial port has a 9-pin, male D-shell connector on the
back of the server. The pin-number assignments of this
connector conform to the industry standard.
5
1
6
9
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for
the serial-port connectors.
Table 3. Serial port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
Data carrier detect
Receive data
Transmit data
Data terminal ready
Signal ground
6
7
8
9
Data set ready
Request to send
Clear to send
Ring indicator
When you turn on the server, the POST routine assigns
the serial ports to specific communication port addresses.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
189
Some application programs use only certain ports, and
some modems are designed for use only at certain
communication port addresses. You might need to use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to change
communication port address assignments to resolve
conflicts.
Management port C: The server has a dedicated
system-management I/O port. This port can be used to
attach a modem that is dedicated to communication with
the Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor.
The connector on the back of the server and the
pin-number assignments are the same as for the serial
ports.
Parallel port: The parallel port usually is used to
communicate with printers, and transfers data one byte at
a time. The parallel port has a 25-pin, female D-shell
connector on the back of the server. It support three
standard IEEE 1284 modes of operation: Standard
Parallel Port (SPP), Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP), and
Extended Capability Port (ECP). (See “Input/output
connectors and expansion slots” on page 209 for the
location of the connector.)
1
13
25
14
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for
the parallel-port connector.
Table 4. Parallel port pin-number assignments
Pin
I/O
SPP/ECP Signal
EPP Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
-
−STROBE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
−ACK
BUSY
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
−AUTO FD (feed)
−ERROR
−INIT
−SLCT IN
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
−WRITE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
−ACK
−WAIT
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
−DSTRB
−ERROR
−INIT
−ASTRB
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
190
Netfinity Server HMM
When you turn on the server, the POST routine assigns
the parallel port a specific port address. You can change
the parallel-port assignment by using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Video port: The system board in the server has one
SVGA video port. This port is used to attach a video
monitor. The video port has a 15-pin analog connector on
the back of the server. (See “Input/output connectors and
expansion slots” on page 209 for the location of the
connector.)
5
1
15
11
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for
the video connector.
Table 5. Video port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Red
Green or monochrome
Blue
Monitor ID bit 2
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
+5 V dc
Ground
Monitor ID bit 0
DDC SDA
Horizontal synchronization (Hsync)
Vertical synchronization (Vsync)
DDC SDL
Keyboard and auxiliary-device ports: The system
board has one keyboard port and one auxiliary-device port
that supports a mouse or other pointing device. (See
“Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on page 209
for the locations of the connectors.)
6
5
4
3
2
1
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for
the connectors used by the keyboard and auxiliary-device
ports.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
191
Table 6. Keyboard and auxiliary-device port
pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
Data
Not connected
Ground
+5 V dc
Clock
Not connected
SCSI port: Your server comes with a RAID controller on
the system board, which provides two independent SCSI
channels. A 16-bit (wide) SCSI cable connects the
hot-swap backplane to one channel of the integrated RAID
SCSI controller. Another SCSI cable connects the other
channel of the controller to the SCSI connector on the rear
of the server.
To attach an external SCSI device to your server, connect
an external SCSI cable from the SCSI device to the SCSI
connector on the back of the server. Ensure that the last
device on the external SCSI cable is terminated. Table 7
shows the pin-number assignments for the 68-pin SCSI
connectors.
Table 7. 68-pin SCSI port connector pin-number
assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Terminal power
Terminal power
Reserved
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Not connected
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
Data 12
Data 13
Data 14
Data 15
Data P1
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data P0
Reserved
-PRSN
Terminal power
Terminal power
Reserved
Ground
-Attention
Ground
-Busy
-Acknowledge
-Reset
-Message
-Select
-Control/Data
-Request
-Input/Output
Data 8
Data 9
Data 10
Data 11
192
Netfinity Server HMM
Ethernet port: The system board in the Netfinity 5500
M20 contains an Ethernet controller. The controller has an
external RJ-45 connector on the rear of the server that is
used with a category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair
(UTP) cable. The connector enables an Ethernet network
to attach to the internal transceiver in the server.
Note
The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that
the cabling in the network be Category 5 or higher.
See “Configuring the ethernet controller” on page 35 for
additional information about the Ethernet controller.
Table 8 shows the pin-number assignments for the RJ-45
connector. These assignments apply to both 10BASE-T
and 100BASE-TX devices.
10BASE-T or 100 BASE-TX
UTP Cable
1
2
Pins
RJ-45 Modular Plug Connector
3
6
Table 8. Ethernet connector pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
Transmit data+
Transmit data−
Receive data+
Reserved
5
6
7
8
Reserved
Receive data−
Reserved
Reserved
Universal serial bus ports: The system board in the
Netfinity 5500 M20 contains two universal serial bus (USB)
ports. Each USB port has an external connector on the
rear on the server for attaching devices that previously
used serial, parallel, keyboard, mouse, and game ports.
USB is an emerging serial interface standard for telephony
and multimedia devices. USB technology uses Plug and
Play to determine what device is attached to the
connector. Each USB device is accessed by a unique
USB address. A device called a hub is used to convert the
USB port into multiple attachment points. A hub has
multiple ports where peripherals can be attached. USB
provides 12 megabits-per-second (Mbps) bandwidth with a
maximum of 63 peripherals and a maximum signal
distance of five meters (16 ft.) per segment.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
193
Note
If more than one USB device is to be attached, then
the device must be connected to a hub.
Table 9 shows the pin-number assignments for the USB
connectors.
Table 9. USB connector pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
VCC
−Data
+Data
Ground
RS-485 port: The system board has an RS-485 port
that can be used by the Advanced System Management
Processors of several servers mounted in a rack enclosure
to communicate with each other in half-duplex mode.
Table 10 shows the pin-number assignments for the
RS-485 connector.
6
1
Table 10. RS-485 port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
+5 V dc
+Data (tied
−Data (tied
+Data (tied
−Data (tied
Ground
194
to
to
to
to
pin
pin
pin
pin
4)
5)
2)
3)
Netfinity Server HMM
Front bezel removal
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
To remove the front bezel, do the following:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. Remove the door and trim bezel (see “Server door
and trim bezels removal” on page 276).
3. Remove the side covers (see “Side cover(s) removal”
on page 278).
4. Remove the front bezel.
a. While releasing the side bezel tabs, rotate the
right side of the bezel away from the system;
then, unhook the left side bezel tabs.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
195
Hot-swap power supply installation
The server comes with one power supply. You can add a
second power supply to provide redundant power. After
you install a power supply, check the power supply status
indicators to verify that the power supply is operating
properly. See “Power supplies” on page 250 for details.
Caution
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any
part that has the following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are
present inside any component that has this label
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
components.
2
1
Refer to the following illustration while performing the steps
in this procedure.
Note
You do not need to turn off the power to the server to
install hot-swap power supplies.
196
Netfinity Server HMM
9
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
.9/
Screws
Filler panel
Power supply
Power-cord strain-relief bracket
Hole for shipping thumbscrew
Handle
AC Power light
Power cord connector for power supply 2
DC Power light
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
197
To add a power supply:
Caution
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any
part that has the following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are
present inside any component that has this label
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
components.
2
1
1. Remove the filler panel .2/:
a. Remove the four screws .1/ from the filler panel.
b. Remove the filler panel .2/ from the
power-supply bay and save it and the four
screws you removed.
Note
During normal operation, each power-supply
bay must have either a power supply or filler
panel installed for proper cooling.
2. Place the handle .6/ on the power supply in the open
position, and slide the power supply into the chassis.
3. Gently close the handle .6/ on the power supply to
seat the power supply in the bay.
4. Plug the power cord for the added power supply into
power cord connector .8/.
198
Netfinity Server HMM
Caution
If you install a strain-relief bracket option over the
end of the power cord that is connected to the
device, you must connect the other end of the
power cord to an easily accessible power source.
5. Install a power-cord strain-relief bracket .4/, if
desired.
6. Plug the power cord into a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
7. Verify that the DC Power light .9/ and AC Power light
.7/ on the power supply are lit, indicating that the
power supply is operating correctly.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
199
Hot-swap power supply removal
The server comes with one power supply. You can add a
second power supply to provide redundant power. Each
power supply has two status indicators; see “Power
supplies” on page 250 for information about the status
indicators.
Attention
You cannot hot swap a power supply if the server has
only one power supply installed.
Refer to the illustration in “Hot-swap power supply
installation” on page 196 while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
To remove a hot-swap power supply:
Caution
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any
part that has the following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are
present inside any component that has this label
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
components.
2
1
1. If the server has only one power supply installed, turn
off the server and peripheral devices (see “Preparing
to install options” on page 246); otherwise, go to the
next step.
2. Remove the power supply .3/:
a. Remove the blue shipping thumbscrew from its
hole .5/ on the power supply, if it has not
already been removed.
Note
You do not need to replace the shipping
thumbscrew.
b. Remove the power-cord strain-relief bracket .4/,
if one is installed.
200
Netfinity Server HMM
c. Grasp the handle .6/ on the power supply and
pull the handle toward the center of the server;
then, slide the power supply out of the chassis.
Note
During normal operation, each power supply
bay should have either a power supply or
filler panel installed for proper cooling.
3. If you are not installing a replacement power supply:
a. Disconnect the power cord for the power supply
that you removed.
b. Install a power supply filler panel; then go to step
4.
If you are replacing the power supply:
a. Place the handle .6/ on the power supply in the
open position, and slide the power supply into
the chassis.
b. Gently close the handle .6/ on the power supply
to seat the power supply in the bay.
c. Verify that the AC Power light .7/ and DC Power
light .9/ are lit, indicating that the power supply
is operating correctly.
Caution
If you install a strain-relief bracket option
over the end of the power cord that is
connected to the device, you must connect
the other end of the power cord to an easily
accessible power source.
d. Install a power-cord strain-relief bracket .4/, if
desired.
4. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the installation” on
page 178.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
201
Hot-swap fan assembly replacement
The server comes with four hot-swap fan assemblies.
Attention
Replace a fan that has failed within 48 hours to help
ensure proper cooling.
Note
You do not need to turn off the power to the server to
replace a hot-swap fan assembly.
The following illustrations show the replacement of a
hot-swap fan assembly. Refer to these illustrations while
performing the steps in this procedure.
.1/ Processor support tray cover
.2/ Quarter-turn fasteners for support tray cover
202
Netfinity Server HMM
.3/ Fan power cables
.4/ Hot-swap fan assembly 1
.5/ Tabs
.6/ Hot-swap fan assembly 2
.7/ Hot-swap fan assembly 4
.8/ Fasteners
.9/ Hot-swap fan assembly 3
.1ð/ Quarter-turn fasteners for fan assemblies
To replace a hot-swap fan assembly:
Caution
To avoid personal injury, disconnect the hot-swap fan
cables before removing the fan from the device.
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
Attention
To ensure proper system cooling, do not remove
the top cover for more than 30 minutes during
this procedure.
2. Determine which fan assembly (fan 1 .4/, fan 2 .6/,
fan 3 .9/, or fan 4 .7/) to replace by checking the fan
LEDs on the diagnostic panel (see “Diagnostics panel
LEDs” on page 187).
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
203
3. If you are replacing fan assembly 1, 2, or 3:
a. Disconnect the fan power cable .3/ from the fan
assembly that you are replacing.
b. If you are removing fan assembly 1 .4/, turn the
two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ one quarter turn
and remove the processor support tray cover
.2/.
c. Turn the fan assembly quarter-turn fastener .1ð/
one quarter turn and remove the fan assembly
from the server.
d. Slide the replacement fan assembly into the
server. (If you are replacing fan assembly 1 .4/,
make sure the tabs .5/ fit into the slots at the
bottom of the fan opening in the server.)
e. When you have the fan assembly correctly
seated, turn its quarter-turn fastener .1ð/ one
quarter turn to secure the fan in the server.
f. If you removed the processor support tray cover
.1/, install it and turn the two quarter-turn
fasteners .2/ one quarter turn to secure the
cover.
g. Connect the fan power cable .3/ to the power
connector.
4. If fan assembly 4 .7/ needs to be replaced:
a. Turn the two processor support tray cover
quarter-turn fasteners .2/ one quarter turn and
remove the processor support tray cover .1/.
b. Lift up on the fasteners .8/ for fan assembly 4
.7/ and remove the fan assembly from the
server.
c. Slide the replacement fan assembly into the
server. (Make sure the fan assembly fits into the
slots on the processor support tray.)
d. When you have the fan assembly correctly
seated, push down on the fasteners .8/ until
they click into place.
e. Install the processor support tray cover .1/ turn
the two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ one quarter
turn to secure the cover.
5. Replace the top cover (see “Installing the top cover”
on page 178).
204
Netfinity Server HMM
Information LED panel
The information LED panel on the front of the server
contains the following status lights.
OK
100 LINK TX
MB OK
RX
.1/
System Power Light: When this green light is on,
system power is present in the server. When this
light flashes, the server is in standby mode (the
system power supply is turned off and AC current is
present). When this light is off, either a power
supply, AC power, or a light has failed.
Attention
If this light is off, it does not mean there is no
electrical current present in the server. The
light might be burned out. To remove all
electrical current from the server, you must
unplug the server power cords from the
electrical outlets.
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
System POST Complete Light: This green light is
on when the power-on self-test (POST) completes
without any errors.
SCSI Hard Disk Drive Activity Light: This green
light is on when there is activity on a hard disk
drive.
Processor Activity Lights: These green lights
indicate activity on each of the installed
microprocessors.
System Error Light: This amber light is on when a
system error occurs. A light on the diagnostics LED
panel will also be on to further isolate the error.
(For more information, see “Status LEDs” on
page 63.)
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity Light: When
this green light is on, there is transmit or receive
activity to or from the server.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
205
.7/
.8/
206
Ethernet Link Status Light: When this green light
is on, there is an active connection on the Ethernet
port.
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps: When this green light
is on, the Ethernet speed is 100 Mbps. When this
light is off, the Ethernet speed is 10 Mbps.
Netfinity Server HMM
Information LED panel cover removal
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
To remove the information LED panel cover, do the
following:
1. Remove the door (see “Server door and trim bezels
removal” on page 276).
2. Remove the right side panel (see “Side cover(s)
removal” on page 278).
3. Remove the information LED panel cover.
a. Place your fingers inside the right side of the
cover, near the latch tab .1/.
b. Move the end of the cover away from the right
side of server until the latch tab .1/ on the cover
is released from the slot on the side of the
server.
c. Gently lift up on the cover and pivot the right
side of the cover away from the front of the
server.
d. Gently move the cover to the left to release the
left latch tab .2/ and remove the cover from the
server.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
207
Information LED panel assembly
removal
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
To remove the information LED panel assembly, do the
following:
1. Remove the server door, see “Server door and trim
bezels removal” on page 276.
2. Remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
3. Remove the side covers (see “Side cover(s) removal”
on page 278).
4. Remove the front bezel, leaving the information LED
panel cover attached. See “Front bezel removal” on
page 195.
5. Disconnect the information LED panel assembly cable
.6/.
6. Remove the information LED panel assembly .4/.
a. Remove the information LED panel assembly
screws .5/; then, remove the assembly .4/.
208
Netfinity Server HMM
Input/output connectors and expansion
slots
The following illustration shows the expansion slots and
the input/output connectors (ports) on the rear of the
server.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
PCI Expansion Slots: The server has five
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) expansion
slots. Four of the PCI slots support hot-plug PCI
adapters. The remaining, non-hot-plug PCI slot
supports only a short adapter.
Many adapters provide bus-master capabilities,
which enable the adapters to perform operations
without interrupting the system microprocessors.
ISA Expansion Slot: The server has one industry
standard architecture (ISA) expansion slot.
Many adapters provide bus-master capabilities,
which enable the adapters to perform operations
without interrupting the system microprocessors.
Parallel Connector: A signal cable for a parallel
device, such as a printer, connects here.
Serial A Connector: A serial signal cable for a
modem or other serial device connects to this 9-pin
serial connector. Serial port A can be shared by
the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor and the operating system. See “Devices
and I/O ports” on page 24 for port assignment
information. If you are using a 25-pin signal cable,
you need a 9-pin-to-25-pin adapter cable.
Attention Lights for Hot-Plug PCI Slots: Each
hot-plug PCI slot has an Attention light that is
visible from the rear of the server. An Attention
light flashes approximately once per second when it
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
209
.6/
.7/
.8/
.9/
.1ð/
.11/
is on. The meaning of the Attention lights is
defined by the operating system. Refer to the
operating system documentation to determine if it
supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if so, what the
Attention lights indicate.
Serial B Connector: A serial signal cable for a
modem or other serial device connects to this 9-pin
serial connector. Serial port B is used by the
operating system and cannot be shared by the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor.
See “Devices and I/O ports” on page 24 for port
assignment information. If you are using a 25-pin
signal cable, you need a 9-pin-to-25-pin adapter
cable.
Video Connector: The monitor signal cable
connects here.
Power Supply 1 Power Connector: The power
cord for power supply 1 connects here.
NetBAY3: The tower models of the Netfinity 5500
M20 come with a NetBAY3 attached. You can
install devices, such as the IBM EXP10 or a power
distribution unit, in the NetBAY3. Refer to
“Installing devices in the NetBAY3” for more
information.
Management C Connector: This connector is
used to attach a modem that is dedicated to
communication with the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor.
Universal Serial Bus 2 Connector: You can
attach an I/O device to this universal serial bus
(USB) connector. You need a 4-pin cable to
connect devices to USB 1 or 2.
Note
If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached
to the keyboard port, the USB ports are
disabled while the power-on self-test (POST) is
running and no USB devices will work during
POST.
.12/
Universal Serial Bus 1 Connector: You can
attach an I/O device to this universal serial bus
(USB) connector. You need a 4-pin cable to
connect devices to USB 1 or 2.
Note
If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached
to the keyboard port, the USB ports are
disabled while the power-on self-test (POST) is
running and no USB devices will work during
POST.
210
Netfinity Server HMM
.13/
.14/
.15/
.16/
.17/
.18/
.19/
Power Supply 1: The server comes with one
hot-swap power supply installed. See “Power
supplies” on page 250 for more information about
power supplies.
Keyboard Connector: The keyboard cable
connects here.
Ethernet Connector: The server has one RJ-45
Ethernet connector. This connector is for attaching
the network cable to the integrated 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX, twisted-pair transceiver.
Mouse Connector: The mouse cable connects
here. This port sometimes is called an
auxiliary-device or pointing-device port.
Management RS-485 Connector: This connector
is for connecting rack or multirack systems through
a daisy-chain cable in half-duplex mode.
SCSI Connector: External SCSI devices attach
here. For more information, see “External options”
on page 188.
External Connector Knockout: The server has
one external connector knockout that can be used
when you install options.
Note
For pin assignments and other details about these
connectors, see “External options” on page 188.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
211
Interior LED and speaker assembly
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
To remove the interior LED and speaker assembly
(diagnostic LEDs), do the following:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. Disconnect the cable .3/ attached to interior LED and
speaker assembly .1/.
3. Remove the interior LED and speaker assembly .1/.
a. Remove the interior LED and speaker assembly
mounting screws .2/. then; remove the interior
LED and speaker assembly .1/.
212
Netfinity Server HMM
Internal drives installation
Different types of drives allow the system to read multiple
types of media and store more data. Several types of
drives are available, such as:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Diskette
Hard disk
CD-ROM
Tape
Internal drive bays:
Internal drives are installed in bays. The server comes
with one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB diskette drive and one
CD-ROM drive.
.1/ Bay 1
.2/ Bay 2
.3/ Bay 3
.4/ Bay 4
.5/ Bay 5
.6/ Bay 6
.7/ Hot-swap bays
.8/ Removable-media bays
.9/ Bay B
.1ð/ Bay A
.11/ CD-ROM drive bay
.12/ Diskette drive bay
The server contains hardware that lets you replace a failed
hard disk drive without turning off the server. Therefore,
you have the advantage of continuing to operate the
system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed.
These drives are known as hot-swappable drives. They
are also referred to as hot-swap drives.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
213
Each hot-swap drive bay has two indicator lights on the
front of the server (see “Information LED panel” on
page 205). If the amber Hard Disk Status light for a drive
is lit continuously, that individual drive might be faulty and
needs to be checked. See “ServeRAID system board
controller” on page 66. When the Hard Disk Status light
indicates a drive fault, you can replace a hot-swap drive
without turning off the server.
Each hot-swap drive that you plan to install must have a
hot-swap-drive tray attached. The drive must have a
single connector attachment (SCA) connector.
Hot-swap-drive trays come with the hot-swap drives.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
The server comes with a preinstalled 3.5-inch,
1.44 MB diskette drive and a preinstalled IDE
CD-ROM drive.
Bays A and B come without a device installed. These
bays are for 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-media
drives, such as tape backup drives. Bays A and B
can be combined into a single full-high bay.
The Netfinity 5500 M20 supports only one diskette
drive.
The server does not support hard disk drives in bays
A and B because of cooling considerations.
Note
The server's EMI integrity and cooling are both
protected by having the left front bays
(removable-media bays) covered or occupied.
When you install a drive, save the filler panel
from the bay, in case you later remove the drive
and do not replace it with another.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you are installing a device with a 50-pin connector
in one of the removable-media bays (bays A–B), you
need a 68-pin to 50-pin converter.
The server supports six slim (1-inch) or three
half-high (1.6-inch), 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk
drives in the hot-swap bays.
The hot-swap bays connect to a SCSI backplane.
This backplane is the printed circuit board behind the
bay. The backplane supports up to six hard disk
drives.
The diskette drive uses 1 MB and 2 MB diskettes.
For optimum use, format 1 MB diskettes to 720 KB
and format 2 MB diskettes to 1.44 MB.
SCSI drives:
Some drives have a special design called small computer
system interface, or SCSI. This design allows you to
attach multiple drives to a single SCSI channel.
214
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. Any information about SCSI drives also applies to
other SCSI devices, such as tape drives.
2. If you plan to install both internal and external
SCSI devices, you must follow the instructions in
“External options” on page 188, in addition to
these instructions.
A 16-bit (wide) SCSI cable connects the hot-swap
backplane to one channel of the integrated RAID SCSI
controller on the system board. The other channel of the
integrated RAID SCSI controller is connected to the SCSI
connector on the back of your server.
A 16-bit SCSI cable with connectors for optional devices in
bays A and B is folded and restrained with a cable clamp
to the bottom of your server between the open bays and
the power supply area. This cable has a terminator on
one end.
If you want to install a device in bay A or B, you can
either:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Install an additional SCSI adapter
Disconnect the cable from the RAID channel 1
connector on the system board (see “System board
component locations” on page 279). (This cable
goes to the external SCSI connector on the back of
the server, so you will not be able to attach external
SCSI devices using the external SCSI connector.)
Use the 16-bit SCSI cable to connect the device in
bay A or B to the RAID channel 1 connector on the
system board.
SCSI IDs: Each SCSI device that is connected to an
individual channel of the RAID controller needs a unique
identification (ID) so that the controller can identify the
devices and ensure that different devices do not attempt to
transfer data at the same time. (The two channels of the
integrated RAID controller operate independently.) If you
need to set IDs for SCSI devices, refer to the instructions
that come with those devices.
The server automatically sets SCSI IDs for hot-swap hard
disk drives, according to the jumper settings on the SCSI
backplanes. The server uses the hard disk drive SCSI IDs
to send status information to the indicator lights above
each hot-swap bay.
The SCSI backplane in the server supports up to six
hot-swap bays. Table 11 on page 216 shows the default
SCSI IDs that the backplane assigns for hot-swap hard
disk drives.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
215
Table 11. Automatically assigned SCSI IDs
Bay
1
2
3
4
5
6
ID
0
1
2
3
4
5
Note: The default SCSI ID for the SCSI backplane is 15. The default
SCSI ID for each channel of the RAID controller is 7.
You can change the default ID addresses of the drives by
changing the jumper settings on the SCSI backplane. See
“SCSI backplane option jumpers” on page 274. A
simplified layout of the SCSI backplane is shown in “SCSI
backplane component locations” on page 273.
The processing sequence for SCSI devices is set through
the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program. The
sequence proceeds from the lowest SCSI ID to the highest
(0 to 6, then 8 to 15).
Termination (internal SCSI devices): SCSI buses
must be terminated at each end. The ends of the SCSI
buses in the server are already terminated.
All the hot-swap drives in the server have automatic
termination and the RAID controller provides termination at
the other end of the SCSI bus.
If you install SCSI devices in the removable-media bays
(bays A and B), you must disable the termination on the
devices; the RAID controller is already terminated and the
SCSI cable for devices in the removable-media drive bays
has a terminator at the other end. For example, when you
install a SCSI device in a removable-media drive bay (bay
A or B), set its termination to Disable, because the SCSI
cable supplied with your server is already terminated at the
end.
Refer to the information that come with the SCSI device for
instructions about setting device jumpers or switches that
control termination.
Preinstallation steps (all bays):
Before you install drives in the server, verify that you have
all the cables and any other equipment specified in the
documentation that comes with the internal drive. You
might also need to perform certain preinstallation activities.
Some of the steps are required only during the initial
installation of an option.
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Read the documentation that comes with the
internal drive.
1. Choose the bay in which you want to install the drive.
216
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Check the instructions that come with the drive to see
if you need to set any switches or jumpers on the
drive.
3. To install the drive, go to “Installing a 5.25-inch
removable-media drive” or “Installing a drive in a
hot-swap bay” on page 220.
Installing a 5.25-inch removable-media
drive:
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Read the documentation that comes with the
drive.
Prepare the drive for installation (see
“Preinstallation steps (all bays)” on page 216).
Note
The server's EMI integrity and cooling are both
protected by having the left front bays covered or
occupied. When you install a drive, save the filler
panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive
and do not replace it with another.
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Screws for filler panel
.2/ Filler panel with EMI shield
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
217
.3/ Slide rails
.4/ Screws for slide rails
.5/ Drive
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
Drive
SCSI cable for the removable-media drive bays
Shuttle
Thumbscrews
To install a removable-media drive in one of the left
front bays:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices (see
“Preparing to install options” on page 246) and
remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. Remove the NetBAY3 bezel and the media-bay trim
bezel. (See “Server door and trim bezels removal” on
page 276.)
3. Remove the screws .1/ and filler panel .2/ from the
bay opening. Save screws for later use in this
procedure. You do not need the filler panel when you
have a drive installed in the bay.
4. Touch the static-protective bag containing the drive to
any unpainted metal surface on the server; then,
remove the drive from the bag and place it on a
static-protective surface.
5. Set any jumpers or switches on the drive according to
the documentation that comes with the drive.
6. Use screws .4/ of the appropriate size and length to
attach a slide rail .3/ to each side of the drive .5/.
Note
The slide rails and screws are included in the
drive accessory kit that comes with the server.
218
Netfinity Server HMM
7. Place the drive so that the slide rails engage in the
bay guide rails. Push the drive into the bay and
attach it with the two screws .1/ from the filler panel.
8. Loosen the four thumbscrews .8/ on the shuttle at
the back of the server.
9. Pull the shuttle .7/ toward the back of the server.
10. Connect one of the connectors on the SCSI cable for
the removable-media drive bays .6/ to the back of
the drive .5/.
11. Connect a power cable to the back of the drive.
Power cables for removable-media drives come
installed in the server. The connectors are keyed and
can be inserted only one way.
12. If you have not previously done so, connect the SCSI
cable to either the RAID channel 1 connector on the
system board or to an additional SCSI adapter that
you have installed. For more information see “SCSI
IDs” on page 215.
13.
14.
15.
16.
If you choose to use the RAID channel 1 connector to
attach the removable-media drive:
a. Remove the processor support tray to allow
access to the RAID channel 1 connector. (See
“Processor support tray removal” on page 259.)
b. Disconnect the cable from the RAID channel 1
connector on the system board. (See “System
board component locations” on page 279 for the
location of the RAID channel 1 connector.) You
can leave the other end of the cable connected
to the external SCSI connector on the back of
the server, but you will not be able to use the
external SCSI connector to attach external SCSI
devices without adding an additional SCSI
adapter.
c. Connect the SCSI cable from the
removable-media drive to the RAID channel 1
connector on the system board.
d. Install the processor support tray. (See
“Processor support tray installation” on
page 261.)
If you are installing another 5.25-inch drive, do so at
this time. Otherwise, continue with the next step.
Push the shuttle .7/ toward the front of the server
and tighten the four thumbscrews .8/ at the back of
the shuttle.
Install the media-bay trim bezel and the NetBAY3
bezel that you removed earlier. (See “Installing the
trim bezels and server door” on page 179.)
If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the installation” on
page 178.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
219
Installing a drive in a hot-swap bay:
The bays on the right front of the server support hot-swap
drives only.
Note
You do not have to turn off the server to install
hot-swap drives in these bays. However, you must
turn off the server when performing any steps that
involve installing or removing cables.
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Read the documentation that comes with the
drive.
Review “ServeRAID system board controller” on
page 66 for information about the RAID controller
and disk-array configuration.
Prepare the drive for installation (see
“Preinstallation steps (all bays)” on page 216).
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Filler panel
.2/ Hot-swap hard disk drive
.3/ Drive tray handle (open position)
To install a drive in a hot-swap bay:
1. Unlock and open the server door (see “Preparing to
install options” on page 246).
220
Netfinity Server HMM
Attention
To maintain proper system cooling, do not
operate the server for more than two minutes
without either a drive or a filler panel installed for
each bay.
2. Remove the filler panel .1/ from one of the empty
hot-swap bays by inserting your finger into the
depression at the left side of the filler panel and
pulling it away from the server.
3. Install the hard disk drive .2/ in the hot-swap bay:
a. Ensure the tray handle .3/ is open (that is,
perpendicular to the drive).
b. Align the drive/tray assembly so that it engages
the guide rails in the bay.
c. Gently push the drive assembly into the bay until
the drive connects to the backplane.
d. Push the tray handle to the right until it locks.
4. Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify
that the hard disk drives are operating properly. See
“Status LEDs” on page 63 for details.
5. Close and lock the server door.
Note
Because the server has a RAID controller, you
must reconfigure the disk arrays after installing
hard disk drives.
Replacing a drive in a hot-swap bay:
You do not have to turn off the server to remove a drive
from the hot-swap bays.
Attention
1. Before you remove a hard disk drive that is not
defective from a hot-swap bay, back up all
important data.
2. To avoid damage to a hard disk drive, DO NOT
remove the drive from the hot-swap bay until it
has had time to spin down (approximately 30
seconds). Handle the drive carefully.
Before you attempt to remove a defective drive, thoroughly
review the information that appears on the server screen to
determine the location of the failed drive. “ServeRAID
system board controller” on page 66 explains the status
codes that the server uses to indicate a defective drive.
Also, if the amber Hard Disk Status light for a drive is lit
continuously, that individual drive is faulty and needs to be
replaced. If you remove a hard disk drive that is not
defective from an array that already has a defective hard
disk drive, all data in the array will be lost. This situation is
especially relevant if you assigned RAID level 1 or 5 to the
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
221
logical drives in the disk array. However, the RAID
controller can rebuild the data that you need, provided that
certain conditions are met. Refer to “ServeRAID system
board controller” on page 66 for further details.
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Read the documentation that comes with the
drive.
Review “ServeRAID system board controller” on
page 66 for information about the ServeRAID
controller and disk-array configuration.
Prepare the drive for installation (see
“Preinstallation steps (all bays)” on page 216).
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Hard disk drive
.2/ Drive tray handle (open position)
222
Netfinity Server HMM
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
Screws for half-high drive
Screw holes for slim-high drive
Drive tray
Drive
Connector for half-high drive
Screws for half-high drive connector
To replace a drive in a hot-swap bay:
1. Unlock and open the server door (see “Preparing to
install options” on page 246).
Attention
To maintain proper system cooling, do not
operate the server for more than two minutes
without either a drive or a filler panel installed for
each bay.
2. Remove the defective hard disk drive .1/ by placing
the handle .2/ on the drive to the open position
(perpendicular to the drive) and pulling the hot-swap
tray from the bay.
3. Remove the hard disk drive from the tray:
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
223
4.
5.
6.
7.
224
a. If the drive is a half-high drive, remove the two
screws .8/ that hold the connector .7/ to the
hot-swap tray.5/; then, remove the connector
from the back of the drive.
b. Remove the four screws .3/ (for a half-high
drive) or .4/ (for a slim-high drive) that attach
the drive .6/ to the hot-swap tray, and remove
the drive from the tray.
Place the new hard disk drive on the hot-swap tray
and attach the drive to the tray using four screws, as
follows:
a. If the drive is a half-high drive, use screws .3/ to
attach the drive to the tray. If the drive is a
slim-high drive, use screws in holes .4/ to attach
the drive to the tray.
b. As you tighten each screw, press on the metal
spring nearest the screw at the point indicated
by the arrow on the illustration of the drive tray.
c. If the drive is a half-high drive, plug the
connector .7/ to the back of the drive and
secure the connector to the drive with screws
.8/. (Slim-high drives do not need the
connector.)
Install the hard disk drive in the hot-swap bay:
a. Ensure the tray handle is open (that is,
perpendicular to the drive).
b. Align the drive/tray assembly so that it engages
the guide rails in the bay.
c. Push the drive assembly into the bay until the
drive connects to the backplane.
d. Push the tray handle to the right until it locks.
Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify
that the hard disk drive is installed properly. See
“Status LEDs” on page 63 for details.
Close and lock the server door.
Netfinity Server HMM
Installing devices in the NetBAY3
Use the following information for installing devices in the
NetBAY3.
Note
The illustrations in this section do not show the server
on top of the NetBAY3; however, you do not need to
remove the NetBAY3 to install devices.
General considerations:
You can install three types of devices in the NetBAY3:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Devices, such as the IBM EXP10, that sit on side rails
Cantilevered devices, such as a power distribution
unit (PDU), that are screwed to the front or rear of the
NetBAY3
Devices that sit on the NetBAY3 base plate
Notes
1. To allow the NetBAY3 front bezel to close,
devices with handles must not protrude out more
than 56 cm (2.2 in.). The following illustration of
the front bezel top-view cross section shows the
clearances.
2. All device cables must exit from the rear of the
NetBAY3.
56 mm (2.2 in.)
30 mm (1.2 in.)
Removing the rear panel:
Note
Do not remove the rear panel if you are not installing
a device in the NetBAY3.
1. Remove the NetBAY3 rear panel.
a. Remove the four screws.
b. Lift the rear panel off.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
225
2. After you remove the rear panel, do one of the
following:
Ÿ Install a device on rails in the NetBAY3. (Go to
“Installing devices on side rails.”)
Ÿ Install a cantilevered device in the NetBAY3.
(Go to “Installing cantilevered devices” on
page 228.)
Ÿ Install a device on the NetBAY3 base plate. (Go
to “Installing devices on the NetBAY3 base plate”
on page 229.)
Installing devices on side rails:
Installing devices that sit on side rails in a NetBAY3 is
similar to installing these devices in a rack enclosure. The
device side rails must be screwed to the NetBAY3 vertical
mounting rails. Follow the instructions in the
documentation that comes with the device and use the
following illustrations as a guide.
If you need to remove or move the cage nuts at the rear of
the NetBAY3 to hold the rails, go to “Removing cage nuts”
on page 227.
226
Netfinity Server HMM
Removing cage nuts:
Device installation might require the removal or moving of
the rear-pane cage nuts. If you need to move the cage
nuts, follow this procedure to move them and then go to
“Installing cage nuts” to install them in the correct position.
1. Hold the cage nut in place and compress the
cage-nut clip with a flat screwdriver blade.
2. With the cage nut-clip compressed, push the cage
nut-clip out of the square hole.
3. Release the screwdriver pressure on the clip. The
cage nut is now loose and can be removed from the
square hole.
Installing cage nuts:
The nuts go toward the inside of the NetBAY3. Make sure
you install all the cage nuts at the same level on the
mounting rails.
1. Hook one side of the cage-nut clip into the
rack-mounting-rail square hole.
2. Hold the cage nut in place and compress the
cage-nut clip with a flat screwdriver blade.
3. With the cage-nut clip compressed, push the cage-nut
clip into the square hole.
4. Release the screwdriver pressure on the clip. The
cage nut is now locked in the square hole.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
227
Installing cantilevered devices:
Installing cantilevered devices in a NetBAY3 is similar to
installing these devices in a rack enclosure. Cantilevered
devices can be installed in the front or rear of the
NetBAY3. The devices must be screwed to the NetBAY3
vertical mounting rails. Follow the instructions in the
documentation that comes with the device and use the
following figure as a guide.
228
Netfinity Server HMM
Installing devices on the NetBAY3 base
plate:
Some devices rest on the NetBAY3 base plate. These
devices must be screwed to the NetBAY3 vertical
mounting rails.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
229
Memory board component locations
A layout of the memory board is shown in the following
illustration.
20
22
21
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
16
17
18
.1/ DIMM 1 error LED (CR5)
.2/ DIMM connector 1 (J1)
.3/ DIMM 2 error LED (CR6)
.4/ DIMM connector 2 (J2)
.5/ DIMM 3 error LED (CR3)
.6/ DIMM connector 3 (J3)
.7/ DIMM 4 error LED (CR2)
.8/ DIMM connector 4 (J4)
.9/ Reserved (J13)
.1ð/ DIMM 5 error LED (CR7)
.11/ DIMM connector 5 (J5)
.12/ DIMM 6 error LED (CR4)
.13/ DIMM connector 6 (J6)
.14/ DIMM 7 error LED (CR1)
.15/ DIMM connector 7 (J7)
.16/ DIMM 8 error LED (CR8)
.17/ DIMM connector 8 (J8)
.18/ Memory board connector to processor board
.19/ Reserved (might not be present) (J15)
.2ð/ Reserved (J12)
.21/ Reserved (might not be present) (J14)
.22/ Reserved (J9)
.23/ Reserved (J11)
230
Netfinity Server HMM
Memory board jumpers
Table 12 contains the names and descriptions of the
jumper blocks located on the memory board.
Table 12. Memory board jumpers
Jumper Name
Description
.9/ J13 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and
3.
.19/ J15 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.2ð/ J12 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and
3.
.21/ J14 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.22/ J9 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and
3.
.23/ J11 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and
3.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
231
Memory board removal
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Refer to the following illustrations when performing the
following procedure. To re-install the memory board after
it has been removed, reverse the following procedure.
Note
When inserting the memory board into its slot on the
processor board, be sure to push down on the edges
of the board itself and not on its handle.
Note
The illustrations show only the processor support tray,
processor board, and memory board for simplicity; you
do not need to remove the processor support tray
from the server to remove the memory board.
.1/ Processor support tray cover
.2/ Quarter-turn fasteners
232
Netfinity Server HMM
.3/ Thumbscrew
.4/ Memory board
.5/ Memory board handle
To remove the memory board, do the following:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
“Preparing to install options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. Turn the quarter-turn fasteners .2/ on the processor
support tray cover .1/ one quarter turn and remove
the cover from the processor support tray.
3. Remove the thumbscrew .3/ from the side of the
processor support tray.
4. Lift up on the memory board handle .5/ and remove
the memory board .4/ from the server.
5. Place the memory board .4/ on a static-protective
surface, such as the static-protective package in
which an option came.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
233
Memory modules
Adding memory to the server is an easy way to make
programs run faster. You can increase the amount of
memory in the server by installing options called
memory-module kits. Each kit contains one
industry-standard, dual-inline memory module (DIMM).
The server uses a non-interleaved memory configuration.
The server comes with a memory module installed on the
memory board in connector J1, the connector nearest the
top of the server. Install additional memory modules in
connectors J5, J2, J6, J3, J7, J4, and J8, in that order.
(See the following illustration for memory connector
locations.) If you mix DIMM sizes, install the largest-sized
DIMM in connector J1, the next-largest-sized DIMM in
connector J5, and so forth.
Notes
1. The memory-module kit sizes available for the
server are 128 MB, 256 MB, and 512 MB. The
server supports a minimum of 128 MB and a
maximum of 4 GB of system memory.
2. Install only 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, registered
DIMMs. Only 100 MHz, 72-bit, registered,
synchronous, error correcting code (ECC), x4
configuration DIMM memory is supported for the
128 MB, 256 MB, and 512 MB DIMMs.
3. Installing or removing memory modules changes
the configuration information in the server.
Therefore, after installing or removing a DIMM,
you must save the new configuration information
in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. When
you restart the server, the system displays a
message indicating that the memory configuration
has changed. Start the Configuration/Setup
Utility program and select Save Settings. See
“Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on
page 22 for more information.
Refer to the following illustrations of the processor support
tray and the processor board while you perform the steps
in this procedure.
Note
For simplicity, the illustrations show only the processor
support tray and processor board; you do not need to
remove the processor support tray and processor
board to install a memory module.
234
Netfinity Server HMM
.1/ Processor support tray cover
.2/ Quarter-turn fasteners
.3/ Thumbscrew
.4/ Memory board
.5/ Memory board handle
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
235
.6/ Retaining clips
.7/ Memory connector 1 (J1)
.8/ Memory connector 2 (J2)
.9/ Memory connector 3 (J3)
.1ð/ Memory connector 4 (J4)
.11/ Memory connector 5 (J5)
.12/ Memory connector 6 (J6)
.13/ Memory connector 7 (J7)
.14/ Memory connector 8 (J8)
.15/ DIMM
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Read the documentation that comes with the
option.
To install a memory module:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
“Preparing to install options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
236
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Turn the two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ on the
processor support tray cover .1/ one quarter turn and
remove the cover from the processor support tray.
3. Remove the memory board .4/ (see “Memory board
removal” on page 232).
4. Locate the memory-module connectors on the
memory board. Determine the memory-module
connector into which you will install the memory
module. (See the notes at the beginning of this
procedure.)
5. Touch the static-protective package containing the
memory-module kit to any unpainted metal surface on
the server. Then, remove the memory module from
the package.
Note
To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging
the memory-module connectors, handle the clips
gently.
6. Install the memory module:
a. Turn the memory module (DIMM) .15/ so that
the pins align correctly with the connector .11/.
b. Insert the DIMM into the connector by pressing
on one edge of the DIMM and then on the other
edge of the DIMM. Be sure to press straight into
the connector. Be sure that the retaining clips
.6/ snap into the closed positions.
c. Make sure the retaining clips .6/ are in the
closed position. If a gap exists between the
DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM has not
been properly installed. In this case, open the
retaining clips and remove the DIMM; then,
reinsert the DIMM.
d. Repeat these steps for each memory module
that you install.
7. Install the memory board .4/ (see “Memory board
removal” on page 232).
8. Install the processor support tray cover .1/ and turn
the two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ one quarter turn to
secure the cover.
9. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the installation” on
page 178.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
237
Microprocessor installation
The server comes with one microprocessor installed on the
processor board. If you install additional microprocessors,
the server can operate as a symmetric multiprocessing
(SMP) server. With SMP, certain operating systems and
application programs can distribute the processing load
between the microprocessors. This enhances performance
for database and point-of-sale applications, integrated
manufacturing solutions, and other applications.
Note
1. Read “Safety information” on page 338.
2. Thoroughly review the documentation that comes
with the microprocessor, so that you can
determine whether you need to update the server
basic input/output system (BIOS). The latest
level of BIOS for the server is available through
the World Wide Web and the IBM Bulletin Board
System (BBS). Refer to “Online support” on
page iv for the appropriate World Wide Web
addresses and bulletin-board telephone numbers.
3. Obtain an SMP-capable operating system
(optional). For a list of supported operating
systems, see http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/compat/
on the World Wide Web.
Attention
To avoid damage and ensure proper server operation
when you install new or additional microprocessors,
use microprocessors that have the same cache size
and type, and the same clock speed. Microprocessor
internal and external clock frequencies must be
identical.
238
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes
1. The following illustrations might differ slightly from
the hardware.
2. If you replace the microprocessor in the server
with a microprocessor that operates at a different
speed, be sure to set the microprocessor core
frequency selection jumpers correctly. See
“Processor board jumpers” on page 255 for more
information.
3. The microprocessor that is installed in
microprocessor connector J1 is CPU or
microprocessor 1. If a microprocessor is installed
in microprocessor connector J2, it is CPU or
microprocessor 2; a microprocessor installed in
J3 is CPU or microprocessor 3; a microprocessor
installed in J4 is CPU or microprocessor 4. See
Table 13 on page 240 for information on the
order in which microprocessors and voltage
regulator modules (VRMs) must be installed. If
the server has only one microprocessor installed,
that microprocessor is installed in microprocessor
connector J1 and is the startup (boot) processor.
If more than one microprocessor is installed, the
microprocessor installed in the highest numbered
microprocessor connector (normally J4) is the
startup processor and the microprocessor
installed in J1 is the application processor.
4. VRM 2 is shared between microprocessor 1 and
microprocessor 2. VRM 5 is shared between
microprocessor 4 and microprocessor 6.
5. Terminator cards are installed with the arrow
pointing towards the rear of the system.
The following table shows the order in which additional
microprocessors and VRMs should be installed.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
239
240
Netfinity Server HMM
√
√
√
√
T
J12
(VRM 1)
Continued on next page
VRM Connectors
J4 (P4)
J2 (P2)
J1 (P1)
J3 (P3)
Microprocessor Connectors
Three Microprocessors Installed
√
T
√
√
J12
(VRM 1)
T
VRM Connectors
J4 (P4)
J2 (P2)
J1 (P1)
J3 (P3)
Microprocessor Connectors
Two Microprocessors Installed
√
T
√
T
J12
(VRM 1)
T
VRM Connectors
J4 (P4)
J2 (P2)
J1 (P1)
J3 (P3)
Microprocessor Connectors
One Microprocessor Installed
√
J13
(VRM 2)
√
J13
(VRM 2)
√
J13
(VRM 2)
√
J14
(VRM 3)
J14
(VRM 3)
J14
(VRM 3)
J16
(VRM 4)
J16
(VRM 4)
J16
(VRM 4)
√
J17
(VRM 5)
√
J17
(VRM 5)
J17
(VRM 5)
√
J18
(VRM 6)
√
J18
(VRM 6)
J18
(VRM 6)
Note: “T” indicates an installed terminator card; “√” indicates an installed microprocessor or VRM. A terminator card must be installed in each microprocessor connector that does not contain
a microprocessor.
Table 13 (Page 1 of 2). Microprocessor and VRM installation order
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
241
√
√
√
√
J12
(VRM 1)
√
VRM Connectors
J4 (P4)
J2 (P2)
J1 (P1)
J3 (P3)
Microprocessor Connectors
Four Microprocessors Installed
√
J13
(VRM 2)
Table 13 (Page 2 of 2). Microprocessor and VRM installation order
√
J14
(VRM 3)
√
J16
(VRM 4)
√
J17
(VRM 5)
√
J18
(VRM 6)
Refer to the following illustrations of the processor support
tray and processor board while you perform the following
steps.
Note
For simplicity, the illustrations show only the processor
support tray and processor board; you do not need to
remove the processor support tray and processor
board to install a microprocessor.
.1/ Processor support tray cover
.2/ Quarter-turn fasteners
242
Netfinity Server HMM
.3/ Latches
.4/ Second installed microprocessor (microprocessor
4)
.5/ First installed microprocessor (microprocessor 1)
.6/ Microprocessor connector 1 (J1)
.7/ Microprocessor connector 2 (J2)
.8/ Microprocessor connector 3 (J3)
.9/ Microprocessor connector 4 (J4)
.1ð/ Terminator card
.11/ VRM connectors 5 (J17) and 6 (J18)
.12/ VRMs for second microprocessor (VRMs 5 and
6)
.13/ VRMs for first microprocessor (VRMs 1 and 2)
To install an additional microprocessor:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
“Preparing to install options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. Turn the two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ on the
processor support tray cover .1/ one quarter turn and
remove the cover from the processor support tray.
3. Determine the connectors where the microprocessor
and VRMs are to be installed. See Table 13 on
page 240.
4. Remove the terminator card .1ð/ from the
microprocessor connector .9/. Store the terminator
card in a safe place in the static-protective package
that the new microprocessor is shipped in; you will
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
243
need to install it again if you ever remove the
microprocessor.
5. Install the microprocessor:
a. Touch the static-protective package containing
the new microprocessor to any unpainted metal
surface on the server; then, remove the
microprocessor from the package.
b. Hold the microprocessor .4/ by the open latches
.3/, and center the microprocessor over the
microprocessor connector .9/.
Attention
Make sure the microprocessor is oriented
and aligned correctly before you try to close
the latches.
c. Carefully close the latches .3/ to seat the
microprocessor in the connector.
6. Install the voltage regulator modules (VRMs) .12/
included in the microprocessor kit:
a. Remove fan assembly 4 to allow access to the
VRM connectors. See “Hot-swap fan assembly
replacement” on page 202 for instructions on
removing fan assembly 4.
b. Determine the connectors where the VRMs are
to be installed. See Table 13 on page 240.
The microprocessor upgrade kit comes with two
VRMs. You might need to install only one,
depending upon the number of microprocessors
in the server.
c. Center the VRM .12/ over the connector .11/.
Make sure that the VRM is oriented and aligned
correctly; then, press the VRM into the
connector.
d. Repeat the preceding step for the second VRM,
if needed. If you need to install only one VRM,
store the remaining VRM in a safe place to use
as a replacement, if you ever need one.
Note
If you remove the microprocessor at some
time in the future, remember to install the
terminator card in the appropriate
microprocessor connector and to remove the
VRMs for that microprocessor.
e. Install fan assembly 4. See “Hot-swap fan
assembly replacement” on page 202 for
instructions on installing fan assembly 4.
7. Install the processor support tray cover .1/ and turn
the two quarter-turn fasteners .2/ one quarter turn to
secure the cover.
244
Netfinity Server HMM
8. If you have other options to install or remove, do so
now; otherwise, go to “Completing the installation” on
page 178.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
245
Preparing to install options
Note
1. Read “Safety information” on page 338.
2. You do not need to turn the server off to work
with hot-plug or hot-swap devices, such as
hot-plug PCI adapters, and hot-swap hard disk
drives.
3. Make sure that you have an adequate number of
properly grounded electrical outlets for the server,
monitor, and any other options that you intend to
install.
4. Place the server in a location that is dry. Rain or
spilled liquids might damage the server.
5. Leave about 50 mm (2 inches) of ventilated
space on the right and left sides of the server to
allow the server cooling system to work properly.
Leave 100 mm (4 inches) of clearance at the rear
of the server for cables.
6. Have a supply of 1 MB and 2 MB, 3.5-inch
diskettes available.
7. Back up all important data before you make
changes to disk drives.
8. Have a small, flat-blade screwdriver available.
9. For a list of supported options for the Netfinity
5500 M20, refer to
http://www.pc.ibm.com/us/compat on the World
Wide Web.
If you are:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Installing or removing a hot-plug PCI adapter, go to
“Adapters” on page 161.
Installing or replacing a hot-swap hard disk drive, go
to “Internal drives installation” on page 213.
Installing or replacing a hot-swap power supply, go to
“Hot-swap power supply installation” on page 196.
Removing a hot-swap power supply, go to “Hot-swap
power supply removal” on page 200.
Replacing a hot-swap fan, go to “Hot-swap fan
assembly replacement” on page 202.
Installing or removing an option not listed in the
preceding list, continue with the following steps.
1. Unlock and open the server door.
Caution
If the device has doors, be sure to remove or
secure the doors before moving or lifting the
device to avoid personal injury. The doors will
not support the weight of the device.
246
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Remove all media (diskettes, CDs, optical discs, or
tapes) from the drives; then, turn off the server and all
attached options.
Caution
The Power Control button on the device and the
power switch on the power supply do not turn off
the electrical current supplied to the device. The
device also might have more than one power
cord. To remove all electrical current from the
device, ensure that all power cords are
disconnected from the power source.
2
1
3. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the
server, disconnect the telephone line from the server
and from the wall outlet.
4. Unplug all power cords (cables) from electrical
outlets.
5. Note the location of the remaining cables and cords;
then disconnect them from the back of the server.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
247
Danger
Electrical current from power, telephone, and
communication cables is hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Do not connect or disconnect any cables or
perform installation, maintenance, or
reconfiguration of this product during an electrical
storm.
Connect all power cords to a properly wired and
grounded electrical outlet.
Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment
that will be attached to this product.
When possible, use one hand only to connect or
disconnect signal cables.
Never turn on any equipment when there is
evidence of fire, water, or structural damage.
Disconnect the attached power cords,
telecommunications systems, networks, and
modems before you open the device covers,
unless instructed otherwise in the installation and
configuration procedures.
Go to “Top cover removal” on page 284; then continue
with the procedure which referred you to this procedure.
248
Netfinity Server HMM
Power backplane removal
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
To remove the power backplane, to the following
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
“Preparing to install options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. To access the power backplane cables, slide the
shuttle to the rear of the system (see “Shuttle
removal” on page 277).
3. Disconnect the power backplane cables.
4. Remove the power backplane .1/.
a. Remove the 5 power backplane screws .2/ on
the two top tabs and across the bottom front
flange of the power backplane; then, remove the
power backplane.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
249
Power supplies
The following illustration shows the power supplies and
power lights on the server.
Note
See “Safety information” on page 338 for information
about power cords for use with your server in your
country or region.
.1/
Power Supply 1: The server comes with one
hot-swap power supply installed. You can install a
second hot-swap power supply to provide
redundant power. You cannot hot swap a power
supply if the server has only one power supply
installed. (See “Hot-swap power supply installation”
on page 196 for instructions.)
.2/
AC Power Light: This light provides status
information about the power supply. During normal
operation, both the AC and DC Power lights are on.
For any other combination of lights, see “Power
supply LEDs” on page 251 for more information.
.3/
DC Power Light: This light provides status
information about the power supply. During normal
operation, both the AC and DC Power lights are on.
For any other combination of lights, see “Power
supply LEDs” on page 251 for more information.
.4/
Power Supply 1 Power Connector: The power
cord for power supply 1 connects here.
.5/
Filler Panel: You can remove this filler panel and
install a second hot-swap power supply in power
supply bay 2. The second power supply provides
redundant power.
250
Netfinity Server HMM
Power supply LEDs
The AC and DC Power LEDs on the power supply provide
status information about the power supply. See “Power
supplies” on page 250 for the location of these LEDs.
The following table describes the AC and DC Power LEDs.
AC Power
LED
DC Power
LED
Description and action
On
On
The power supply is on and
operating correctly.
On
Off
There is a DC power problem.
Possible causes:
1. The Power Control button
on the front of the server is
in the Off position.
Action: Press the Power
Control button to start the
server.
2. The power supply has
failed.
Action: Replace the
power supply.
If the problem persists, go to
“General checkout” on page 8.
Off
Off
There is an AC power problem.
Possible causes:
1. There is no AC power to
the power supply.
Actions: Verify that:
Ÿ The power cord is
properly connected to
the server.
Ÿ The power outlet
functions properly.
2. The power supply has
failed.
Action: Replace the
power supply.
If the problem persists, go to
“General checkout” on page 8.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
251
Power supply filler panel
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
To remove the power supply filler panel, do the following:
1. Remove the power supply filler panel screws .1/;
then, remove the power supply filler panel.
252
Netfinity Server HMM
NetBAY3 bezel installation
The NetBAY3 bezel is shipped, unattached, inside the
NetBAY3.
To install the NetBAY3 bezel:
1. Remove the package containing the NetBAY3 bezel
and unpack the bezel.
2. Hook the tabs on the left side of the NetBAY3 bezel
around the posts on the NetBAY3.
3. Gently push the right side of the bezel toward the
server until the bezel snaps into place.
4. Lock the NetBAY3 bezel.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
253
Processor board component locations
A layout of the processor board is shown in the following
illustration.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
46
1
3
2
4
37
36
35
34
33
5
6
7
8
32
9
31
30
29
10
11
12
13
14
28
15
27
26
16
17
18
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
.1/ Microprocessor 1 connector (J1)
.2/ Microprocessor 1 error LED (CR16)
.3/ Microprocessor 1 fan power connector (J7)
.4/ Microprocessor 2 fan power connector (J8)
.5/ Microprocessor 2 connector (J2)
.6/ Microprocessor 2 error LED (CR15)
.7/ Power control connector (to power backplane)
(J33)
.8/ Reserved (might not be present) (J15)
.9/ Power connector (to power backplane) (J32)
.1ð/ Microprocessor 3 error LED (CR18)
.11/ Reserved (might not be present) (J22)
.12/ Reserved (might not be present) (J23)
.13/ Microprocessor 3 connector (J3)
.14/ Microprocessor 4 error LED (CR21)
.15/ Power connector (J35)
.16/ Microprocessor 4 connector (J4)
.17/ Microprocessor 3 fan power connector (J9)
.18/ Microprocessor 4 fan power connector (J10)
.19/ Memory board connector
.2ð/ Reserved (J24)
.21/ Reserved (J37)
.22/ Fan 4 connector (J36)
.23/ Reserved (might not be present) (J21)
.24/ Reserved (J20)
.25/ System board connector (on reverse side of
processor board)
.26/ VRM 6 connector (J18)
.27/ VRM 6 error LED (CR4)
254
Netfinity Server HMM
.28/ VRM 5 connector (J17)
.29/ VRM 5 error LED (CR7)
.3ð/ VRM 4 connector (J16)
.31/ VRM 4 error LED (CR2)
.32/ Reserved (J11)
.33/ VRM 3 connector (J14)
.34/ VRM 3 error LED (CR3)
.35/ VRM 2 connector (J13)
.36/ VRM 2 error LED (CR6)
.37/ VRM 1 connector (J12)
.38/ VRM 1 error LED (CR5)
.39/–.42/ Microprocessor core-frequency-selection
jumper block (J31–J28)
.43/ Reserved (J27)
.44/ Reserved (J25)
.45/ Reserved (J26)
.46/ Reserved (J19)
.47/ Reset system jumper block (J34)
Processor board jumpers
Table 14 on page 256 contains the names and
descriptions of the jumper blocks located on the processor
board. Table 15 on page 256 shows the microprocessor
core-frequency-selection jumper settings. The highlighted
numbers in the table refer to the highlighted numbers in
the illustration in “Processor board component locations”
on page 254.
Notes
1. Turn off the server, and disconnect the power
cords before moving any jumpers.
2. Be sure the microprocessor bus-to-core fraction
is set correctly. For example, if you have a 400
MHz2 microprocessor installed and the system
bus speed is 100 MHz (the default), jumpers
J28-J31 are set to a bus-to-core fraction of 4
(400/100). See Table 15 on page 256.
Attention
If the microprocessor bus-to-core fraction is incorrect,
system board components will overheat and
component damage might occur. Be sure that the
microprocessor core frequency selection is properly
set.
2
400 MHz denotes internal clock speed of the microprocessor
only; other factors also affect application performance.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
255
Table 14. Processor board jumpers
Jumper Name
Description
.2ð/ J24 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.22/ J37 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.23/ J21 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and
3.
.24/ J20 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.39/–.42/ J31–J28
Microprocessor
core frequency
selection
For the core/bus fraction 4 (400/100 MHz),
jumpers are installed on pins 1 and 2 of J28,
J30, and J31 and on pins 2 and 3 of J29.
For the core/bus fraction 4.5 (450/100 MHz),
jumpers are installed on pins 1 and 2 of J28
and J31 and on pins 2 and 3 of J29 and J30.
For the core/bus fraction 5 (500/100 MHz),
jumpers are installed on pins 1 and 2 of J30
and J31 and on pins 2 and 3 of J28 and J29.
.43/ J27 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.44/ J25 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.45/ J26 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and
3.
.47/J34 Reset
system
The default position for normal operation is no
jumper on J34.
Installing a jumper on pins 1 and 2 will force
the system into the reset state.
Table 15. Microprocessor core frequency selection
switch (SW1) settings
Core/bus
fraction
J28
Jumper
J29
Jumper
J30
Jumper
J31
Jumper
4
Pins 1
and 2
Pins 2
and 3
Pins 1
and 2
Pins 1
and 2
4.5
Pins 1
and 2
Pins 2
and 3
Pins 2
and 3
Pins 1
and 2
5
Pins 2
and 3
Pins 2
and 3
Pins 1
and 2
Pins 1
and 2
Note: For jumper settings for other speed microprocessors, refer to the
label on the inside top cover of the server.
256
Netfinity Server HMM
Processor board removal
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
To remove the processor board, do the following.
1. Remove the processor support tray (see “Processor
support tray removal” on page 259).
2. Remove memory board (see “Memory board removal”
on page 232).
3. Remove Fan 4 (see “Hot-swap fan assembly
replacement” on page 202).
4. Remove all VRMs from their slots.
5. Remove all microprocessors and terminators from
microprocessor connectors 1 through 4 (see
“Microprocessor installation” on page 238).
6. Disconnect all processor board cables.
7. Remove microprocessor brackets.
a. Remove 4 screws .5/ on each bracket .3/; then,
lift brackets out of the support tray .4/.
8. Remove the processor board screws .1/.
9. Remove the processor board .2/.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
257
a. Lift the processor board .2/ out of the support
tray .4/.
B
A
2
1) Tilt the side of the processor board .2/ into
which the memory board attaches away
from its side of the support tray .4/ (arrow
.A/).
2) Slide the lower edge of the processor board
.2/ towards the memory board side of the
support tray .4/; then, lift it out of the
support tray (arrow .B/).
258
Netfinity Server HMM
Processor support tray removal
The RAID channel 1 connector (J7) and some jumper
blocks are located on the system board under the
processor support tray. To access these components, you
must remove the processor support tray.
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this section.
Note
The illustrations in this section might differ slightly from
your hardware.
.1/ Processor support tray
.4/ Thumbscrews
.5/ Processor support tray handles
To remove the processor support tray:
1. Disconnect all power cables from the rear of the
server.
2. Remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
3. Remove the four blue thumbscrews .4/ on the
processor support tray .1/.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
259
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
If you have not already done so, you might
want loosen the four thumbscrews on the
shuttle at the back of the server and pull the
shuttle toward the back of the server to
allow easier access to the cables. (See
“Installing a 5.25-inch removable-media
drive” on page 217 for an illustration of the
shuttle and the thumbscrews.)
The processor support tray should always
be removed or replaced using the handles
on the support tray cover. If the cover is not
on the support tray, you must install it before
removing or replacing the tray.
4. Disconnect the cables from the cable connectors on
the processor board. (The cable connectors are
located at the end of the processor support tray
toward the front of the processor.)
5. Using the processor support tray handles .5/,
carefully lift the processor support tray from the
server.
6. Place the processor support tray in a safe place until
you are ready to install it again.
260
Netfinity Server HMM
Processor support tray installation
See the illustration in “Processor support tray removal” on
page 259 while you perform the steps in this section.
To install the processor support tray:
1. Grasp the processor support tray .1/ by the handles
.5/, lift the support tray, and orient the processor
support tray with the cable connectors toward the
front of the server.
Attention
When you install the processor support tray in
the server, make sure that it is aligned correctly
before you seat it in the shuttle. Incorrect seating
might damage server components.
2. Align the processor support tray with the processor
support tray guide on the inside rear of the server.
Carefully lower the processor support tray into the
shuttle until it is fully seated.
3. Install and tighten the four blue thumbscrews .4/ on
the processor support tray .1/.
4. Connect the cables that you disconnected when you
removed the processor support tray.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
261
Rack installation
The following information provides instructions for installing
a server in a rack and for removing a server from a rack.
The server comes with all the rack installation hardware
(rack models only).
>82 kg (180 lbs)
Caution
Do not place any object weighing more than 82 kg
(180 lbs) on top of the rack model of the server.
Note
1. Review “Safety information” on page 338 before
you begin.
2. You will need the following items:
Ÿ An assortment of small screwdrivers
Ÿ 8-inch adjustable wrench or pliers
3. Some of the installation procedures require three
people.
4. To ensure rack stability, plan the installation of
servers in the rack starting from the bottom. For
more information, refer to the IBM Netfinity Rack
Configurator program provided with the
ServerGuide CDs.
5. Review the documentation that comes with the
rack enclosure for safety or cabling
considerations. Ensure that the planned
installation is within the rack's guidelines for heat
generation, electrical requirements, air flow, and
mechanical loading.
6. Verify that the rack can meet the operating
parameters, as detailed in “Specifications” on
page 61.
Installing and removing the server:
During the installation procedure, you must install parts on
the rack and the server. This process can be divided into
two parts:
Ÿ
Ÿ
262
Preparing the rack
Installing the server in the rack
Netfinity Server HMM
Preparing the rack:
k18 kg
(37 lbs)
k32 kg
(70.5 lbs)
k55 kg
(121.2 lbs)
Caution
Use safe practices when lifting.
You will use the following parts:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
IBM Installation Template
Two slide-bracket assemblies
One cable-management arm
Two bezel brackets
Six screws (for attaching the bezel brackets)
Sixteen long screws (M6 by 16 mm)
Eight short screws (M4 by 8 mm)
Six cage nuts
Two hex nuts (M6)
Four nut bars
Four lift handles (shipped with some servers)
Cable ties
One server bracket (for attaching the cable
management arm to the server)
Attention
To ensure rack stability, plan the installation of servers
in the rack starting from the bottom.
To attach the mounting hardware to the rack:
1. Remove the rack front door. Refer to the rack
documentation for instructions.
2. Mark the positions of the slide-bracket assemblies,
bezel brackets, and the cable-management arm on
the rack:
a. Position the installation template on the front
mounting rails on the rack, aligning the holes.
b. Mark the holes for the slide-bracket assemblies
and bezel brackets.
c. Move the template to the same U level at the
rear of the server and mark the locations for the
slide-bracket assemblies and cable-management
arm.
d. Install the six cage nuts at the locations marked
on the mounting rails.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
263
3. Attach a slide-bracket assembly to the front of the
rack:
Notes
1. Get another person to help you attach the
slide-bracket assemblies to the rack.
2. The slide-bracket assemblies can be
installed on either the left or right side of the
rack.
3. Refer to the illustrations for examples of the
proper alignment of the slide-bracket
assemblies.
a. Position the slide-bracket assembly behind the
mounting rail so that the slides will extend out
from the front of the rack.
b. If necessary, loosen the screws at the rear of the
slide bracket assembly and adjust the length of
the slide-bracket to fit the mounting rail. Tighten
the screws.
Screws
c. Position a nut bar behind the slide-bracket
assembly.
d. Insert screws (6M by 16 mm) through the
mounting rail, the slide-bracket assembly, and
nut bars. Do not tighten the screws.
264
Netfinity Server HMM
4. Attach the slide-bracket assembly to the rear of the
rack:
a. Position the slide-bracket assembly inside the
mounting rail.
b. Position a nut bar behind the slide-bracket
assembly.
c. Insert screws (6M by 16 mm) through the
mounting rail to the slide-bracket assembly. Do
not tighten the screws.
5. Attach the other slide-bracket assembly to the front
and rear of the rack.
6. Push the slide-bracket assemblies to the outermost
positions on the rack.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
265
7. Tighten all screws to secure both slide-bracket
assemblies. If you are using a torque screwdriver,
use the following torque setting: 8–11 Nm (70.8–97.0
in/lbs).
8. Attach the cable-management arm to the rear of the
rack:
a. Position the cable-management arm bracket on
the outside of the mounting rail.
b. Insert screws (M6 by 16 mm) through the
cable-management arm bracket, mounting rail,
and cage nuts. Tighten the screws.
c. Position the server bracket on the
cable-management arm.
d. Insert screws through the cable-management
arm and the server bracket. Attach M6 hex nuts
to the screws and tighten the hex nuts.
266
Netfinity Server HMM
Installing the server in the rack: You will use eight
screws (M4 by 8).
To install the server in the rack:
1. Fully extend the slide-bracket assemblies until they
lock.
2. Install the four lift handles on the sides of the server:
a. Press in on the sides of the lift handle near the
tabs and insert the handle tabs into the slots on
the side of the server.
b. Move the handle up in the slots so that the
hooked part of each tab is inside the server.
Release the pressure on the sides of the handle.
c. Install the remaining three lift handles.
k18 kg
(37 lbs)
k32 kg
(70.5 lbs)
k55 kg
(121.2 lbs)
Caution
Use safe practices when lifting.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
267
3. Lift and position the server so that the bayonet slots
on the server are above the bayonets on the
slide-bracket assemblies.
4. Lower the server and slip the bayonets into the
bayonet slots.
5. Insert screws through one slide-bracket assembly and
server side. Tighten the screws. Repeat this step for
the other slide-bracket assembly on the opposite side
of the server. This secures the server.
6. Remove the four lift handles from the sides of the
server:
a. Grasp the lift handle and press in on the sides of
the lift handle near the tabs until the tabs touch
the inside edges of the slots.
b. Move the handle down in the slots so that the
hooked parts of the tabs clear the top edges of
the slots; then, pull the handle away from the
server.
c. Remove the remaining three handles. Store the
handles in a safe place.
Note
When the drawer is fully extended, safety latches
on the slide-brackets lock into place. To release
the safety latch, press the latch on each side of
the rack.
7. Press the safety latches and slide the drawer about
halfway into the rack.
268
Netfinity Server HMM
8. Attach the cable-management arm to the server using
the captive screws.
9. Attach the monitor, keyboard, and power cables to
the corresponding connectors on the server. Refer to
the rack documentation for instructions.
10. Attach the cables to the cable-management arm using
cable ties.
11. Attach the two bezel brackets (one for each side) to
the front sides of the server with the six screws
provided.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
269
12. Secure the server in the rack:
a. Slide the server into the rack.
b. Secure the server to both sides of the rack by
inserting screws (M6 by 16 mm) through the
bezel brackets, mounting rails, and cage nuts.
13. Install the rack front door.
14. To complete the installation, refer to the
documentation that came with the rack.
Removing the server from a rack
Note
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
Turn off the server.
Follow any additional installation and safety
instructions that come with the rack.
To remove the server from a rack:
1. If you have a modem or fax machine attached to the
server, disconnect the telephone line from the
electrical outlet and the server.
270
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
If you are in the United Kingdom, you must
perform this step before disconnecting the power
cords.
2. Disconnect all cables and power cords from the rear
of the server.
3. Disconnect all power cords from the rack.
4. Remove the screws from the bezel brackets on each
side of the front bezel. Set them aside for later use.
5. Slide the server about halfway out of the rack.
6. Loosen the captive screws that secure the
cable-management arm.
7. Fully extend the slide-bracket assemblies until they
lock.
8. Remove the screws that attach the server to each
slide-bracket assembly.
k18 kg
(37 lbs)
k32 kg
(70.5 lbs)
k55 kg
(121.2 lbs)
Caution
Use safe practices when lifting.
9. Install the four lift handles on the sides of the server:
a. Press in on the sides of the lift handle near the
tabs and insert the handle tabs into the slots on
the side of the server.
b. Move the handle up in the slots so that the
hooked part of each tab is inside the server.
Release the pressure on the sides of the handle.
c. Install the remaining three lift handles.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
271
10. Lift the server from the slide-bracket assemblies and
place the server on a flat, nonconductive surface.
272
Netfinity Server HMM
SCSI backplane component locations
The following simplified layout of the SCSI backplane
identifies the components. Refer to this figure when you
set the jumpers on the backplane.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
Wide (16-bit) SCSI connector
Option jumper block (J10)
SCSI hot-swap drive connectors (on reverse
side of backplane)
Repeater card connector
Power connector
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
273
SCSI backplane option jumpers
The option jumper block on the SCSI backplane defines
the SCSI IDs for hot-swap drives. See the illustration in
“SCSI backplane component locations” on page 273 for
the location of the option jumper block.
Table 16 summarizes the settings for the SCSI backplane
option jumper block (J10).
Table 16. Backplane option jumper block
Pins
Description
1–2
Reserved.
3–4
Reserved
5–6
Placing a jumper on these two pins enables
SCSI IDs 8–13
7–8
Reserved.
9–10
Reserved.
11–12
Placing a jumper on these two pins reverses
the SCSI IDs on the backplane.
Note: The default is no jumpers installed on the J10 jumper
block.
Table 17 shows the SCSI IDs that you can use for
hot-swap drives.
Table 17. SCSI IDs for hot-swap drives
J10
Pins
5–6
J10
Pins
11–12
Bay
1
Bay
2
Bay
3
Bay
4
Bay
5
Bay
6
No
jumper
No
jumper
0
1
2
3
4
5
No
jumper
Jumper
5
4
3
2
1
0
Jumper
No
jumper
13
12
11
10
9
8
Notes:
1. No jumper on pins 5-6 and 11-12 is the default.
2. Jumpers on pins 5-6 and 11-12 is not supported.
274
Netfinity Server HMM
Server cabling
Make sure you have an adequate number of properly
grounded electrical outlets for the server, monitor, and any
other options that you installed. Place the server in a
location that is dry. Rain or spilled liquids might damage
the server. Leave about 50 mm (2 inches) of space at the
right and left sides of the server to allow the server's
cooling system to work properly. Leave about 100 mm (4
inches) clearance at the rear for cables.
1. Use the illustration in “Input/output connectors and
expansion slots” on page 209 to cable the server.
2. Remove any shipping screws .2/ from the power
supply.
3. Connect the power cord .1/ to the server.
Caution
When the power-cord strain-relief bracket option
is installed on the power cord, the server must be
plugged to a power source that is easily
accessible.
4. Install the power-cord strain-relief bracket .3/ (if
desired).
5. Plug the power cord into a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
275
Server door and trim bezels removal
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the
steps in this procedure.
.1/ Server door
.2/ NetBAY3 bezel
.3/ Media-bay trim bezel
To remove the server door:
1. Unlock and open the server door .1/.
2. Lift the server door up and off its hinges. Store the
door in a safe place.
To remove the NetBAY3 bezel (tower models only):
1. Unlock the NetBAY3 bezel .2/.
2. With your fingers on the ribbed area on the right side
of the NetBAY3 bezel .2/, grasp the right side of the
NetBAY3 bezel and pull it away from the pedestal.
3. Unhook the left side of the bezel from the server.
Store the bezel in a safe place.
To remove the media-bay trim bezel:
1. Release the two tabs at the bottom edge of the bezel
.3/ and pull the bottom of the bezel slightly away
from the server.
2. Pull the bezel down to release the two tabs at the top
edge of the bezel. Store the bezel in a safe place.
276
Netfinity Server HMM
Shuttle removal
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
To remove the shuttle, do the following:
1. If you have not already done so, turn off the server
and peripheral devices and disconnect all external
cables and power cords (see “Preparing to install
options” on page 246).
2. Remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
3. Remove processor support tray (see “Processor
support tray removal” on page 259).
4. Disconnect all cables attached to the front of the
shuttle.
5. Remove the shuttle.
a. Loosen the screws .1/ on the back of the
shuttle; then, slide the shuttle to the rear of the
system.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
277
Side cover(s) removal
To remove the side cover(s), do the following:
1. Remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. Remove the server front door (see “Server door and
trim bezels removal” on page 276).
3. Remove the side cover.
a. Release the three tabs .1/ on the top edge of
one side cover and tilt the cover away from the
server.
b. Lift the cover off the server and set it aside.
c. Repeat the previous steps to remove the other
side cover.
278
Netfinity Server HMM
System board component locations
The following illustration shows a layout of the system
board and identifies system board components. You might
need to refer to this figure before you install hardware in
the server, or when you record information in the tables in
this chapter. You might also need to refer to this figure
when you set configuration jumpers on the system board.
44
45
46 47
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
.1/ Processor board connector (J19)
.2/ Advanced System Management Processor error
LED (CR24)
.3/ RAID channel 1 connector (J7)
.4/ RAID channel 1 error LED (CR30)
.5/ RAID channel 2 error LED (CR31)
.6/ Reserved (J54)
.7/ Reserved (J64)
.8/ Disable RAID controller jumper block (J11)
.9/ Reserved (J45)
.1ð/ Power-on control jumper block with cable (J32)
.11/ RAID download jumper block (J15)
.12/ Reserved (J25)
.13/ Reserved (J9)
.14/ Power backplane cable connector (J8)
.15/ RAID channel 2 connector (to backplane) (J3)
.16/ RAID system error LED (CR32)
.17/ RS-485 connector (J27)
.18/ Reserved (J35)
.19/ SCSI activity LED connector (J52)
.2ð/ Reserved (J34)
.21/ Reserved (J29)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
279
.22/ RS-485 termination jumper block (J26)
.23/ IDE connector (J33)
.24/ Disable Advanced System Management
Processor jumper block (J51)
.25/ Fan connector (J36)
.26/ Diskette drive connector (J22)
.27/ Power-on password override jumper block (J24)
.28/ Flash ROM page swap jumper block (J30)
.29/ Information LED panel connector (J20)
.3ð/ Battery
.31/ Reserved (J46)
.32/ Hot-plug PCI controller programmer interface
connector (J53)
.33/ ISA expansion slot
.34/ Hot-plug switch connector (J16)
.35/ PCI slot LEDs (four are on the side of the board)
.36/ PCI (hot-plug) slots 1–4 (on PCI primary bus 1)
.37/ PCI slots 5 and 6 (on PCI primary bus 0)
Note: Because of the processor support tray, PCI
slot 6 is not available for use and PCI slot 5
supports only a short adapter.
.38/ Parallel port connector (J56) (Serial port A and B
connectors are below the parallel port connector.)
.39/ Video port connector (J2)
.4ð/ Management port C connector (J42)
.41/ USB 1 and USB 2 port connectors (J31) (USB 2
is below USB 1)
.42/ Mouse and keyboard connectors (J1) (The
mouse connector is above the keyboard connector.)
.43/ Ethernet port connector (J4)
.44/ Reserved (J17)
.45/ Reserved (J18)
.46/ Disable Ethernet controller jumper block (J5)
.47/ Disable video controller jumper block (J14)
System board jumpers
Table 18 describes the jumpers on the system board. The
numbers in the table correspond to the highlighted
numbers on the illustration in “System board component
locations” on page 279.
Note
Turn off the server and disconnect the power cords
before moving any jumpers.
Table 18 (Page 1 of 2). System board jumpers
Jumper Name
Description
.8/ J11 Disable
RAID controller
The default position is Enabled (jumper on
pins 1 and 2). Move the jumper to pins 2 and
3 to disable the RAID controller.
.9/ J45 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and
3.
280
Netfinity Server HMM
Table 18 (Page 2 of 2). System board jumpers
Jumper Name
Description
.1ð/ J32 Power-on
control with
extension cable
The default position is normal operation
(jumper on pins 1 and 2). Moving the jumper
to pins 2 and 3 allows the power supply to be
turned on without a power switch assembly or
Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. A cable is connected to these
pins to allow easy access while the processor
support tray is still installed; its white wire
indicates pin 1.
.11/ J15 RAID
download
The default is no jumpers on the pins. This
jumper block is used when the RAID adapter
EEPROM is being updated.
.12/ J25 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.13/ J9 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 1 and
2.
.2ð/ J34 Reserved
The default position is a jumper installed on
pins 1 and 2.
.21/ J29 Reserved
The default position is a jumper installed on
pins 1 and 2.
.22/ J26 RS-485
The default is no jumper installed on J26.
.24/ J51 Disable
Advanced System
Management
Processor
In normal operation, there is no jumper on
J51. Installing a jumper on J51 disables the
Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. A jumper should only be installed
on J51 for diagnostic purposes. Normal
operation of the server with J51 jumpered is
not supported.
A system operated in this manner is limited in
the following ways:
1. No system error logging.
2. No monitoring of system functions for
problem.
3. No automatic recovery after an NMI
error.
4. Error indication ability is severely limited.
.27/ J24 Power-on
password override
Changing the position of this jumper bypasses
the power-on password check if the jumper
has been moved since the server was last
powered on. You do not need to move the
jumper back to the default position after the
password is overridden.
Changing the position of this jumper does not
affect the administrator password check if an
administrator password is set.
.28/ J30 Flash
ROM page swap
The default position is a jumper installed on
pins 2 and 3. Changing the position of this
jumper will change which of the two pages of
Flash ROM is used when the system is
started.
.46/ J5 Disable
Ethernet controller
The default position is Enabled (jumper on
pins 1 and 2). Move the jumper to pins 2 and
3 to disable the Ethernet controller.
.47/ J14 Disable
video controller
The default position is Enabled (jumper on
pins 1 and 2). Move the jumper to pins 2 and
3 to disable the video controller.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
281
System board removal
Notes
1. Read “Safety information” on page 338.
2. If possible, record the configuration settings
before removing the system board (see
“Configuration/Setup Utility program” on
page 21).
To remove the system board, do the following:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and
disconnect all external cables and power cords (see
“Preparing to install options” on page 246); then
remove the top cover (see “Top cover removal” on
page 284).
2. Disconnect all adapter cables and remove the
adapters (see “Hot-plug PCI adapter installation” on
page 165).
3. Remove the adapter dividers.
a. Press on the adapter divider release tab .1/ and
lift the divider out of the system.
b. Repeat the procedure for each adapter divider.
4. Remove the processor board support tray (see
“Processor support tray removal” on page 259).
5. Disconnect all system board cables.
6. Remove the system board dust cover .1/.
282
Netfinity Server HMM
7. Remove the system board.
a. Remove the system board mounting screws;
then, remove the system board.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
283
Top cover removal
Note
Read “Safety information” on page 338.
.1/ Thumbscrews
.2/ Top cover
To remove the server top cover:
1. Loosen the two thumbscrews .1/ on the back edge of
the top cover.
2. Slide the top cover .2/ slightly toward the rear of the
server; the cover will stop after about 25 mm (1 inch).
Lift the cover off the server and set the cover aside.
Attention
For proper cooling and airflow, replace the top
cover before turning on the server. Operating the
server for extended periods of time (over 30
minutes) with the top cover removed might
damage server components.
284
Netfinity Server HMM
Symptom-to-FRU index
This index supports Netfinity Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type
8662 servers.
Notes
1. Check the configuration before you replace a
FRU. Configuration problems can cause false
errors and symptoms.
2. The default configuration can be loaded by
starting the system and then pressing the reset
button four times, waiting 15 seconds between
each press. Once the configuration has reset to
the default, it must be saved in Setup to be
stored in CMOS.
3. For IBM devices not supported by index, refer to
the manual for that device.
4. Always start with “General checkout” on page 8.
The Symptom-to-FRU lists symptoms, errors, and the
possible causes. The most likely cause is listed first. Use
this Symptom-to-FRU Index to help you decide which
FRUs to have available when servicing the computer. The
POST BIOS displaying POST error codes and messages
on the screen.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
285
Beep symptoms
Beep symptoms are short tones or a series of short tones
separated by pauses (intervals without sound). See the
following examples.
Note
One beeps after successfully completing POST
indicated the system is functioning properly.
Beeps
1-2-3
Description
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
One beep
A pause (or break)
Two beeps
A pause (or break)
Three beeps
4
Four continuous beeps
Beep/Symptom
FRU/Action
1-1-2
(Processor register test
failed)
1. Optional Processor
(if installed)
2. Processor
1-1-3
(CMOS write/read test
failed)
1. Battery
2. System Board
1-1-4
(BIOS ROM checksum
failed)
1. System Board
1-2-1
(Programmable Interval
Timer failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
1-2-2
(DMA initialization failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
1-2-3
(DMA page register
write/read failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
1-2-4
RAM refresh verification
failed
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
1-3-1
(1st 64K RAM test failed)
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
1-3-2
(1st 64K RAM parity test
failed)
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
2-1-1
(Secondary DMA register
failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
2-1-2
(Primary DMA register
failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
286
Netfinity Server HMM
Beep/Symptom
FRU/Action
2-1-3
(Primary interrupt mask
register failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
2-1-4
(Secondary interrupt mask
register failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
2-2-1
(Interrupt vector loading
failed)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
2-2-2
(Keyboard controller failed)
1. System Board
2-2-3
(CMOS power failure and
checksum checks failed)
1. Battery
2. System Board
2-2-4
(CMOS configuration info
validation failed)
1. Battery
2. System Board
2-3-1
(Screen initialization failed)
1. Jumper on J14
2. System Board
2-3-2
(Screen memory failed)
1. System Board
2-3-3
(Screen retrace failed)
1. System Board
2-3-4
(Search for video ROM
failed)
1. System Board
2-4-1
(Video failed, screen
believed operable)
1. System Board
3-1-1
(Timer tick interrupt failed)
1. System Board
3-1-2
(Interval timer channel 2
failed)
1. System Board
3-1-3
(RAM test failed above
address 0FFFFH)
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
3-1-4
(Time-Of-Day clock failed)
1. Battery
2. System Board
3-2-1
(Serial port failed)
1. System Board
3-2-2
(Parallel port failed)
1. System Board
3-2-3
(Math coprocessor failed)
1. Optional Processor
(if installed)
2. Processor
3. Processor Board
3-2-4
(Failure comparing CMOS
memory size against actual)
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. Battery
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
287
Beep/Symptom
FRU/Action
3-3-1
(Memory size mismatch
occurred, see“Memory
settings” on page 30 )
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. Battery
3-3-2
(Critical SMBUS error
occurred)
1. Disconnect the
server power cord
from outlet, wait 30
seconds and retry.
2. Processor Board
3. Memory DIMMs
3-3-3
(No operational memory in
system)
1. Install or reseat the
memory modules,
then do a 3 boot
reset (see
“Configuration/Setup
Utility program” on
page 21)
2. DIMMs
3. Memory Board
4. Processor Board
5. System Board
Two Short Beeps
(Information only, the
configuration has changed)
1. Run Diagnostics
2. Run
Configuration/Setup
Three Short Beeps
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
One Continuous Beep
1. Processor
2. Optional Processor
(if installed)
3. Processor Board
4. System Board
Repeating Short Beeps
1. Keyboard
2. System Board
One Long and One Short
Beep
1. Video adapter
(if present)
2. System Board
3.
One Long and Two Short
Beeps
1. Video adapter
(if present)
2. System Board
Two Long and Two Short
Beeps
1. Video adapter
No beep symptoms
No Beep Symptom
No beep and the system
operates correctly.
288
Netfinity Server HMM
FRU/Action
1. Check speaker
cables
2. Speaker
3. System Board
No Beep Symptom
FRU/Action
No Beeps occur after
successfully completing
POST
(The Power-On Status is
disabled.)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup,
set the Start Options
Power-On Status to
enable.
2. Check speaker
connection.
3. Speaker
4. System Board
No AC power
(Power supply AC LED is
off)
1. Check the power
cord
2. Power Supply (If two
are installed, swap
them to determine if
one is defective.)
3. Power Backplane
4. Hot Swap Power AC
Inlet Box
No beep and no video
1. See “Undetermined
problems” on
page 325.
System will not power-up
(Power supply AC LED is
on)
1. See “Power supply
LED errors” on
page 301.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
289
Information panel system error LED
The system error LED is turned on on when an error is
detected. If the system error LED is on, remove the cover
and check the diagnostic panel LEDs. The following is a
complete list of diagnostic panel LEDs followed by the
FRU/Action for replacing the problem.
Important
If a diagnostic panel LED is on and the information
LED panel system error LED is off, there is probably
an LED problem. Run LED diagnostics.
Notes
1. To locate the LEDs on the processor board see
“Processor board component locations” on
page 254.
2. Check the System Error Log for additional
information before replacing a FRU.
3. The memory board DIMM error LEDs, processor
error LEDs, and VRM error LEDs turn off when
the system is powered down.
Diagnostic Panel LED
FRU/Action
All LEDs off
(Check System Error Log
for error condition, then
clear System Error Log
when the problem is found.)
1. System Error Log is
75% full; clear the log
2. PFA alert; power the
system off then on
3. Run Information Panel
diagnostics
Only CPU LED on
(The LED next to the failing
CPU should be on.)
1. Processor 1, 2, 3, or
4
2. Processor Board
CPU LED and VRM LED
on
(The LED next to the failing
VRM should be on.)
1. Voltage regulator
module indicated by
the VRM LED on the
processor board that
is turned on
2. Processor indicated by
the Processor LED.
3. Processor Board
CPU Wrong Slot LED on
(CPU and terminator card
installation order is wrong.)
1. CPU and terminator
card installation
order
See“Microprocessor
installation” on
page 238 .
2. Processor(s)
3. Processor Board
DASD 1 LED on
(The LED located next to
the drive bay that the failing
drive is installed in will be
turned on.)
1. Failing drive.
2. Be sure the fans are
operating correctly and
the air flow is good.
3. SCSI Backplane
290
Netfinity Server HMM
Diagnostic Panel LED
FRU/Action
DASD 2 LED on
(The LED located next to
the drive bay that the failing
drive is installed in will be
turned on.)
1. Failing drive.
2. Be sure the fans are
operating correctly and
the air flow is good.
3. SCSI Backplane
FAN 1 LED on
1. Fan 1
2. Fan Cable
3. System Board
FAN 2 LED on
1. Fan 2
2. Fan Cable
3. System Board
FAN 3 LED on
1. Fan 3
2. Fan Cable
3. System Board
FAN 4 LED on
1. Fan 4
2. Fan Cable
3. Processor Board
MEM LED on
(The LED next to the failing
DIMM is on.)
1. Failing DIMM in slot
J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6,
J7, or J8).
2. Memory Board
3. Processor Board
NMI LED on
1. Reboot the system.
2. Check the System
Error Log.
PCI 1 LED on
1. PCI Card in slot 5.
See “System board
component locations”
on page 279.
2. System Board
3. Processor Board
PCI 2 LED on
1. Card in slot 1 to 4
See “System board
component locations”
on page 279.
2. System Board
3. Processor Board
PS1 LED on
1. Check the DC Good
LED on power supply
1. If off, replace
power supply 1.
2. Power Backplane
PS2 LED on
1. Check the DC Good
LED on power supply
2. If off, replace
power supply 2.
2. Power Backplane
SMI LED on
1. Reboot the system.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
291
Diagnostic Panel LED
FRU/Action
TEMP LED on
1. Be sure the fans are
operating correctly
and the air flow is
good.
2. Check processor 1
through 4 LEDs. If the
CPU LED on the
diagnostics panel is
also on, one of the
microprocessors has
caused the error.
3. Be sure the power
supply fans are
operating correctly and
the air flow is good.
4. Processor Board
5. System Board
VRM LED on
(Check the VRM (voltage
regulator module) LEDs on
the processor board.)
1. Voltage regulator
module indicated by
the VRM LED on the
processor board that
is turned on
2. Processor for the VRM
LED that is turned on.
See “Microprocessor
installation” on
page 238.
3. Processor Board
292
Netfinity Server HMM
Diagnostic error codes
Attention
In the following error codes, if XXX is 000, 195, or 197
do not replace a FRU. The description for these error
codes are:
000
195
197
The test passed.
The Esc key was pressed to abort the
test.
This is a warning error and may not
indicate a hardware failure.
For all error codes, replace/follow the FRU/Action
indicated.
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
001-XXX-000
(Failed core tests)
1. System Board
001-XXX-001
(Failed core tests)
1. Processor Board
005-XXX-000
(Failed Video test)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
011-XXX-000
(Failed COM1 Serial Port
test)
1. System Board
011-XXX-001
(Failed COM2 Serial Port
test)
1. System Board
014-XXX-000
(Failed Parallel Port test)
1. System Board
015-XXX-001
(Failed USB test)
1. System Board
020-XXX-000
(Failed PCI Interface test)
1. Processor Board
2. System Board
020-XXX-001 (Failed Hot
Swap Slot 1 PCI Latch test)
1. PCI Hot Swap Latch
Assembly
2. System Board
020-XXX-002
(Failed Hot Swap Slot 2 PCI
Latch test)
1. PCI Hot Swap Latch
Assembly
2. System Board
020-XXX-003
(Failed Hot Swap Slot 3 PCI
Latch test)
1. PCI Hot Swap Latch
Assembly
2. System Board
020-XXX-004
(Failed Hot Swap Slot 4 PCI
Latch test)
1. PCI Hot Swap Latch
Assembly
2. System Board
030-XXX-000
(Failed Internal SCSI
interface test)
1. System Board
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
293
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
035-XXX-000
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Failed System Board RAID
test. Check System Error
Log before replacing a
FRU.)
1. Verify RAID adapter
disable jumper block
is not installed (see
“System board
jumpers” on
page 280).
2. System Board
3. SCSI Backplane
4. Cable
035-XXX-000
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID 00 on System
Board RAID
controller
035-XXX-0NN
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.
NN = SCSI ID of failing
fixed disk.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID NN on System
Board RAID
controller
035-XXX-100
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Failed RAID test on PCI
slot 1. Check System Error
Log before replacing a
FRU.)
1. Adapter
2. SCSI Backplane
3. Cable
035-XXX-100
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID 00 on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 1
035-XXX-1NN
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.
NN = SCSI ID of failing
fixed disk.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID NN on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 1
035-XXX-200
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Failed RAID test on PCI
slot 2. Check System Error
Log before replacing a
FRU.)
1. Adapter
2. SCSI Backplane
3. Cable
035-XXX-200
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID 00 on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 2
035-XXX-2NN
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.
NN = SCSI ID of failing
fixed disk.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID NN on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 2
035-XXX-300
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Failed RAID test on PCI
slot 3. Check System Error
Log before replacing a
FRU.)
1. Adapter
2. SCSI Backplane
3. Cable
294
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
035-XXX-300
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID 00 on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 3
035-XXX-3NN
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.
NN = SCSI ID of failing
fixed disk.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID NN on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 3
035-XXX-400
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Failed RAID test on PCI
slot 4. Check System Error
Log before replacing a
FRU.)
1. Adapter
2. SCSI Backplane
3. Cable
035-XXX-400
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID 00 on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 4
035-XXX-4NN
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.
NN = SCSI ID of failing
fixed disk.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID NN on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 4
035-XXX-500
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Failed RAID test on PCI
slot 5. Check System Error
Log before replacing a
FRU.)
1. Adapter
2. SCSI Backplane
3. Cable
035-XXX-500
DUPLICATE ERROR CODE
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID 00 on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 5
035-XXX-5NN
(Check System Error Log
before replacing a FRU.
NN = SCSI ID of failing
fixed disk.)
1. Fixed Disk with SCSI
ID NN on RAID
adapter in PCI slot 5
075-XXX-000
(Failed Power Supply test)
1. Power Supply
089-XXX-001
(Failed Microprocessor test)
1. VRM 1 or VRM 2
2. Microprocessor CPU 1
089-XXX-002
(Failed Microprocessor test)
1. VRM 3 or VRM 2
2. Microprocessor CPU 2
089-XXX-003
(Failed Microprocessor test)
1. VRM 4 or VRM 5
2. Microprocessor CPU 3
089-XXX-004
(Failed Microprocessor test)
1. VRM 6 or VRM 5
2. Microprocessor CPU 4
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
295
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
165-XXX-000
(Failed System Board test)
1. System Board Before
replacing the system
board, ensure that
system board jumper
J51 is not installed (the
default) when the error
occurs.
2. Processor Board
3. Power Backplane
4. Hot-Swap Drive
Backplane
180-XXX-000
(Diagnostics LED failure)
1. Run Diagnostic LED
test for the failing
LED
180-XXX-001
(Failed information LED
panel test)
1. Information LED
Panel
2. Power Switch
Assembly
180-XXX-002
(Failed Diagnostics LED
Panel test)
1. Diagnostics LED
Panel
2. Power Switch
Assembly
180-XXX-003
(Failed System Board LED
test)
1. Run hot-swap PCI
latch test in Other
Devices under
Extended Tests
2. System Board
180-XXX-004
(Failed Processor Board
LED test)
1. Processor Board
2. System Board
180-XXX-005
(Failed SCSI Backplane
LED test)
1. SCSI Backplane
2. SCSI Backplane Cable
3. System Board
201-XXX-001
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory settings” on
page 30 )
1. DIMM Location J1
201-XXX-002
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory settings” on
page 30 )
1. DIMM Location J2
201-XXX-003
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory settings” on
page 30 )
1. DIMM Location J3
201-XXX-004
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory settings” on
page 30 )
1. DIMM Location J4
201-XXX-005
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory settings” on
page 30 )
1. DIMM Location J5
296
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
201-XXX-006
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory settings” on
page 30 )
1. DIMM Location J6
201-XXX-007
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory settings” on
page 30 )
1. DIMM Location J7
201-XXX-008
(Failed Memory test,
see“Memory settings” on
page 30 )
1. DIMM Location J8
201-XXX-999
(Multiple DIMM failure, see
error text.)
1. See error text for
failing DIMMs
202-XXX-001
(Failed System Cache test)
1. VRM 2 or VRM 1
2. Microprocessor CPU 1
202-XXX-002
(Failed System Cache test)
1. VRM 2 or VRM 3
2. Microprocessor CPU 2
202-XXX-003
(Failed System Cache test)
1. VRM 5 or VRM 4
2. Microprocessor CPU 3
202-XXX-004
(Failed System Cache test)
1. VRM 5 or VRM 6
2. Microprocessor CPU 4
206-XXX-000
(Failed Diskette Drive test)
1. Cable
2. Diskette Drive
3. System Board
215-XXX-000
(Failed IDE CD-ROM test)
1. CD-ROM Drive
Cables
2. CD-ROM Drive
3. System Board
217-XXX-000
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 1
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-001
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 2
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
297
Error Code/Symptom
217-XXX-002
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
FRU/Action
1. Fixed Disk 3
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-003
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 4
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-004
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 5
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-005
(Failed BIOS Fixed Disk
test)
Note
1. Fixed Disk 6
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
264-XXX-0NN
(NN = SCSI ID of failing
Tape Drive)
298
Netfinity Server HMM
1. Tape Cartridge, if user
executed the
Read/Write Tape Drive
test (XXX = 256)
2. SCSI or Power Cable
connected to tape
drive with SCSI ID NN.
3. Tape Drive with SCSI
ID NN.
4. System board or SCSI
Controller. (Run SCSI
Controller Diagnostic to
determine if the SCSI
bus is functioning
properly.)
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
264-XXX-999
(Errors on muliple tape
drives, see error text for
more info)
1. See error
messages/text in the
error log for detailed
information on each
individual tape drive
error.
301-XXX-000
(Failed Keyboard test)
1. Keyboard
405-XXX-000
(Failed Ethernet test on
controller on the system
board)
1. Verify that the
ethernet disable
jumper is not
installed (see
“System board
jumpers” on
page 280).
2. System Board
405-XXX-00N
(Failed Ethernet test on
adapter in PCI slot N)
1. Adapter in PCI slot N
2. System Board
415-XXX-000
(Failed Modem test)
1. Cable
2. Modem
3. System Board
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
299
Error symptoms
Error Symptom
FRU/Action
CD is not working properly.
1. Clean the CD
2. CD-ROM Drive
CD-ROM drive tray is not
working.
(The server must be
powered-on.)
1. Insert the end of a
paper clip into the
manual tray-release
opening.
2. CD-ROM Drive
CD-ROM drive is not
recognized.
1. Run
Configuration/Setup,
enable primary IDE
channel.
2. Check cables and
jumpers.
3. Check for correct
device driver.
Power switch does not work
and reset button does work.
1. Verify that the
power-on control
jumper on J32's
extension cable is on
pins 1 and 2.
2. Power Switch
Assembly
3. System Board
Diskette drive in-use light
stays on, or the system
bypasses the diskette drive,
or the diskette drive does
not work.
If there is a diskette in the
drive, verify that:
Monitor problems (general)
Some IBM monitors have
their own self-tests. If you
suspect a problem with the
monitor, refer to the
information that comes with
the monitor for adjusting
and testing instructions.
300
Netfinity Server HMM
1. The diskette drive is
enabled in the
configuration
programs.
2. The diskette is good
and not damaged.
(Try another diskette if
you have one.)
3. The diskette is inserted
correctly in the drive.
4. The diskette contains
the necessary files to
start the server.
5. The software program
is OK.
6. Run Diskette Drive
Diagnostics.
7. Cable
8. Diskette Drive
9. System Board
1. Monitor
2. Run Video Diagnostics.
If diagnostics pass, the
problem may be a
video driver.
3. Display
Adapter/System Board
Power supply LED errors
Use the power supply LED information on the following
page to trouble shoot power supply problems.
Note
The minimum configuration required for the DC Good
light to come on is.
Power Supply
Power Backplane
System Board (With pins 2 and 3 on J32's
extension cable connected together to bypass the
power switch; see “System board component
locations” on page 279.)
Processor Board (Verify that the J32, J33, and
J35 connectors are installed correctly; see
“Processor board component locations” on
page 254.)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
301
302
Netfinity Server HMM
DC Good LED
Off
AC Good LED
Off
No power to system or AC problem.
Description
Table 19 (Page 1 of 2). Power supply LED errors
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check AC power to system
Power Supply
Power Backplane
Power AC Inlet Box
FRU/Action
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
303
On
Off
On
On
DC Good LED
AC Good LED
Power is OK
Standby mode or DC problem.
Description
Table 19 (Page 2 of 2). Power supply LED errors
N/A
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.
If the system powers up with no errors:
a. Power Switch Assembly
b. System Board
Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power connectors to
all internal and external devices. Power-on the system. If the DC Good
LED comes on, replace the adapters and devices one at a time until you
isolate the problem.
Power Supply
Power Backplane
System Board
Processor Board
1. Check processor board cable connectors J32, J33, and J35.
2. Move jumper on J32's extension cable to pins 2-3 to bypass power
control. If the DC Good LED comes on, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete. Watch the
screen for any POST errors. Check the System Error Log for any listed
problems.
FRU/Action
POST error codes
In the following error codes, X can be any number or letter.
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
062
(Three consecutive boot
failures using the default
configuration.)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery
3. System Board
101, 102
(System and processor
error)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
106
(System and processor
error)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
111
(Channel check error)
1. Failing ISA Adapter
2. Memory DIMM
3. System Board
114
(Adapter read-only memory
error)
1. Failing Adapter
2. Run Diagnostics
129
(Internal Cache error)
1. Processor
2. Optional Processor
(if installed)
3. Processor Board
151
(Real time clock error)
1. Run Diagnostics
2. Battery
3. System Board
161
(Real time clock battery
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery
3. System Board
162
(Device Configuration Error)
Important
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery
3. Failing Device
4. System Board
Be sure to load the
default settings and
any additional desired
settings; then, save
the configuration.
163
(Real-Time Clock error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery
3. System Board
164
(Memory configuration
changed, see “Memory
settings” on page 30)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. DIMM
3. Processor Board
175
(Hardware error)
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
176
(Computer cover or cable
cover was removed without
a key being used)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
304
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
177, 178
(Security hardware error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
184
(Power-on password
corrupted)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
185
(Drive startup sequence
information corrupted)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
186
(Security hardware control
logic failed)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
187
(VPD serial number not set.)
1. Set serial number in
Setup
2. System Board
188
(Bad EEPROM CRC #2)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. System Board
189
(An attempt was made to
access the server with
invalid passwords)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup,
enter the
administrator
password
201
(Memory test error, see
“Memory settings” on
page 30)
If your server does not have
the latest level of BIOS
installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level and run
the diagnostic program
again.
1. DIMM
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
229
(Cache error)
1. Processor
2. Optional Processor
(if installed)
3. Processor Board
262
(DRAM parity configuration
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery
3. System Board
289
(DIMM has been disabled
the user or system, see
“Memory settings” on
page 30)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup,
if disabled by user
2. Disabled DIMM, if not
disabled by user.
3. Processor Board
301
(Keyboard or keyboard
controller error)
1. Keyboard
2. System Board
303
(Keyboard controller error)
1. Keyboard
2. System Board
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
305
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
602
(Invalid diskette boot record)
1. Diskette
2. Diskette Drive
3. Cable
604
(Diskette drive error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
and Diagnostics
2. Diskette Drive
3. Drive Cable
4. System Board
605
(Unlock failure)
1. Diskette Drive
2. Drive Cable
3. System Board
662
(Diskette drive configuration
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
and Diagnostics
2. Diskette Drive
3. Drive Cable
4. System Board
762
(Coprocessor configuration
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Battery
3. Processor
962
(Parallel port error)
1. Disconnect external
cable on parallel port.
2. Run
Configuration/Setup
3. System Board
11XX
(System board serial port 1
or 2 error)
1. Disconnect external
cable on serial port.
2. Run
Configuration/Setup
3. System Board
0001200
(Machine check architecture
error)
1. Processor
2. Optional Processor
3. Processor Board
000120P0, 000120P1,
000120P2, 000120PF
(Processor cache error)
1. Failing Processor
2. Processor Board
1301
(I2C cable to front panel not
found)
1. Cable.
2. Front Panel
3. Power Switch
Assembly
4. System Board
1302
(I2C cable from system
board to power on and reset
switches not found)
1. Cable.
2. Power Switch
Assembly
3. System Board
1303
(I2C cable from system
board to power backplane
not found)
1. Cable.
2. Power Backplane
3. System Board
306
Netfinity Server HMM
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
1304
(I2C cable to diagnostic
LED board not found)
1. Cable.
2. Diagnostic LED Board
3. Power Switch
Assembly
4. System Board
1600
(The Service Processor is
not functioning)
Do the following before
replacing a FRU:
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
1. Ensure that a jumper is
not installed on J51.
2. Remove the AC power
to the system, wait 20
seconds; then,
re-connect the AC
power. Wait 30
seconds; then,
power-on the system.
1601
(The system is able to
communicate to the Service
Processor, but the Service
Processor failed to respond
at the start of POST.)
Do the following before
replacing a FRU:
1. System Board
2. Processor Board
1. Remove the AC power
to the system, wait 20
seconds; then,
re-connect the AC
power. Wait 30
seconds; then,
power-on the system.
2. Flash update the
Service Processor.
16XX
(There is an error with the
Service Processor.)
Do the following before
replacing a FRU:
1. System Board
1. Remove the AC power
to the system, wait 20
seconds; then,
re-connect the AC
power. Wait 30
seconds; then,
power-on the system.
2. Flash update the
Service Processor.
1762
(Fixed Disk Configuration
error)
1. Fixed Disk Cables
2. Run
Configuration/Setup
3. Fixed Disk Adapter
4. Fixed Disk Drive
5. System Board
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
307
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
178X
(Fixed Disk error)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1800
(No more hardware interrupt
available for PCI adapter)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Failing Adapter
3. System Board
1962
(Drive does not contain a
valid boot sector)
1. Verify a bootable
operating system is
installed
2. Run Diagnostics
3. Hard Disk Drive
4. SCSI Backplane
5. Cable
6. System Board
2400
(Video controller test failure)
1. Video Adapter
(if installed)
2. System Board
2462
(Video memory
configuration error)
1. Video Adapter
(if installed)
2. System Board
5962
(IDE CD-ROM configuration
error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. CD-ROM Drive
3. CD-ROM Power Cable
4. IDE Cable
5. System Board
6. Battery
8603
(Pointing Device Error)
1. Pointing Device
2. System Board
00019501
(Processor 1 is not
functioning - check VRM
and processor LEDs)
1.
2.
3.
4.
VRM 1, VRM 2
Processor 1
Processor Board
System Board
00019502
(Processor 2 is not
functioning - check VRM
and processor LEDs)
1.
2.
3.
4.
VRM 2, VRM3
Processor 2
Processor Board
System Board
00019503
(Processor 3 is not
functioning - check VRM
and processor LEDs)
1.
2.
3.
4.
VRM 4, VRM 5
Processor 3
Processor Board
System Board
00019504
(Processor 4 is not
functioning - check VRM
and processor LEDs)
1.
2.
3.
4.
VRM 5, VRM 6
Processor 4
Processor Board
System Board
00019701
(Processor 1 failed BIST)
1. Processor 1
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
308
Netfinity Server HMM
Fixed Disk Cables
Run Diagnostics
Fixed Disk Adapter
Fixed Disk Drive
System Board
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
00019702
(Processor 2 failed BIST)
1. Processor 2
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
00019703
(Processor 3 failed BIST)
1. Processor 3
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
00019704
(Processor 4 failed BIST)
1. Processor 4
2. Processor Board
3. System Board
00180100
(No room for PCI option
ROM)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Failing Adapter
3. System Board
00180200
(No more I/O space
available for PCI adapter)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Failing Adapter
3. System Board
00180300
(No more memory (above
1MB for PCI adapter)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Failing Adapter
3. System Board
00180400
(No more memory (below
1MB for PCI adapter)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Move the failing
adapter to slot 1 or 2
3. Failing Adapter
4. System Board
00180500
(PCI option ROM checksum
error)
1. Remove Failing PCI
Card
2. System Board
00180600
(PCI to PCI Bridge error)
1. Run
Configuration/Setup
2. Move the failing
adapter to slot 1 or 2
3. Failing Adapter
4. System Board
00180700, 00180800,
00181000
(General PCI error)
1. System Board
2. PCI Card
01295085
(ECC checking hardware
test error)
1. Processor Board
2. Processor
01298001
(No update data for
processor 1)
1. Ensure all
processors are the
same stepping level
and cache size.
2. Processor 1
01298002
(No update data for
processor 2)
1. Ensure all
processors are the
same stepping level
and cache size.
2. Processor 2
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
309
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
01298003
(No update data for
processor 3)
1. Ensure all
processors are the
same stepping level
and cache size.
2. Processor 3
01298004
(No update data for
processor 4)
1. Ensure all
processors are the
same stepping level
and cache size.
2. Processor 4
01298101
(Bad update data for
processor 1)
1. Ensure all
processors are the
same stepping level
and cache size.
2. Processor 1
01298102
(Bad update data for
processor 2)
1. Ensure all
processors are the
same stepping level
and cache size.
2. Processor 2
01298103
(Bad update data for
processor 3)
1. Ensure all
processors are the
same stepping level
and cache size.
2. Processor 3
01298104
(Bad update data for
processor 4)
1. Ensure all
processors are the
same stepping level
and cache size.
2. Processor 4
I9990301
(Fixed boot sector error)
1.
2.
3.
4.
I9990305
(Fixed boot sector error, no
operating system installed)
1. Install operating
system to hard disk
drive.
I9990650
(AC power has been
restored)
1. Check cable
2. Check for interruption
of power supply
3. Power Cable
310
Netfinity Server HMM
Hard Disk Drive
SCSI Backplane
Cable
System Board
SCSI error codes
Error Code
FRU/Action
All SCSI Errors
One or more of the following
might be causing the
problem:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
A failing SCSI device
(adapter, drive,
controller)
An improper SCSI
configuration or SCSI
termination jumper
setting
Duplicate SCSI IDs in
the same SCSI chain
A missing or improperly
installed SCSI
terminator
A defective SCSI
terminator
An improperly installed
cable
A defective cable
1. External SCSI
devices must be
powered-on before
you power-on the
server.
2. The cables for all
external SCSI devices
are connected
correctly.
3. If you have attached
an external SCSI
device to the server,
make sure the external
SCSI termination is set
to automatic.
4. The last device in each
SCSI chain is
terminated correctly.
5. The SCSI devices are
configured correctly.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
311
ServeRAID controller error
codes/messages
The error codes/messages are displayed on the screen in
a line of text immediately after the controller BIOS version.
If POST detects changes in the controller configuration or
detects an controller hardware problem, messages appear
on the screen. Refer to “ServeRAID POST error
procedures” on page 314 and correct the problem.
If there is no POST Error or Configuration Error message,
the BIOS screen resembles the sample shown below.
Please note that your version may be different from the
one shown.
à
__________________________________
IBM ServeRAID BIOS
Copyright IBM Corp. 1995,1998
Ver: 3.ðð.12
ð8/14/1998
__________________________________
«« Press Ctrl+I to access the Mini-Configuration Program. »»
ð
Initializing ServeRAID Controller 1 in Slot 1.
Power-on self-test can take up to 59 Second(s) -- test Passed.
Drive configuration can take up to 6 Minute(s) ð Second(s) -- test Passed.
ServeRAID Firmware Version:2.82.ðð
No logical drives found; none are installed.
Non-Disk SCSI Devices Found: CD-ROM ð, Tape ð, Removable-media ð, Other 1.
BIOS not loaded no devices found - Installation stopped.
á
ñ
If there is a POST Error message, the BIOS screen
resembles the sample shown below. Refer to “ServeRAID
POST error codes” on page 314 and correct the problem.
The characters XXXX indicate the POST (ISPR) error.
à
__________________________________
IBM ServeRAID BIOS
Copyright IBM Corp. 1995,1998
Ver: 3.ðð.12
ð8/14/1998
__________________________________
«« Press Ctrl+I to access the Mini-Configuration Program. »»
Initializing ServeRAID Controller 1 in Slot 1.
Power-on self-test can take up to 59 Second(s) -- test Failed.
Controller is not responding properly - Run Diagnostics.
Error Code: XXXX-YY
ð
BIOS not loaded no devices found - Installation stopped.
á
ñ
The BIOS screen below shows Configuration Status and/or
Error information. Refer to “ServeRAID Startup Messages”
on page 318.
312
Netfinity Server HMM
à
ð
__________________________________
IBM ServeRAID BIOS
Copyright IBM Corp. 1995,1998
Ver: 3.ðð.12
ð8/14/1998
__________________________________
«« Press Ctrl+I to access the Mini-Configuration Program. »»
Initializing ServeRAID Controller 1 in Slot 1.
Power-on self-test can take up to 59 Second(s) -- test Passed.
Drive configuration-can take up to 6 Minute(s) ð Second(s) -- test Failed.
Controller POST and Config Error Codes: ISPR = EF1ð BCS = ð9 ECS = 2ð.
Following drives not responding(old state: new state: ch SID)
(RDY:EMP: 2:ð)
Your system has a configuration error due to above condition(s).
Press: F4
F5
- Retry the command
- Update Controller configuration to exclude NON-RESPONDING drives
Warning:NON-RESPONDING drives will be set to DDD, DHS, or EMP state
F1ð - Exit without change
á
ñ
Note
Do not replace a system board containing an
imbedded ServeRAID controller for ServeRAID
problems unless replacing the controller is listed in the
Symptom-to-FRU Index.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
313
ServeRAID POST error codes
The ISPR (Interrupt Status Port Register), BCS (Basic
Configuration Status), and ECS (Extended Configuration
Status) codes identify the controller state.
Note
Do not replace a system board containing an
imbedded ServeRAID controller unless such a
replacement is indicated in the recommended Actions
in an error code list that appears in “Symptom-to-FRU
index” on page 285.
ServeRAID POST error procedures
The ISPR Error Procedures list errors, symptoms, and the
possible causes. The most probable cause is listed first.
Use these procedures to help you solve ServeRAID
problems when servicing the computer.
Note
Where the ISPR Error Procedures refer to a SCSI
backplane, see the Hardware Maintenance Manual for
the system you are servicing.
EF10 (Default ISPR)
1. No ISPR Error Present.
1XXX (Microcode Checksum Error)
1. Replace the ServeRAID controller.
2XXX thru 5XXX (Code DRAM Error)
1. Install two download jumpers parallel to the PCI slots.
For jumper locations, see “System board jumpers” on
page 280.
2. Flash the controller with the latest IBM ServeRAID
BIOS/Firmware from the IBM Website.
3. Remove the jumpers.
4. If the error persists, replace ServeRAID controller.
6XXX (Cache DRAM Error)
1. Reseat Cache Memory SIMM
2. Install two download jumpers parallel to the PCI slots.
For jumper locations, see “System board jumpers” on
page 280.
3. Flash the controller with the latest IBM ServeRAID
BIOS/Firmware from the IBM Website.
4. Remove the jumpers.
5. If the error persists, replace ServeRAID controller.
7XXX thru 8XXX (Host/Local PCI Bus Interface Error)
1. Install two download jumpers parallel to the PCI slots.
For jumper locations, see “System board jumpers” on
page 280.
314
Netfinity Server HMM
2. Flash the controller with the latest IBM ServeRAID
BIOS/Firmware from the IBM Website.
3. Remove the jumpers.
4. If the error persists, replace ServeRAID controller.
9XXX thru BXXX (SCSI bus error caused either by
defective drives, termination, etc.)
1. Isolate between SCSI subsystem and controller by
disconnecting all SCSI cables from suspect card, and
reboot.
CAUTION:
Do not press F5. Doing so changes the
customer's configuration.
If an ISPR error is still present, perform the following
actions until the error is no longer present:
a. Reseat the controller
b. Replace the controller
Note
1. Refer to the HMM (Hardware Maintenance
Manual) specific to the system comprising
the SCSI channel for SCSI cable details.
2. The controller detects a configuration
change. Do not choose Save Changes.
Instead, press F10 to bypass any options to
this effect.
2. If ISPR error is EF10 after disconnecting cables:
a. Identify which channel is causing the error by the
second digit of the original ISPR code:
Ÿ ISPR = B1xx = Channel 1
Ÿ ISPR = B2xx = Channel 2
Ÿ ISPR = B3xx = Channel 1 and 2
Ÿ ISPR = B4xx = Channel 3
Ÿ ISPR = B5xx = Channel 1 and 3
Ÿ ISPR = B6xx = Channel 2 and 3
Ÿ ISPR = B7xx = Channel 1, 2 and 3
Ÿ ISPR = BFxx = Channel not identified
b. Confirm that the channel(s) identified from the
error in step 2a is(are) the cause of the error by
verifying that the error presents itself ONLY
when the offending channel is reconnected.
c. Check termination of identified channel.
Note
Refer to the HMM (Hardware Maintenance
Manual) specific to the system comprising
the SCSI channel for termination details.
d. Check for proper backplane jumper
configuration.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
315
Note
Refer to the HMM (Hardware Maintenance
Manual) specific to the system comprising
the SCSI channel for jumper details.
e. Check for proper cabling configuration in
systems that use DASD status cables.
Reconnect all cables removed in step 1 above.
f. Disconnect one drive at a time attached to the
channel identified in step 2a, then reboot to
determine which drive is causing the error.
g. Replace SCSI cable.
h. Replace SCSI backplane.
EF10 (Default ISPR)
1. No ISPR error present.
2. Controller is probably functioning properly. Do not
replace system board unless you have run the
controller's diagnostics and you get an error message.
If you do not get an error message, assume it is
functioning properly.
3. Refer to “ServeRAID Startup Messages” on
page 318. Note the resulting BCS and or ECS Error
codes, and see the FRU actions respective to those
codes. (EF10 is a default code for ISPR indicating
that there is no ISPR error present.)
EFFE (Firmware code corrupted or download jumpers are
in place.)
1. Verify download jumpers are in their default locations.
See “System board jumpers” on page 280 for jumper
locations.
2. If download jumpers are not in place and error still
persists, then flash the controller firmware with the
jumpers in place; then remove the jumpers.
3. If error persists after step 2, replace the controller or
the system board with integrated controller.
FFFF or other code not listed
1. Isolate between SCSI subsystem and controller by
disconnecting all SCSI cables attached to the suspect
controller and reboot. If ISPR code is EF10 after
disconnecting cables, follow the steps below until the
error is eliminated:
a. Identify which channel is causing the error by
reconnecting cables one at a time and rebooting
until the error returns.
b. Check termination of identified channel in step
1a.
316
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
Refer to the HMM (Hardware Maintenance
Manual) specific to the system comprising
the SCSI channel for termination details.
c. Disconnect one drive at a time attached to
channel identified in step 1a and reboot each
time to determine which drive is causing the
problem.
d. Replace SCSI Cable attached to channel
identified in step 1a.
e. Replace Backplane attached to channel
identified in step 1a.
2. If original ISPR code is still present after
disconnecting all SCSI cables and rebooting, perform
the following actions until the error is no longer
present:
Ÿ Reseat the controller
Ÿ Replace the controller
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
317
ServeRAID Startup Messages
During power-on self-test (POST), the ServeRAID adapter
or controller compares the stored configuration information
to the configuration that is actually present. If a
discrepancy exists, one or more status messages appear
after POST completes but before the operating system
loads.
Notes
1. When the ServeRAID adapter or controller
requires your input, a list of function keys will
appear below the message.
2. Where the Action information tells you to start the
IBM ServeRAID configuration program, insert the
IBM ServeRAID Configuration Utility Diskette or
CD into the appropriate drive; then, restart the
server. The Action information also provides
general information about the message.
3. Where SID and ch appear in these messages,
SID shows the SCSI ID for the device and ch
shows the channel to which the device is
attached.
4. Where m or n appears in these messages, a
number will appear in the actual message.
The following is a list of messages associated with the
ServeRAID subsystem.
Auto rearrange
Explanation: Auto rearrange is enabled or disabled.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
Following drives not responding (old state:
SID)
new state:
ch:
Explanation: One or more drives did not respond to the
ServeRAID controller. This may occur if configured drives are
missing or are not ready.
Where:
old state is the configured state of the drive.
new state is the state that the ServeRAID adapter or
controller will assign to the drive.
ch is the channel where the drive was located
previously.
SID is the SCSI ID for where the drive was located
previously.
Examples of the possible state changes include:
Online to Defunct
Ready to Empty
Standby to Empty
Rebuild to Defunct
Hot-Spare to Defunct
Standby Hot-Spare to Defunct
(ONL:
(RDY:
(SBY:
(RBL:
(HSP:
(SHS:
Action: Press one of the following keys:
318
Netfinity Server HMM
DDD:
EMP:
EMP:
DDD:
DHS:
DHS:
x:
x:
x:
x:
x:
x:
y)
y)
y)
y)
y)
y)
F4
F5
Retry. Press this key after correcting a problem. For
example, press F4 after you turn on the external
storage enclosure that contains the hard disk drive.
Accept. Press this key to accept the new state that the
ServeRAID adapter or controller will assign to the drive.
For example, the ServeRAID adapter or controller will
assign the drive a state of defunct (DDD) or empty
(EMP).
You can also press F5 when you must remove a drive,
RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives are
present, and performance in a degraded mode is
acceptable. The ServeRAID adapter or controller will
assign the drive a state of defunct (DDD), but the
server can complete startup. However, the array will
remain in Critical mode and the potential for data loss
will exist until you replace and rebuild the defunct drive.
To prevent the loss of data, replace and rebuild the
defunct drive in a timely manner.
Note
A hard disk drive in the DDD state does not
necessarily mean that you need to replace the
drive. Before you replace the drive, ensure that:
1. All cables are connected properly to the
backplane and to the hard disk drive. Also,
ensure that all cables inside the server are
connected properly.
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly
in the drive bay.
3. If you have not already attempted to rebuild
the drive, try rebuilding it.
After you perform these steps, if the hard disk
drive does not function properly, replace the drive.
F10
Continue. Press this key to continue without change to
the configuration.
Following new drives found (old state:
SID)
new state:
ch:
Explanation: The ServeRAID adapter or controller detects a new
drive that is not part of the current configuration.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
— or —
Following new drives found: (host id:
new ch: new SID)
old ch:
old SID >
Explanation: New controller installed in a configured server, or
drives are imported. This message might be preceded by the
previous two messages and the F5 and F6 key choices because
the drives were not found in the configured location. Appears
when the ServeRAID adapter or controller detects that the
identifiers of the drives do not match the controller configuration
information.
Where:
host id identifies the System Name where the
ServeRAID adapter or controller resides.
old ch is the channel that matches the drive
configuration information.
old SID is the SCSI ID that matches the drive
configuration information.
new ch is the channel where the drive is now located.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
319
new SID is the SCSI ID where the drive is now located.
For example, when drives are imported from a server with the
System Name of My Machine: (My Machine: 1:6 > 1:1ð)
In this example, the message indicates that the drive from Channel
1, SCSI ID 6 is now located at Channel 1, SCSI ID 10. The drive
might have been physically moved to a new drive bay.
Action: Press one of the following keys:
F4
F5
Retry. Press this key after correcting the problem.
For example, press F4 after you move the hard disk
drive to its previously assigned location, or after you
install the original hard disk drives back in the server.
Accept. Press this key to accept the new state that
the ServeRAID adapter or controller will assign to the
drive. For example, the ServeRAID adapter or
controller will assign the drive a state of defunct
(DDD) or empty (EMP).
Note
A hard disk drive in the defunct state does not
necessarily mean that you need to replace the
drive. Before you replace the drive, ensure that:
1. All cables are connected properly to the
backplane or system board, and to the hard
disk drive. Also, ensure that all cables
inside the server are connected properly.
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated
properly in the drive bay.
3. If you have not already attempted to rebuild
the drive, try rebuilding it.
After you perform these steps, if the hard disk
drive does not function properly, replace the
drive.
F6
F7
Modify. This choice is not always active. Press this
key to modify the configuration to match the current
drive location.
You might remove the hot-swap drives from the
server for security or maintenance reasons. If you
replace the drives but install them in different drive
bays, you can press F6 to accept the new locations,
and the ServeRAID adapter or controller will update
the configuration.
Import. Press this key to import the configuration
information from the drive and to update the
configuration information for the ServeRAID adapter
or controller. This choice is useful when you replace
the ServeRAID adapter or controller in an existing
ServeRAID subsystem.
You also might press F7 if you replace a whole set of
drives with drives that were configured in another
server with a ServeRAID adapter or controller.
320
Netfinity Server HMM
Note
When you install drives in a server that has no
logical drives defined, the F7 choice will not
appear. The ServeRAID adapter or controller
does not contain any logical drives in its factory
configuration. Therefore, F7 will not appear. In
this case, do the following:
1. Restart the server and press Ctrl+I to enter
the Mini-Configuration program.
2. Select Advanced Functions.
3. Select Import Configuration from Drives
to Controller and follow the instructions on
the screen.
Controller is not responding to commands. No logical drives
are installed.
Explanation: The ServeRAID adapter or controller is not
operational.
Action: Reseat the controller. If problem persists, replace the
ServeRAID controller.
Error: Cannot disable this controller BIOS.
Explanation: The ServeRAID adapter or controller was unable to
prevent an extra copy of its BIOS code from being stored on the
server. This condition occurs when the server contains multiple
ServeRAID controllers or controllers.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
Following drives found in new location (old ch:
new ch: new SID)
old SID >
Explanation: Configured drives are not in the configured location.
This message will be preceded by the previous messages and the
F5 key choice because configured drives were not found in the
configured location. Appears when the ServeRAID adapter or
controller detects that a previously configured drive is present, but
the drive is in a new location.
Where:
old ch is the channel that matches the existing drive
configuration information.
old SID is the SCSI ID that matches the existing drive
configuration information.
new ch is the channel where the drive is now located.
new SID is the SCSI ID where the drive is now located.
For example:
(1:5 > 1:14)
In this example, the message indicates that the drive from Channel
1, SCSI ID 5 is now located at Channel 1, SCSI ID 14. The drive
might have been physically moved to the new drive bay.
Action: Press one of the following keys:
F4
F5
Retry. Press this key after correcting a problem. For
example, press F4 after you move the hard disk drive to
its previously assigned location.
Accept. Press this key to accept the new state that the
ServeRAID adapter or controller will assign to the drive.
For example, the ServeRAID adapter or controller will
assign the drive a state of defunct (DDD) or empty
(EMP).
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
321
Note
A hard disk drive in the DDD state does not
necessarily mean that you need to replace the
drive. Before you replace the drive, ensure that:
1. All cables are connected properly to the
backplane and to the hard disk drive. Also,
ensure that all cables inside the server are
connected properly.
2. The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly
in the drive bay.
3. If you have not already attempted to rebuild
the drive, try rebuilding it.
After you perform these steps, if the hard disk
drive does not function properly, replace the drive.
F6
Modify. Press this key to modify the configuration to
match the current drive location.
You might remove the hot-swap drives from the server
for security or maintenance reasons. If you replace the
drives but install them in different drive bays, you can
press F6 to accept the new locations, and the
ServeRAID adapter or controller will update the
configuration.
Installation stopped.
Explanation: The server cannot access the ServeRAID adapter
or controller.
Action: This is a follow-on message to a preceding message.
Follow the “Action” instructions for the preceding message to
resolve the problem.
n logical drives are installed.
Explanation: n represents the number of defined logical drives.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
NVRAM Cache Controller Not Responding
Explanation: BIOS code detected a bad or failed Battery-Backup.
Action: Press F9 to remove the Battery-Backup Cache controller
from the configuration, or press F10 to exit without change.
NVRAM Cache Controller Replacement
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller detects that the
Battery-Backup Cache controller is defective.
Action: Press F8 if you replaced the Battery-Backup Cache
controller, or press F10 if you have not replaced the
Battery-Backup Cache controller.
322
Netfinity Server HMM
Recoverable configuration error
Explanation: The configuration data stored in NVRAM
(Battery-Backup Cache) does not match the configuration data
stored in the EEPROM.
Action:
1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.
2. Press CTRL+I during POST to enter the Mini-Configuration
program.
3. Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu; then, select
Import Configuration from Drive(s).
WARNING:
n logical drives are critical; n logical drives are
offline.
Explanation: One or more hard disk drives have failed.
Action: Replace the defunct drives as soon as possible to prevent
data loss.
Your server has an error due to a Blocked Logical Drive.
Explanation: One or more logical drives are in a blocked state. A
blocked logical drive cannot be accessed.
Action: Press F4 to unblock the logical drive, or press F5 to
continue without unblocking.
Unable to communicate with the controller
Explanation: The controller is not responding to commands.
Action: Reseat the controller. If the problem persists, replace the
ServeRAID controller.
Controller Reg. <x> test failed. Test Number: <y>
Explanation: The controller or embedded controller failed the
register test, where <x> is the register number and <y> is the test
number.
Action: Reseat the controller. If the problem persists, replace the
ServeRAID controller.
Controller hardware error
Explanation: The controller is not responding to commands.
Action: Reseat the controller. If the problem persists, replace the
ServeRAID controller.
BIOS not loaded no devices found - Installation stopped.
Explanation: The BIOS is unable to find any logical drives
attached to any ServeRAID controllers. Therefore the ServeRAID
BIOS is not loaded.
Action: Reconnect the cable(s) attaching the hard drives to the
controller and restart the system. If performing a service
procedure, reconnect them when told to do so.
Controller Ok; Devices not responding check cables or
enclosures.
Explanation: A SCSI connection problem has been detected.
Action: Check all cables and devices attached to the ServeRAID
controller. Look for bent or missing pins on all cables and devices.
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
323
Unable to communicate with the following devices. (Channel :
SID)
Explanation: Devices at the channel and SCSI ID specified in the
message are not responding. The devices may have been
removed.
Action: Check that the device(s) are at the location specified. If
they are located in an external enclosure, make sure that the
external enclosure is powered on.
Download codeblk (via bootblk) is ready.
Explanation: Preparations for the download of the firmware to the
controller are complete.
Action: Insert the BIOS/Firmware Diskette and download the
firmware. Restart the system.
Controller is not responding properly - Run Diagnostics.
Explanation: The controller is not responding appropriately to
commands.
Action: Use the ServeRAID DOS Configuration Utility and run the
diagnostics.
System PCI BIOS does not respond to commands; no logical
drives are installed.
Explanation: The system's PCI BIOS is returning error status in
response to calls to it.
Action: Refer to the system's HMM and run diagnostics.
324
Netfinity Server HMM
Undetermined problems
You are here because the diagnostic tests did not identify
the failure, the Devices List is incorrect, or the system is
inoperative.
Notes
1. If you suspect a software mismatch is causing
failures (solid or intermittent), be sure to see
“Resolving configuration conflicts” on page 33.
2. A corrupt CMOS can cause undetermined
problems.
Check the LEDs on all the power supplies, see “Power
supply LED errors” on page 301. If the LEDs indicate the
power supplies are working correctly, return here and do
the following:
1. Power-off the computer.
2. Be sure the system is cabled correctly.
3. Remove or disconnect the following (one at a time)
until you find the failure (power-on the computer and
reconfigure each time).
Ÿ Any external devices
Ÿ Surge suppressor device (on the computer)
Ÿ Modem, printer, mouse, or non-IBM devices
Ÿ Each adapter
Ÿ Drives
Ÿ Memory-Modules (Minimum requirement = 1
bank of 128 MB DIMMs)
Note
Minimum operating requirements are:
Power Supply
Power Backplane
System Board (With pins 2 and 3 on J32's
extension cable connected together to
bypass the power switch. The default is
pins 1 and 2.)
Processor Board (Verify that the J32, J33,
and J35 connectors are installed correctly.)
Memory Module (With a minimum of 1 bank
of 128 MB DIMMs)
1 Microprocessor and VRMs
3 Terminator Cards
4. Power-on the computer. If the problem remains,
suspect the following FRUs in the order listed:
Ÿ Power Supply
Ÿ Power Backplane
Ÿ System Board
Ÿ Processor Board
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
325
Notes
1. If the problem goes away when you remove an
adapter from the system, and replacing that
adapter does not correct the problem, suspect
the system board then the processor board(s).
2. If you suspect a networking problem and all the
system tests pass, suspect a network cabling
problem external to the system.
326
Netfinity Server HMM
15
13
14
12
6
7
8
22
21
28
29
30
27
31
26
25
24
1
2
23
3
4
5
9
20
19
17
18
16
10
11
Parts listing (Type 8662)
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
327
328
Netfinity Server HMM
43
33
42
41
40
32
33
34
36
35
39
38
37
System
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
System (Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type
8662) Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY
FRU
No.
System Board Shield (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
System Board without Memory and
Processor Board (Models 31Y, 3RY,
41Y, 4RY)
Shuttle with Bracket (Models 31Y, 3RY,
41Y, 4RY)
Air Diffuser (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
Hot Swap Power Backplane Card with
5 Power Cables (Model 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
Fan #3 - Long Blower Fan Assembly
with Bracket and Vane (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Fan #2 - Short Blower Fan Assembly
with Bracket (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
Fan #4 - Fan Assembly 92 mm with
Connector and Bracket (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
System Board to Fans 1, 2, and 3
Power Cable (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
Fan 4 Power Cable (Models 31Y, 3RY,
41Y, 4RY)
Voltage Regulator Module (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Processor Support Tray Cover (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
See Processor Support Tray Kit below
450/100 MHz Pentium II Xeon
Processor with 512 KB L2 Cache
(Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
450/100 MHz Pentium II Processor with
1 MB L2 Cache (Models 31Y, 3RY,
41Y, 4RY)
500/100 MHz Processor with 512 KB
L2 Cache (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
500/100 MHz Processor with 1 MB L2
Cache (Option) (Models 31Y, 3RY,
41Y, 4RY)
Processor Terminator Card (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Memory Board (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
Processor Support Tray (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
See Processor Support Tray Kit below
4 GB Processor Board without
microprocessor (Models 31Y, 3RY,
41Y, 4RY)
Front LED Panel and Bracket (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Information LED Panel Cover Lens
(Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
03K9054
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
28L0714
01K6998
28L0630
36L9540
01K6990
01K6988
28L0635
03K9168
36L9552
20L1010
36L9541
28L4557
28L4558
28L4441
28L4442
94H0598
01K7231
36L9541
01K7230
28L0691
28L0643
329
Index
18
19
20
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
330
System (Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type
8662) Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY
Hard Disk Drive (Option) (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Hard Disk Drive Bezel (Black) (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
DASD 6-Drive Cage Assembly (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Sony 32x CD-ROM Assembly
with CD-ROM Drive, 2 Brackets, and 4
Screws (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
LG 32x CD-ROM Drive Only (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
CD-ROM Signal Cable (IDE) (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
1.44MB Diskette Drive, Black (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Diskette Holder Bracket (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Diskette Drive Signal Cable (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
DASD Backplane Board (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Base Frame Assembly (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Interior (Diagnostic) LED and Speaker
Assembly (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
Side Cover Retention Bracket (Models
31Y, 41Y)
500 Watt Hot Swap PFC Power Supply
Assembly with Bracket (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Power Supply Bracket (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
AC Input Blank (Models 31Y, 3RY,
41Y, 4RY)
Cable Management Arm (Models 3RY,
4RY)
Cable Management Arm Bracket
(Models 3RY, 4RY)
Fan #1 - Fan Assembly 92 mm with
Connector and Bracket (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Top Cover (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
Side Access Cover (Models 31Y, 41Y)
Front Bezel without Door Assembly
(Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Media and Switch Trim Panel (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
5.25-Inch Blank Bezel (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Front Bezel Cap (Models 31Y, 41Y)
Keylock with Keys and Pawl (Models
31Y, 41Y)
Keylock Linkage (Models 31Y, 41Y)
DASD Door (Models 31Y, 41Y)
3-U Front Bezel Assembly
with Lock and Keys (Models 31Y, 41Y)
3-U Pedestal Frame (Models 31Y, 41Y)
Netfinity Server HMM
FRU
No.
12J3072
01K6987
28L1637
28L1643
03K9338
76H4091
12J3065
03K9340
76H6880
01K6991
28L0692
12J7040
01K9879
36L9520
28L0633
12J3088
12J3089
01K6999
12J3063
03K8776
01K6997
03K8773
12J3073
12J7041
01K6641
03K8777
03K8778
03K8798
03K8797
Index
42
43
System (Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type
8662) Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY
Foot Pads, 4 each (Models 31Y, 41Y)
3-U Blank Panel (Models 31Y, 41Y)
FRU
No.
03K8800
03K8799
128MB ECC 3.3v REG SDRAM DIMM
(Option) (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
256MB ECC 3.3v REG DIMM (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
512MB ECC 3.3v REG SDRAM DIMM
(Option) (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Air Baffle (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
Door Hinge (Models 31Y, 41Y)
Extension Cable (for J32) (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Keyboard with Cable (Models 31Y,
41Y)
See“Keyboards” on page 333 .
Left and Right EIA Mounting Flange
(Models 3RY, 4RY)
Lift Handle (Models 3RY, 4RY)
Media Bracket (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
Microprocessor Bracket (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
See Processor Support Tray Kit below
Miscellaneous Parts Kit 1 (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Ÿ 32x5/16 Screws (4 each)
Ÿ M3.5x8 Plastite Screws (2 each)
Ÿ M3x5 CD/Bracket Screws (8 each)
Ÿ M3.5x7 Processor Board Screws, (15
each)
Ÿ 6/32x3/16 Screws (8 each)
Ÿ 3.9ID Nylon Washers (2 each)
Ÿ EMC Springs (24 each)
Ÿ Lock Hole Plug (1 each)
Ÿ Cable Tie (1 each)
Ÿ Fan Grommets (4 each)
Miscellaneous Parts Kit 2 (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Ÿ EMI I/O Gasket (1 each)
Ÿ EMI PCI/ISA I/O Gasket (1 each)
Miscellaneous Hot-Swap Parts Kit 3
(Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Ÿ M3x5 Handle Screws (5 each)
Ÿ PCI Card/Housing to Shuttle Screws
(2 each)
Ÿ Insulator with Light Pipes (5 each)
Ÿ Hot Swap PCI Card Clamps (4 each)
Ÿ Hot Swap PCI Card Guides (5 each)
Ÿ Hot Swap PCI I/O Card Guides (6
each)
Ÿ ISA I/O Card Guide (1 each)
Ÿ PCI Filler Plate Bracket (4 each)
Ÿ Hot-Swap Retention Handles (4
each)
Ÿ Switch Card Mounting to Chassis
Housing (1 each)
28L1015
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
01K7391
28L1016
36L9549
01K6637
36L9564
01K6981
03K9069
12J5681
36L9541
12J3079
03K8782
28L4526
331
Index
332
System (Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type
8662) Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY
Miscellaneous Rack Kit 4 (Models 3RY,
4RY)
Ÿ M6x16 Screws, Slide-Bracket to
Rack (16 each)
Ÿ M3.5x7 (EIA Flanges to Chassis
Screws) (6 each)
Ÿ M4x8 Screws, Slides to Chassis (8
each)
Ÿ M6 Nut Clips, Slide-Bracket to Rack
(6 each)
Ÿ M6 Nuts, Flange Arm to Bracket (2
each)
Mouse (Models 31Y, 41Y)
PCI Hot-Swap Latch Card (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Power Supply Filler Panel (Models 31Y,
41Y)
Power Cord (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
See“Power cords” on page 335 .
Power Switch (Button) Assembly with
Bracket (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Processor Support Tray Kit (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Rack Slide-Bracket Assembly (Models
3RY, 4RY)
RS-485 Internal Cable (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
SCSI to Media Bay Cable (3X) (Models
31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
SCSI to External Port Cable with
Bracket (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
SCSI to Hot-Swap Backplane Cable
(Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Short Insulator (Models 31Y, 3RY, 41Y,
4RY)
System Battery (Models 31Y, 3RY,
41Y, 4RY)
System Service Label (Models 31Y,
3RY, 41Y, 4RY)
Netfinity Server HMM
FRU
No.
12J3090
76H0889
03K8982
01K6996
01K7003
36L9541
03K8775
03K9321
12J3711
36L9537
12J3274
36L9548
33F8354
28L0694
Keyboards
Keyboards
FRU No.
Arabic
37L0818
02K0870
37L0819
02K0871
37L0820
02K0872
37L0817
02K0869
37L0821
02K0873
37L0848
02K0900
37L0822
02K0874
37L0823
02K0875
37L0824
02K0876
37L0825
02K0877
37L0815
02K0863
37L0826
02K0878
37L0827
02K0879
37L0828
02K0880
37L0829
02K0881
37L0830
02K0882
37L0831
02K0883
37L0847
02K0899
37L0849
37L0816
02K0867
37L0832
02K0884
37L0833
02K0885
37L0834
02K0886
37L0835
02K0887
37L0836
02K0888
37L0837
02K0889
37L0838
02K0890
37L0839
02K0891
37L0840
02K0892
Belgian-French
Belgian-UK/Dutch
Brazil/Portugal
Bulgarian
Chinese/US
Czech
Danish
Dutch
French
French/Canadian-ID 058
German
Greek
Hebrew
Hungarian
Icelandic
Italian
Japan
Korean
Latin/Spanish
Norwegian
Polish
Portuguese
Romania
Russian
Serbian/Cyrillic
Slovic
Spanish
Swedish/Finnish
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
333
Keyboards
FRU No.
Swiss French/German
37L0841
02K0893
37L0848
37L0850
02K0902
37L0842
02K0894
37L0843
02K0895
37L0844
02K0896
37L0814
02K0861
37L0846
02K0898
37L0845
02K0897
Taiwanese
Thailand
Turkish (ID 179)
Turkish (ID 440)
UK English
US English
UK English (ISO Compliant)
Yugoslavia/Lithuania
334
Netfinity Server HMM
Power cords
Power Cords
FRU No.
Arabic
Belgium
Bulgaria
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Israel
Italy
Latvia
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Serbia
Slovakia
South Africa
Spain
Switzerland
Switzerland (French/German)
U.S. English
U.K./Ireland
Yugoslavia
14F0033
1339520
1339520
1339520
13F9997
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
14F0087
14F0069
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
1339520
14F0015
1339520
1339520
14F0051
62X1045
14F0033
1339520
Netfinity 5500 M20 - Type 8662
335
336
Netfinity Server HMM
Related service information
Important
The service procedures are designed to help you
isolate problems. They are written with the
assumption that you have model-specific training on
all computers, or that are familiar with the computers,
functions, terminology, and service information
provided in this manual.
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . .
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical safety
. . . . . . . . . . .
Safety inspection guide
. . . . . . .
Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive
Grounding requirements
. . . . . . .
Laser compliance statement . . . . . . .
Send us your comments!
. . . . . . . .
Problem determination tips
. . . . . . .
Phone numbers, U.S. and Canada . . . .
Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
devices
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
338
363
364
365
366
367
367
370
371
372
374
374
337
Safety information
The following section contains the safety information that
you need to be familiar with before servicing an IBM
mobile computer.
DANGER
To avoid a shock hazard, do not connect or
disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this
product during an electrical storm.
To avoid shock hazard:
Ÿ
Ÿ
The power cord must be connected to a
properly wired and earthed receptacle.
Any equipment to which this product will
be attached must also be connected to
properly wired receptacles.
When possible, use one hand to connect or
disconnect signal cables to prevent a
possible shock from touching two surfaces
with different electrical potentials.
Electrical current from power, telephone, and
communications cables is hazardous. To
avoid shock hazard, connect and disconnect
cables as described following when
installing, moving, or opening covers of this
product or attached devices.
To Connect
1. Turn Everything OFF.
2. First, attach all cables to
devices.
3. Attach signal cables to
receptacles.
4. Attach power cord(s) to
outlet.
5. Turn device ON.
NOTE: In the UK, by law, the
telephone cable must be
connected after the power cord.
338
Netfinity Server HMM
To Disconnect
1. Turn Everything OFF.
2. First, remove power cord(s)
from outlet.
3. Remove signal cables from
receptacles.
4. Remove all cables from
devices.
NOTE: In the UK, the power
cord must be disconnected after
the telephone cable.
CAUTION:
When replacing the battery, use only IBM Part Number
33F8354 or an equivalent type battery recommended
by the manufacturer. If the system has a module
containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the
same module type made by the same manufacturer.
The battery contains lithium and can explode if not
properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Throw or immerse into water
Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances
or regulations.
CAUTION:
When a CD-ROM drive is installed, note the following.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein might
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Removing the covers of the CD-ROM drive could result
in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no
serviceable parts inside the CD-ROM drive. Do not
remove the CD-ROM drive covers.
DANGER
Some CD-ROM drives contain an embedded
Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the
following.
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into
the beam, do not view directly with optical
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the
beam.
Related service information
339
k32 kg (70.5
lbs)
k55 kg (121.2
lbs)
CAUTION:
Use safe lifting practices when lifting the machine.
CAUTION:
The Power Control button on the front of the server
does not turn off the electrical current supplied to the
server. The server also might have more than one
power cord. To remove all electrical current from the
server, ensure that all power cords are disconnected
from the power source.
CAUTION:
When the power cord bracket option is installed on the
power cord, the server must be plugged to a power
source that is easily accessible.
>50 kg (110
lbs)
CAUTION:
Do not place any object weighing more than 50 kg (110
lbs) on top of the rack model of the server.
340
Netfinity Server HMM
DANGER
Para evitar choques elétricos, não conecte ou
desconecte nenhum cabo, nem efetue
instalação, manutenção ou reconfiguração
deste produto durante uma tempestade com
raios.
Para evitar choques elétricos:
Ÿ
Ÿ
O cabo de alimentação deve ser
conectado a um receptáculo
corretamente instalado e aterrado.
Todos os equipamentos aos quais este
produto será conectado devem também
ser conectados a receptáculos
corretamente instalados.
Quando possível, utilize uma das mãos para
conectar ou desconectar cabos de sinal, para
evitar um possível choque ao tocar duas
superfícies com potenciais elétricos
diferentes.
A corrente elétrica proveniente de cabos de
alimentação, de telefone e de comunicação é
perigosa. Para evitar choques elétricos,
conecte e desconecte os cabos conforme
descrito a seguir, ao instalar, movimentar ou
abrir tampas deste produto ou de
dispositivos conectados.
Para Conectar
Para Desconectar
1. DESLIGUE tudo.
2. Conecte primeiro todos os
cabos nos dispositivos.
3. Conecte os cabos de sinal
nos receptáculos.
4. Conecte o(s) cabo(s) de
alimentação nas tomadas.
5. LIGUE o dispositivo.
1. DESLIGUE tudo.
2. Remova primeiro o(s)
cabo(s) de alimentação das
tomadas.
3. Remova os cabos de sinal
dos receptáculos.
4. Remova todos os cabos
dos dispositivos.
Related service information
341
CAUTION:
Ao substituir a bateria, utilize apenas o Número de
Peça IBM 33F8354 ou um tipo de bateria equivalente
recomendado pelo fabricante. Se seu sistema possuir
um módulo com uma bateria de lítio, substitua-o
apenas pelo mesmo tipo de módulo, produzido pelo
mesmo fabricante. A bateria contém lítio e pode
explodir se não for utilizada, manuseada e descartada
de forma adequada.
Não:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Jogue ou coloque na água
Aqueça a mais de 100°C (212°F)
Conserte nem desmonte.
Descarte a bateria conforme requerido pelas
disposições e regulamentações locais.
CAUTION:
Quando uma unidade de CD-ROM estiver instalada,
observe o seguinte.
A utilização de controles ou ajustes ou a execução de
procedimentos diferentes daqueles especificados
nesta publicação pode resultar em exposição perigosa
à radiação.
A remoção das tampas da unidade de CD-ROM pode
resultar em exposição a radiação perigosa de laser.
Não existem peças que possam ser consertadas no
interior da unidade de CD-ROM. Não remova as
tampas da unidade de CD-ROM.
DANGER
Algumas unidades de CD-ROM contém um
diodo de laser da Classe 3A ou da Classe 3B.
Observe o seguinte.
Radiação de laser quando aberto. Não olhe
diretamente para o feixe de laser, não olhe
diretamente com instrumentos óticos, e evite
exposição direta ao raio.
342
Netfinity Server HMM
k32 kg (70,5
lbs)
k55 kg (121,2
lbs)
CAUTION:
Utilize práticas seguras para levantamento de peso ao
levantar sua máquina.
CAUTION:
O botão de Controle de Energia na parte frontal do
servidor não desliga a corrente elétrica fornecida ao
servidor. O servidor pode também possuir mais que
um cabo de alimentação. Para remover toda a corrente
elétrica do servidor, assegure que todos os cabos de
alimentação estejam desconectados da fonte de
energia.
CAUTION:
Quando o suporte do cabo de alimentação estiver
instalado no cabo de alimentação, o servidor deve
estar conectado a uma fonte de energia de fácil
acesso.
>50 kg (110
lbs)
CAUTION:
Não coloque qualquer objeto com peso superior a 50
kg (110 lbs) sobre o modelo de gaveta do servidor.
Related service information
343
344
Netfinity Server HMM
Related service information
345
346
Netfinity Server HMM
Related service information
347
DANGER
Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique, ne
manipulez aucun câble et n'effectuez aucune
opération d'installation, d'entretien ou de
reconfiguration de ce produit au cours d'un
orage.
Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique :
Ÿ
Les cordons d'alimentation du présent
produit et de tous les appareils qui lui
sont connectés doivent être branchés
sur des socles de prise de courant
correctement câblés et mis à la terre.
Afin d'éviter tout risque de choc électrique
provenant d'une différence de potentiel de
terre, n'utilisez qu'une main, lorsque cela est
possible, pour connecter ou déconnecter les
cordons d'interface.
Le courant électrique passant dans les
câbles de communication, ou les cordons
téléphoniques et d'alimentation peut être
dangereux. Pour éviter tout risque de choc
électrique, lorsque vous installez ou que
vous déplacez le présent produit ou des
périphériques qui lui sont raccordés,
reportez-vous aux instructions ci-dessous
pour connecter et déconnecter les différents
cordons.
Connexion
1. Mettez les unités hors
tension.
2. Commencez par brancher
tous les cordons sur les
unités.
3. Branchez les câbles
d'interface sur les prises.
4. Branchez les cordons
d'alimentation sur un socle
de prise de courant.
5. Mettez les unités sous
tension.
348
Netfinity Server HMM
Déconnexion
1. Mettez les unités hors
tension.
2. Commencez pas
débrancher les cordons
alimentation des socles de
prise de courant.
3. Débranchez les câbles
d'interface des prises.
4. Débranchez tous les câbles
des unités.
CAUTION:
Remplacez la pile usagée par une pile de référence
identique exclusivement - voir la référence IBM - ou
par une pile équivalente recommandée par le fabricant.
Si votre système est doté d'un module contenant une
pile au lithium, vous devez le remplacer uniquement
par un module identique, produit par le même
fabricant. La pile contient du lithium et présente donc
un risque d'explosion en cas de mauvaise
manipulation ou utilisation.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ne la jetez pas à l'eau.
Ne l'exposez pas à une température supérieure à
100 °C.
Ne cherchez pas à la réparer ou à la démonter.
Pour la mise au rebut, reportez-vous à la
réglementation en vigueur.
CAUTION:
Si une unité de CD-ROM est installée, prenez
connaissance des informations suivantes :
Pour éviter tout risque d'exposition au rayon laser,
respectez les consignes de réglage et d'utilisation des
commandes, ainsi que les procédures décrites dans le
présent document.
Pour éviter une exposition directe au rayon laser,
n'ouvrez pas l'unité de CD-ROM. Vous ne pouvez
effectuer aucune opération de maintenance à
l'intérieur.
Related service information
349
DANGER
Certaines unités de CD-ROM contiennent une
diode laser de classe 3A ou 3B. Prenez
connaissance des informations suivantes :
Rayonnement laser lorsque le carter est
ouvert. Évitez de regarder fixement le
faisceau ou de l'observer à l'aide
d'instruments optiques. Évitez une exposition
directe au rayon.
k32 kg
k55 kg
CAUTION:
Ce produit pèse un poids considérable. Faites-vous
aider pour le soulever.
CAUTION:
Le bouton de mise sous tension/hors tension situé sur
la face avant du serveur ne coupe pas l'arrivée de
courant électrique à l'intérieur de la machine. Il se peut
que votre serveur dispose de plusieurs cordons
d'alimentation. Pour isoler totalement le serveur du
réseau électrique, débranchez tous les cordons
d'alimentation des socles de prise de courant.
CAUTION:
Lorsqu'une patte de fixation du cordon d'alimentation
est installée, branchez le serveur sur une prise de
courant électrique facile d'accès.
350
Netfinity Server HMM
>50 kg
CAUTION:
Ne posez pas d'objet dont le poids dépasse 50 kg sur
les modèles tiroir de serveur.
Related service information
351
DANGER
Aus Sicherheitsgründen bei Gewitter an
diesem Gerät keine Kabel anschließen oder
lösen. Ferner keine Installations-, Wartungsoder Rekonfigurationsarbeiten durchführen.
Aus Sicherheitsgründen:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Gerät nur an eine
Schutzkontaktsteckdose mit
ordnungsgemäß geerdetem
Schutzkontakt anschließen.
Alle angeschlossenen Geräte ebenfalls
an Schutzkontaktsteckdosen mit
ordnungsgemäß geerdetem
Schutzkontakt anschließen.
Signalkabel möglichst einhändig anschließen
oder lösen, um einen Stromschlag durch
Berühren von Oberflächen mit
unterschiedlichem elektrischem Potential zu
vermeiden.
Elektrische Spannungen von Netz-, Telefonund Datenübertragungsleitungen sind
gefährlich. Um einen Stromschlag zu
vermeiden, nur nach den Anweisungen
arbeiten, die für Installation, Transport oder
Öffnen von Gehäusen dieses Produkts oder
angeschlossenen Einheiten gelten.
Kabel anschließen
1. Alle Geräte ausschalten und
Netzstecker ziehen.
2. Zuerst alle Kabel an
Einheiten anschließen.
3. Signalkabel an
Anschlußbuchsen
anschließen.
4. Netzstecker an Steckdose
anschließen.
5. Gerät einschalten.
352
Netfinity Server HMM
Kabel lösen
1. Alle Geräte ausschalten.
2. Zuerst Netzstecker von
Steckdose lösen.
3. Signalkabel von
Anschlußbuchsen lösen.
4. Alle Kabel von Einheiten
lösen.
CAUTION:
Eine verbrauchte Batterie nur durch eine Batterie mit
der IBM Teilenummer 33F8354 oder durch eine vom
Hersteller empfohlene Batterie ersetzen. Wenn Ihr
System ein Modul mit einer Lithium-Batterie enthält,
ersetzen Sie es immer mit dem selben Modultyp vom
selben Hersteller. Die Batterie enthält Lithium und
kann bei unsachgemäßer Verwendung, Handhabung
oder Entsorgung explodieren.
Die Batterie nicht
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
mit Wasser in Berührung bringen.
über 100 C erhitzen.
reparieren oder zerlegen.
Die örtlichen Bestimmungen für die Entsorgung von
Sondermüll beachten.
CAUTION:
Wenn ein CD-ROM-Laufwerk installiert ist, beachten
Sie folgendes. Steuer- und Einstellelemente sowie
Verfahren nur entsprechend den Anweisungen im
vorliegenden Handbuch einsetzen. Andernfalls kann
gefährliche Laserstrahlung auftreten.
Das Entfernen der Abdeckungen des
CD-ROM-Laufwerks kann zu gefährlicher
Laserstrahlung führen. Es befinden sich keine Teile
innerhalb des CD-ROM-Laufwerks, die vom Benutzer
gewartet werden müssen. Die Verkleidung des
CD-ROM-Laufwerks nicht öffnen.
DANGER
Manche CD-ROM-Laufwerke enthalten eine
eingebaute Laserdiode der Klasse 3A oder
3B. Die nachfolgend aufgeführten Punkte
beachten.
Laserstrahlung bei geöffneter Tür. Niemals
direkt in den Laserstrahl sehen, nicht direkt
mit optischen Instrumenten betrachten und
den Strahlungsbereich meiden.
Related service information
353
k32 kg
k55 kg
CAUTION:
Beim Anheben der Maschine die vorgeschriebenen
Sicherheitsbestimmungen beachten.
CAUTION:
Mit dem Betriebsspannungsschalter an der Vorderseite
des Servers wird die Stromversorgung für den Server
nicht unterbrochen. Der Server könnte auch mehr als
ein Netzkabel aufweisen. Um die gesamte
Stromversorgung des Servers auszuschalten, muß
sichergestellt werden, daß alle Netzkabel aus den
Netzsteckdosen herausgezogen wurden.
CAUTION:
Wenn am Netzkabel eine Kabelhalterung angebracht
ist, muß der Server an eine leicht zugängliche
Netzsteckdose angeschlossen werden.
>50 kg
CAUTION:
Legen Sie keine Gegenstände, die mehr als 50 kg
wiegen, auf das Einschubmodell des Servers.
354
Netfinity Server HMM
PERICOLO
Per evitare il pericolo di scosse elettriche
durante i temporali, non collegare o
scollegare cavi, non effettuare l'installazione,
la manutenzione o la riconfigurazione di
questo prodotto.
Per evitare il pericolo di scosse elettriche:
Ÿ
Ÿ
collegare il cavo di alimentazione ad una
presa elettrica correttamente cablata e
munita di terra di sicurezza;
collegare qualsiasi apparecchiatura
collegata a questo prodotto ad una
presa elettrica correttamente cablata e
munita di terra di sicurezza.
Quando possibile, collegare o scollegare i
cavi di segnale con una sola mano per
evitare il rischio di scosse derivanti dal
contatto con due superfici a diverso
potenziale elettrico.
La corrente elettrica circolante nei cavi di
alimentazione, del telefono e di segnale è
pericolosa. Per evitare scosse elettriche,
collegare e scollegare i cavi come descritto
quando si effettuano l'installazione, la
rimozione o l'apertura dei coperchi di questo
prodotto o durante il collegamento delle
unità.
Per collegare
Per scollegare
1. SPEGNERE tutti i
dispositivi.
2. Collegare prima tutti i cavi
alle unità.
3. Collegare i cavi di segnale
alle prese.
4. Collegare il(i) cavo(i) di
alimentazione alla presa
elettrica.
5. ACCENDERE le unità.
1. SPEGNERE tutti i
dispositivi.
2. Rimuovere prima il(i) cavo(i)
di alimentazione dalla presa
elettrica.
3. Rimuovere i cavi di segnale
dalle prese.
4. Rimuovere tutti i cavi dalle
unità.
Related service information
355
ATTENZIONE:
Quando si sostituisce la batteria, utilizzare solo una
batteria IBM o batterie dello stesso tipo o di tipo
equivalente consigliate dal produttore. Se il sistema di
cui si dispone è provvisto di un modulo contenente
una batteria al litio, sostituire tale batteria solo con un
tipo di modulo uguale a quello fornito dal produttore.
La batteria contiene litio e può esplodere se utilizzata,
maneggiata o smaltita impropriamente.
Evitare di:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Gettarla o immergerla in acqua
Riscaldarla ad una temperatura superiore ai 100°
C
Cercare di ripararla o smaltirla
Smaltire secondo la normativa in vigore (D.Lgs 22 del
5/2/97) e successive disposizioni nazionali e locali.
ATTENZIONE:
Quando è installata un'unità CD-ROM, notare quanto
segue:
L'utilizzo di controlli, regolazioni o l'esecuzione di
procedure non descritti nel presente manuale possono
provocare l'esposizione a radiazioni pericolose.
L'apertura di un'unità CD-ROM può determinare
l'esposizione a radiazioni laser pericolose. All'interno
dell'unità CD-ROM non vi sono parti su cui effettuare
l'assistenza tecnica. Non rimuovere i coperchi
dell'unità CD-ROM.
PERICOLO
Alcune unità CD-ROM contengono all'interno
un diodo laser di Classe 3A o Classe 3B.
Prestare attenzione a quanto segue:
Aprendo l'unità vengono emesse radiazioni
laser. Non fissare il fascio, non guardarlo
direttamente con strumenti ottici ed evitare
l'esposizione diretta al fascio.
356
Netfinity Server HMM
k32 kg
k55 kg
ATTENZIONE:
Durante il sollevamento della macchina seguire delle
norme di di sicurezza.
ATTENZIONE:
Il pulsante del controllo dell'alimentazione situato nella
parte anteriore del servente non disattiva la corrente
elettrica fornita al servente. Il servente potrebbe anche
avere più di un cavo di alimentazione. Per disattivare
la corrente elettrica del servente, assicurarsi che tutti i
cavi di alimentazione siano scollegati dalla sorgente di
alimentazione.
ATTENZIONE:
Quando sul cavo di alimentazione è installata l'opzione
di sostegno del cavo, il servente deve essere collocato
in prossimità di una presa elettrica facilmente
accessibile.
>50 kg
ATTENZIONE:
Non poggiare oggetti che pesano più di 50 kg sulla
parte superiore del servente.
Related service information
357
358
Netfinity Server HMM
Related service information
359
DANGER
Para evitar una posible descarga eléctrica, no
conecte ni desconecte los cables ni lleve a
cabo ninguna operación de instalación, de
mantenimiento o de reconfiguración de este
producto durante una tormenta eléctrica.
Para evitar una posible descarga:
Ÿ
Ÿ
El cable de alimentación debe
conectarse a un receptáculo con una
instalación eléctrica correcta y con toma
de tierra.
Los aparatos a los que se conecte este
producto también deben estar
conectados a receptáculos con la debida
instalación eléctrica.
Cuando sea posible, utilice una sola mano
para conectar o desconectar los cables de
señal a fin de evitar una posible descarga al
tocar dos superficies con distinto potencial
eléctrico.
La corriente eléctrica de los cables de
comunicaciones, teléfono y alimentación
puede resultar peligrosa. Para evitar una
posible descarga, siga las indicaciones de
conexión y desconexión de los cables
siempre que tenga que instalar, mover o abrir
las cubiertas de este producto o de los
dispositivos acoplados.
Instrucciones de conexión
1. Apague todos los
componentes (OFF).
2. En primer lugar, conecte
todos los cables a los
dispositivos.
3. Conecte los cables de señal
a los receptáculos.
4. Conecte los cables de
alimentación a las tomas.
5. Encienda el dispositivo
(ON).
360
Netfinity Server HMM
Instrucciones de desconexión
1. Encienda todos los
componentes (ON).
2. En primer lugar, retire los
cables de alimentación de
las tomas.
3. Retire los cables de señal
de los receptáculos.
4. Retire todos los cables de
los dispositivos.
CAUTION:
Al cambiar la batería, utilice únicamente la batería IBM
Número de pieza 33F8354 o un tipo de batería
equivalente recomendado por el fabricante. Si el
sistema tiene un módulo que contiene una batería de
litio, sustitúyalo únicamente por el mismo tipo de
módulo del mismo fabricante. La batería contiene litio
y puede explotar si no se utiliza, manipula o desecha
correctamente.
Lo que no debe hacer
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Tirar o sumergir el producto en agua.
Exponer el producto a una temperatura superior a
100°C.
Reparar o desmontar el producto.
Cuando quiera desechar la batería, siga las
disposiciones y reglamentaciones locales.
CAUTION:
Cuando instale una unidad de CD-ROM, tenga en
cuenta la siguiente información.
Si se llevan a cabo controles o ajustes o se utilizan
métodos que no se atengan a lo aquí especificado, se
puede producir una exposición peligrosa a las
radiaciones.
Si se retiran las cubiertas de la unidad de CD-ROM, se
puede producir una peligrosa exposición a radiaciones
de láser. Dentro de la unidad de CD-ROM no existen
piezas reparables. No retire las cubiertas de la unidad
de CD-ROM.
Related service information
361
DANGER
Algunas unidades de CD-ROM tienen
incorporado un diodo de láser de Clase 3A o
de Clase 3B Tenga en cuenta la siguiente
información.
Cuando la unidad está abierta se generan
emisiones de rayos láser. No dirija la mirada
al haz, no lo observe directamente con
instrumentos ópticos y evite la exposición
directa.
k32 kg
k55 kg
CAUTION:
Alce la máquina con cuidado; el sobrepeso podría
causar alguna lesión.
CAUTION:
El botón de control de alimentación del panel frontal
del servidor no apaga la corriente eléctrica
suministrada al servidor. Puede suceder que el
servidor tenga más de un cable de alimentación. Para
eliminar por completo la corriente eléctrica del
servidor, asegúrese de desconectar todos los cables
de alimentación del suministro de alimentación.
CAUTION:
Cuando la opción de soporte del cable de alimentación
está instalada en el cable de alimentación, el servidor
debe estar conectado a un suministro de alimentación
de fácil acceso.
362
Netfinity Server HMM
>50 kg
CAUTION:
No coloque ningún objeto cuyo peso sea superior a
los 50 kilos sobre la bandeja modelo del servidor.
General safety
Follow these rules to ensure general safety:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Observe good housekeeping in the area of the
machines during and after maintenance.
When lifting any heavy object:
1. Ensure you can stand safely without slipping.
2. Distribute the weight of the object equally
between your feet.
3. Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly
or twist when you attempt to lift.
4. Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg
muscles; this action removes the strain from the
muscles in your back. Do not attempt to lift any
objects that weigh more than 16 kg (35 lb) or
objects that you think are too heavy for you.
Do not perform any action that causes hazards to the
customer, or that makes the equipment unsafe.
Before you start the machine, ensure that other
service representatives and the customer's personnel
are not in a hazardous position.
Place removed covers and other parts in a safe
place, away from all personnel, while you are
servicing the machine.
Keep your tool case away from walk areas so that
other people will not trip over it.
Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the
moving parts of a machine. Ensure that your sleeves
are fastened or rolled up above your elbows. If your
hair is long, fasten it.
Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside clothing
or fasten it with a nonconductive clip, approximately 8
centimeters (3 inches) from the end.
Do not wear jewelry, chains, metal-frame eyeglasses,
or metal fasteners for your clothing.
Remember: Metal objects are good electrical
conductors.
Wear safety glasses when you are: hammering,
drilling soldering, cutting wire, attaching springs, using
solvents, or working in any other conditions that might
be hazardous to your eyes.
After service, reinstall all safety shields, guards,
labels, and ground wires. Replace any safety device
that is worn or defective.
Related service information
363
Ÿ
Reinstall all covers correctly before returning the
machine to the customer.
Electrical safety
Caution
Electrical current from power, telephone, and
communication cables can be hazardous. To avoid
personal injury or equipment damage, disconnect the
attached power cords, telecommunication systems,
networks, and modems before you open the server
covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation
and configuration procedures.
Observe the following rules when working on electrical
equipment.
Important
Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some
hand tools have handles covered with a soft material
that does not insulate you when working with live
electrical currents.
Many customers have, near their equipment, rubber
floor mats that contain small conductive fibers to
decrease electrostatic discharges. Do not use this
type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Find the room emergency power-off (EPO) switch,
disconnecting switch, or electrical outlet. If an
electrical accident occurs, you can then operate the
switch or unplug the power cord quickly.
Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or
near equipment that has hazardous voltages.
Disconnect all power before:
– Performing a mechanical inspection
– Working near power supplies
– Removing or installing main units
Before you start to work on the machine, unplug the
power cord. If you cannot unplug it, ask the customer
to power-off the wall box that supplies power to the
machine and to lock the wall box in the off position.
If you need to work on a machine that has exposed
electrical circuits, observe the following precautions:
– Ensure that another person, familiar with the
power-off controls, is near you.
Remember: Another person must be there to
switch off the power, if necessary.
364
Netfinity Server HMM
–
–
–
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Use only one hand when working with
powered-on electrical equipment; keep the other
hand in your pocket or behind your back.
Remember: There must be a complete circuit to
cause electrical shock. By observing the above
rule, you may prevent a current from passing
through your body.
When using testers, set the controls correctly
and use the approved probe leads and
accessories for that tester.
Stand on suitable rubber mats (obtained locally,
if necessary) to insulate you from grounds such
as metal floor strips and machine frames.
Observe the special safety precautions when you
work with very high voltages; these instructions are in
the safety sections of maintenance information. Use
extreme care when measuring high voltages.
Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand
tools for safe operational condition.
Do not use worn or broken tools and testers.
Never assume that power has been disconnected
from a circuit. First, check that it has been
powered-off.
Always look carefully for possible hazards in your
work area. Examples of these hazards are moist
floors, nongrounded power extension cables, power
surges, and missing safety grounds.
Do not touch live electrical circuits with the reflective
surface of a plastic dental mirror. The surface is
conductive; such touching can cause personal injury
and machine damage.
Do not service the following parts with the power on
when they are removed from their normal operating
places in a machine:
– Power supply units
– Pumps
– Blowers and fans
– Motor generators
and similar units. (This practice ensures correct
grounding of the units.)
If an electrical accident occurs:
– Use caution; do not become a victim
yourself.
– Switch off power.
– Send another person to get medical aid.
Safety inspection guide
The intent of this inspection guide is to assist you in
identifying potentially unsafe conditions on these products.
Each machine, as it was designed and built, had required
safety items installed to protect users and service
personnel from injury. This guide addresses only those
items. However, good judgment should be used to identify
Related service information
365
potential safety hazards due to attachment of non-IBM
features or options not covered by this inspection guide.
If any unsafe conditions are present, you must determine
how serious the apparent hazard could be and whether
you can continue without first correcting the problem.
Consider these conditions and the safety hazards they
present:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Electrical hazards, especially primary power (primary
voltage on the frame can cause serious or fatal
electrical shock).
Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or
bulging capacitor
Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing
hardware
The guide consists of a series of steps presented in a
checklist. Begin the checks with the power off, and the
power cord disconnected.
Checklist:
1. Check exterior covers for damage (loose, broken, or
sharp edges).
2. Power-off the computer. Disconnect the power cord.
3. Check the power cord for:
a. A third-wire ground connector in good condition.
Use a meter to measure third-wire ground
continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between the
external ground pin and frame ground.
b. The power cord should be the appropriate type
as specified in the parts listings.
c. Insulation must not be frayed or worn.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use
good judgment as to the safety of any non-IBM
alterations.
6. Check inside the unit for any obvious unsafe
conditions, such as metal filings, contamination, water
or other liquids, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
8. Check that the power supply cover fasteners (screws
or rivets) have not been removed or tampered with.
Handling electrostatic
discharge-sensitive devices
Any computer part containing transistors or integrated
circuits (ICs) should be considered sensitive to electrostatic
discharge (ESD). ESD damage can occur when there is a
difference in charge between objects. Protect against ESD
damage by equalizing the charge so that the machine, the
part, the work mat, and the person handling the part are all
at the same charge.
366
Netfinity Server HMM
Notes:
1. Use product-specific ESD procedures when they
exceed the requirements noted here.
2. Make sure that the ESD protective devices you use
have been certified (ISO 9000) as fully effective.
When handling ESD-sensitive parts:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Keep the parts in protective packages until they are
inserted into the product.
Avoid contact with other people.
Wear a grounded wrist strap against your skin to
eliminate static on your body.
Prevent the part from touching your clothing. Most
clothing is insulative and retains a charge even when
you are wearing a wrist strap.
Use the black side of a grounded work mat to provide
a static-free work surface. The mat is especially
useful when handling ESD-sensitive devices.
Select a grounding system, such as those listed
below, to provide protection that meets the specific
service requirement.
Note: The use of a grounding system is desirable
but not required to protect against ESD
damage.
–
–
–
Attach the ESD ground clip to any frame ground,
ground braid, or green-wire ground.
Use an ESD common ground or reference point
when working on a double-insulated or
battery-operated system. You can use coax or
connector-outside shells on these systems.
Use the round ground-prong of the AC plug on
AC-operated computers.
Grounding requirements
Electrical grounding of the computer is required for
operator safety and correct system function. Proper
grounding of the electrical outlet can be verified by a
certified electrician.
Laser compliance statement
Some IBM Personal Computer models are equipped from
the factory with a CD-ROM drive. CD-ROM drives are
also sold separately as options. The CD-ROM drive is a
laser product. The CD-ROM drive is certified in the U.S. to
conform to the requirements of the Department of Health
and Human Services 21 Code of Federal Regulations
(DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products.
Elsewhere, the drive is certified to conform to the
requirements of the International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) 825 and CENELEC EN 60 825 for
Class 1 laser products.
Related service information
367
When a CD-ROM drive is installed, note the following.
CAUTION:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein might
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
O uso de controles, ajustes ou desempenho de
procedimentos diferentes daqueles aqui especificados
pode resultar em perigosa exposição à radiação.
Pour éviter tout risque d'exposition au rayon laser,
respectez les consignes de réglage et d'utilisation des
commandes, ainsi que les procédures décrites.
Werden Steuer- und Einstellelemente anders als hier
festgesetzt verwendet, kann gefährliche
Laserstrahlung auftreten.
L'utilizzo di controlli, regolazioni o l'esecuzione di
procedure diverse da quelle specificate possono
provocare l'esposizione a
El uso de controles o ajustes o la ejecución de
procedimientos distintos de los aquí especificados
puede provocar la exposición a radiaciones
peligrosas.
Opening the CD-ROM drive could result in exposure to
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts
inside the CD-ROM drive. Do not open.
Some CD-ROM drives contain an embedded Class 3A or
Class 3B laser diode. Note the following.
DANGER:
368
Netfinity Server HMM
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the
beam, do not view directly with optical instruments,
and avoid direct exposure to the beam.
Radiação por raio laser ao abrir. Não olhe fixo no feixe
de luz, não olhe diretamente por meio de instrumentos
óticos e evite exposição direta com o feixe de luz.
Rayonnement laser si carter ouvert. Évitez de fixer le
faisceau, de le regarder directement avec des
instruments optiques, ou de vous exposer au rayon.
Laserstrahlung bei geöffnetem Gerät. Nicht direkt oder
über optische Instrumente in den Laserstrahl sehen
und den Strahlungsbereich meiden.
Kinyitáskor lézersugár ! Ne nézzen bele se szabad
szemmel, se optikai eszközökkel. Kerülje a
sugárnyalábbal való érintkezést !
Aprendo l'unità vengono emesse radiazioni laser. Non
fissare il fascio, non guardarlo direttamente con
strumenti ottici e evitare l'esposizione diretta al fascio.
Radiación láser al abrir. No mire fijamente ni examine
con instrumental óptico el haz de luz. Evite la
exposición directa al haz.
Related service information
369
Send us your comments!
We want to know your opinion about this manual (part
number 37L2020). Your input will help us to improve our
publications.
Please photocopy this survey, complete it, and then fax it
to IBM HMM Survey at 919-543-8167 (USA).
Name
Phone Number
1. Do you like this manual?
Ø Yes
Ø No
2. What would you like to see added, changed, or
deleted in this manual?
3. What is your service experience level?
Ø Less than five years
Ø More than five years
4. Which Servers do you service most?
Thanks in advance for your response!
370
Netfinity Server HMM
Problem determination tips
Due to the variety of hardware and software combinations
that can be encountered, use the following information to
assist you in problem determination. If possible, have this
information available when requesting assistance from
Service Support and Engineering functions.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Machine type and model
Microprocessor or hard disk upgrades
Failure symptom
– Do diagnostics fail?
– What, when, where, single, or multiple systems?
– Is the failure repeatable?
– Has this configuration ever worked?
– If it has been working, what changes were made
prior to it failing?
– Is this the original reported failure?
Reference/Diagnostics Diskette Version
– Type and version level
Hardware configuration
– Print (print screen) configuration currently in use
– BIOS level
Operating system software
– Type and version level
Important
To eliminate confusion, identical systems are
considered identical only if they:
1. Are the exact machine type and models
2. Have the same BIOS level
3. Have the same adapters/attachments in the
same locations
4. Have the same address
jumpers/terminators/cabling
5. Have the same software versions and levels
6. Have the same Reference/Diagnostics Diskette
(version)
7. Have the same configuration options set in the
system
8. Have the same setup for the operation system
control files
Comparing the configuration and software set-up
between “working and non-working” systems will often
lead to problem resolution.
Related service information
371
Phone numbers, U.S. and Canada
Note
EMEA customers should contact their Dealer or IBM
Service organization.
Before you place a call to the Support Center, refer to
“Problem determination tips” on page 371.
Authorized Dealers or Servicers
Number
Information
919-517-0001
800-528-7705
800-937-3737
800-426-2472
Bulletin Board Service - PC Company
Bulletin Board Service - TSS Only
IBM Business Partner Education
IBM Customer Engineer Technical
Support
IBM Dealer Support Center
IBM Direct Desktop Software Sales
IBM Part Number ID and Look Up
IBM PC HelpCenter
IBM Software Defect Support (CSDs)
IBM Software Ordering (Publications)
IBM Supplies Technical Hotline
IBM Warranty Parts Claims Center
800-IBM-DEAL
800-342-6672
303-924-4015
800-426-7763
800-237-5511
800-327-5711
800-426-1484
800-388-7080
U.S. Customers and Helpware Subscribers
Number
Information
919-517-0001
800-426-8322
800-999-0052
800-237-4824
800-964-8523
800-742-2493
800-447-4700
800-426-2468
800-426-3333
800-IBM-SERV
800-772-2227
800-426-7282
800-426-9402
(Ext. 150)
800-241-1620
800-342-6672
800-237-5511
800-284-5933
914-962-0310
800-547-1283
Bulletin Board Service - PC Company
Customer Education Business Unit
Customized Operational Services
EduQuest (Educational Computers)
End User HelpDesk Support
IBM Anti-Virus Services
IBM Authorized Dealer Referrals
IBM Dealer Referral
IBM Information Referral Service
IBM Service
IBM PC HelpCenter and HelpDesk
IBM Technical Manuals
Multimedia Information Center
800-551-2832
372
Multimedia HelpCenter
OS/2 Information Line
OS/2 Support Services
Prodigy
Prodigy User Questions
Technical Coordinator Program
SystemXtra for Personal Systems
LAN Automated Distribution/2
OS/2 Bulletin Board
OS/2 Application Assistance Center
Technical Solutions Magazine
Netfinity Server HMM
IBM Canada Customer and Servicer Support
Number
Information
800-661-PSMT
905-316-5556
Business Partner Marketing Support
Business Partner Marketing Support Toronto
Business Partner Marketing Support French
Customer Relations
Customer Service Dispatch
Customer Service Parts
Customer Support Center (ISC)
Customer Service Repair Centre
Dealer Support Group (DSG)
HelpClub Registration / IBM Direct
HelpFax
HelpFax - Toronto
HelpPC
IBM Certification Administrator
Mail to: 50 Acadia Drive
Markham, Ontario L3R 0B3
IBM Education (A+ Course)
IBM Information Network Support
IBM PC Service Partners
International Warranty Registration
Lexmark Product Information
PartnerLine
Parts Orders, Exchange or Emergency
Parts Regular Orders, Exchange
514-938-6048
800-465-4YOU
800-IBM-SERV
800-263-2769
800-465-2222
416-443-5701
800-505-1855
800-465-7999
800-465-3299
905-316-3299
800-565-3344
905-513-3355
800-661-2131
800-268-3100
800-387-8343
800-487-7426
800-663-7662
800-IBM-9990
800-263-2769
416-443-5808
(Fax)
416-443-5755
514-938-3022
905-316-4255
604-664-6464
204-934-2735
800-661-7768
800-565-3344
800-387-8483
800-465-1234
905-316-4148
905-316-4100
(Fax)
905-316-4150
905-316-4100
(Fax)
905-316-4872
905-316-4100
(Fax)
800-661-2131
800-565-3344
416-443-5835
(Fax)
905-316-2445
905-316-3515
(Fax)
416-443-5778
800-505-1855
800-267-7472
Parts Orders, Inquiries
PC Co Bulletin Board - Montreal
PC Co Bulletin Board - Markham
PC Co Bulletin Board - Vancouver
PC Co Bulletin Board - Winnepeg
PS Marketing Support (PSMT)
PS/1 Warranty Customer Helpline
PS/1 Warranty Service (DOAs)
Publications Ordering
Service Management Support
Service Management Support
Service (Warranty) Manager
Service (Warranty) Manager
Service Quality Programs
Service Quality Programs
Skill Dynamics (Education)
ThinkPad EasyServe
Warranty Claim Fulfillment
Warranty Claim Reimbursement
Warranty Claim Reimbursement
Warranty Claim Parts Inquiry
Warranty Provider Support Hotline
Warranty Service, ThinkPad
Related service information
373
Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs,
or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these
available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any
reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not
intended to state or imply that only that IBM product,
program, or service may be used. Subject to IBM’s valid
intellectual property or other legally protectable rights, any
functionally equivalent product, program, or service may be
used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. The
evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with
other products, except those expressly designated by IBM,
are the responsibility of the user.
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation
in the United States or other countries or both:
HelpCenter
IBM
Netfinity
OS/2
ServeRAID
ThinkPad
HelpFax
NetBAY3
Netfinity Manager
Predictive Failure Analysis
SystemXtra
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:
Notes is a trademark or registered trademark of Lotus
Development Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
MMX and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and/or
other countries licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company Limited. ˚
374
Netfinity Server HMM
IBM

Part Number: 37L2020
Printed in U.S.A.
S37L-2ð2ð-ðð
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement